Maju Varghese, Former Biden Aide, Takes Leadership Role at NEWCO Strategies

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterProfile 0

Maju Varghese, a former official from the Biden administration, has assumed the role of principal at NEWCO Strategies, a comprehensive strategic consulting firm renowned for its diverse leadership, composed primarily of minority, female, and LGBTQ individuals.

In a social media announcement on X (formerly Twitter), NEWCO Strategies welcomed Varghese with enthusiasm, highlighting his extensive career in various high-profile roles: “We’re thrilled to announce @moojv77 is joining NEWCO Strategies as a principal. Maju was the former COO and Sr. Advisor for the Biden 2020 campaign, executive director of the Presidential Inaugural Committee, and served in senior roles in the Biden and Obama Administrations.”

Expressing his thoughts on his new position, Varghese conveyed his excitement: “Excited to join Jess O’Connell and her team at NEWCO Strategies. Running organizations and leading teams in today’s landscape is a hard task, and I can attest that leaders are hungry for sound advice, practical solutions, and partners that can help them navigate challenges. I want to apply the lessons I’ve learned, particularly managing through difficult times, to help others.”

Before his appointment at NEWCO Strategies, Varghese held the position of Chief Operating Officer (COO) at the National Endowment for Democracy (NED), an organization dedicated to promoting democratic activities worldwide. His responsibilities included overseeing a vast team engaged in supporting the White House.
Prior to his role at NED, Varghese served as the Director of the White House Military Office and Deputy Assistant to the President. In this capacity, he led a team of approximately 3,000 military and civilian employees, responsible for providing essential services to the White House.

Varghese’s professional journey also encompassed a significant role as the Chief Operating Officer and Senior Advisor during the Biden Campaign. In this capacity, he played a pivotal role in supervising national operations, personnel matters, travel logistics, vetting processes, and compliance, a responsibility that extended from the primaries to the general election.

Maju Varghese’s academic background includes a Juris Doctor degree from Hofstra University’ Maurice A. Dean School of Law and a Bachelor of Arts in Political Science and Economics, obtained from the University of Massachusetts.

New Efforts to Curb “Junk Fees” Unveiled by Biden Administration

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterBusiness, USA 0

The prevalence of unexpected and added fees, encountered by consumers when purchasing airline tickets, renting a car, or even ordering takeout, is the focus of new initiatives announced by the Biden administration. Their aim is to combat these so-called “junk fees” and provide buyers with more transparency regarding their payments.

President Biden expressed his concerns at the White House, saying, “Folks are… tired of being taken advantage of, and being played for suckers.” He emphasized that while these “junk fees” may not be significant to the wealthy, they certainly matter to working-class families.

One significant move unveiled is a proposal by the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) that would prevent companies in various sectors from imposing concealed and deceptive fees. This rule would mandate sellers to disclose all essential costs upfront. The FTC could potentially impose financial penalties on companies that violate this rule. Proponents argue that this regulation will enable consumers to make more informed price comparisons and create a level playing field for businesses that are transparent about their costs.

Additionally, the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB) has instructed banks and credit unions to offer basic information to customers, such as their account balances, without any fees. The White House further disclosed that the CFPB will introduce a separate rule later this month, compelling financial institutions to enable customers to conveniently share their data with other banks if they wish to switch.

However, the Biden administration’s actions have sparked criticism from some quarters. Neil Bradley, the executive vice president of the U.S. Chamber of Commerce, argued that the crackdown on “junk fees” would negatively impact consumers. He expressed puzzlement at the notion that the administration believes it can assist consumers by regulating the pricing of the numerous transactions occurring daily.

On the contrary, consumer advocates have lauded the administration’s efforts. They estimate that “junk fees” cost consumers more than $64 billion annually. Erin Witte, the director of consumer protection at the Consumer Federation of America, affirmed that Americans, regardless of their political affiliations, are weary of being subjected to deceitful and worthless fees. She also pointed out that these fees disproportionately affect low-income consumers and communities of color.

Chip Rogers, the president and CEO of the American Hotel & Lodging Association, announced that the organization will review the FTC rule. However, he emphasized their support for establishing a uniform standard for displaying mandatory fees within the lodging industry. This standard would apply across short-term rental platforms, where such fees are prevalent, online travel agencies, metasearch sites, and hotels.

President Biden had previously urged lawmakers to pass the Junk Fees Prevention Act in his State of the Union speech earlier this year. The proposed legislation seeks to limit the excessive fees imposed by companies.

The Power of Emotional Intelligence in Leadership: Insights from Satya Nadella

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterLifestyle, Technology 0

When Satya Nadella assumed the role of Microsoft CEO in 2014, he displayed a distinct leadership approach. Rather than boasting about IQ points or intellectual achievements, he emphasized the importance of understanding people and building meaningful connections as a leader. His key mantra for effectiveness and setting himself apart from the crowd was encapsulated in just two words: emotional intelligence.

In a widely publicized event nearly a decade ago, Nadella addressed a large audience of students on the topic of their future and possibilities. During his speech, he stressed the significance of developing emotional intelligence (EQ), saying, “In the long run, EQ trumps IQ. Without being a source of energy for others, very little can be accomplished.”

Research indicates that companies that prioritize emotional intelligence in their workforce tend to experience higher levels of productivity and employee engagement compared to those that overlook this vital aspect.

In an era where technological advancements often take center stage, the importance of emotional intelligence can sometimes be overshadowed. However, leaders like Satya Nadella have shown that emotional intelligence is not merely a desirable trait but a crucial element for achieving lasting success in the corporate landscape.
Let’s delve into several ways in which leaders and high achievers can harness emotional intelligence to enhance their own performance and create a more productive workplace environment.

1.Empower Through Active Listening

Two decades ago, I reported to an executive who possessed a high level of emotional intelligence, and I gleaned a valuable lesson that has stayed with me to this day. I was leading a team through a challenging project, and the pressure was palpable, causing tensions to run high. Within the team, there was a quieter member struggling to find their voice amid the chaos.

Instead of steamrolling ahead with his own ideas, our executive, who was also our boss, took a step back. He approached the team member and asked a simple but powerful question: “What do you think?” The impact was astonishing. The team member’s face lit up, and they began to share their valuable insights, including a brilliant solution that hadn’t been considered before. Subsequently, the project achieved resounding success, and we all imbibed a crucial lesson: Leadership is about empowering others and valuing their perspectives.

2.Lead with Authenticity and Empathy

Emotional intelligence is not synonymous with being overly sentimental or softhearted. It is about comprehending the emotions, motivations, and aspirations of the individuals you work with. It involves creating an environment where everyone feels genuinely valued and heard.
The crux of leading with emotional intelligence is to actively listen, empathize, and lead with authenticity. It also entails recognizing and managing one’s own emotions because a high-performing leader who can’t or won’t navigate their own feelings often struggles to guide a team effectively.

3.Embrace the Power of Humility

Admitting that you don’t have all the answers can be uncomfortable, especially when people expect you to provide solutions. Garry Ridge, chairman emeritus of WD-40 Company, had an unconventional perspective during his tenure as CEO. Ridge found that the three most powerful words he ever learned were “I don’t know.” As he became comfortable with not having all the answers, he started to experience personal growth and learning.
Ridge emphasizes that, “As soon as you pretend to know everything, you close yourself off from the opportunity to learn more and gain different perspectives. So, not only have I become comfortable with ‘I don’t know,’ but even more so today, I constantly ask myself, ‘Why do I believe that?’ This is because the world is changing so rapidly.”
As you reflect on your own leadership style, remember that authentic leadership is not about having all the answers but about creating a space where collective brilliance can flourish.

Satya Nadella, in his ongoing role as the leader of Microsoft, continues to demonstrate the power of emotional intelligence. His example underscores that emotional intelligence is not just a buzzword but a potent force that can shape the future of leadership in the tech industry and beyond.

The wisdom shared by Satya Nadella and other experienced leaders emphasizes the importance of emotional intelligence in today’s corporate landscape. This intangible yet powerful attribute, often overshadowed by technological advancements, plays a pivotal role in driving productivity, fostering collaboration, and shaping the future of leadership in the ever-evolving world of business.

Arundhati Roy Charged Over Kashmir Comments Made 13 Years Ago

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterMedia, Media, Women 0

Indian authorities have filed charges against the acclaimed author Arundhati Roy for public statements she made over a decade ago regarding the tumultuous Kashmir region, marking the latest development in the Indian government’s increasingly restrictive stance on free speech under Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s leadership.
Suman Nalwa, a spokeswoman for the New Delhi police, stated that the government had given approval for charges to be brought against Ms. Roy and Kashmiri law professor Sheikh Showkat Hussain. The charges encompass various sections of Indian law, including those related to provocative speech and the incitement of enmity between different groups.

The Lieutenant Governor of the Delhi region indicated that the government had contemplated pursuing a more severe sedition charge against Ms. Roy and Mr. Hussain in connection with a case originating from a complaint lodged in October 2010 by a right-wing Kashmiri Hindu activist against speakers at a conference on Kashmir.
However, no such sedition charge was filed, as India’s highest court is currently deliberating the validity of the colonial-era sedition law, which critics assert has been misused for decades to stifle dissent. The reason for the police’s decision to act on the activist’s complaint over a decade after its filing remains unclear.

The action taken against Ms. Roy, a prominent critic of Prime Minister Modi, and Mr. Hussain occurred shortly after New Delhi police conducted raids on the residences and offices of numerous journalists associated with an online news portal recognized for its critical stance on the Indian government.

Previously, the authorities had also targeted the organization NewsClick. However, their crackdown escalated following the publication of an article in The New York Times that revealed connections between an American tech mogul financing the website and the Chinese government.

On Tuesday, a New Delhi court denied bail to the founder of NewsClick and another individual linked to the website, ordering their detention for ten days. Both individuals, who deny any wrongdoing, face charges under the stringent Unlawful Activities Prevention Act, an anti-terrorism law. Many individuals charged under this law have spent years in detention awaiting trial.

Regarding the Kashmir conference-related case, Mr. Hussain, speaking from Kashmir, informed The New York Times that he had not received any formal communication regarding the charges. When asked for comment, Ms. Roy stated that she needed to consult with her lawyer before discussing the case.

Two other individuals accused in the activist’s complaint, Syed Ali Shah Geelani, a prominent figure in Kashmir’s separatist movement, and Syed Abdul Rahman Geelani, a former university professor, have since passed away. The two men were not related.

The conference, titled “Freedom — the Only Way,” took place in New Delhi on October 21, 2010. During that period, tensions in Muslim-majority Kashmir were running high after the death of a 17-year-old boy who was struck by a tear gas canister fired at close range by Indian security forces as he returned from a tutoring session.

The year saw a cycle of unrest in Kashmir that resulted in the deaths of approximately 120 demonstrators.

In a guest essay published in The New York Times that autumn, Ms. Roy described the turmoil, noting, “Since April, when the army killed three civilians and then passed them off as ‘terrorists,’ masked stone throwers, most of them students, have brought life in Kashmir to a grinding halt. The Indian government has retaliated with bullets, curfew, and censorship.”

In the complaint filed by the Kashmiri Hindu activist, it was alleged that several speeches at the conference, including Ms. Roy’s, had “endangered public peace and security” and that the speakers had advocated for the “separation of Kashmir from India.”

In her speech, Arundhati Roy, the Booker Prize-winning author of “The God of Small Things,” recounted an incident in which she was accosted by a television reporter who repeatedly asked her, “Is Kashmir an integral part of India?”

She responded, “Kashmir has never been an integral part of India. However assertively and frequently you ask me, even the Indian government has acknowledged that it is not an integral part of India.”

The Modi government, which assumed power four years after these events, has taken measures to bring the Kashmir region under direct control, revoking its limited autonomy and suppressing democratic principles and opposing voice

Largest Modern Hindu Temple Inaugurated In New Jersey, Built By 12,500 Volunteers

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterCulture 0

The largest Hindu temple in the United States is set to open its doors in New Jersey this Sunday. Located in Robbinsville, the 183-acre BAPS Swaminarayan Akshardham, named after its founding Hindu spiritual organization, rivals major Hindu temples in India.

Yogi Trivedi, a temple volunteer and a scholar of religion at Columbia University, marveled at the temple’s existence, saying, “I wake up every morning and scratch my eyes thinking, ‘Am I still in central New Jersey?’ It’s like being transported to another world, specifically to India.”

The temple is scheduled for official inauguration on October 8, with public access commencing on October 18. For Indian Americans and Hindu Americans, this represents a significant milestone. Trivedi noted, “This is the American Dream. The sacred geography of India and beyond is here in this one place, and you can experience, witness, and admire it all here in New Jersey. I anticipate, as a scholar of religion, that this will become a popular place of pilgrimage for Hindus from across the world.”

Construction of the temple involved 12,500 volunteers from around the world and has been in progress since 2011. However, it gained significant attention a decade later when a group of immigrant laborers filed a lawsuit against the global organization Bochasanwasi Shri Akshar Purushottam Swaminarayan Sanstha (BAPS), which operates temples worldwide. The lawsuit alleged “shocking” conditions, including forced labor, long work hours, inhospitable living conditions, and caste discrimination.
The initial complaint stated, “For these long and difficult hours of work, the workers were paid an astonishing $450 per month, and even less when Defendants took illegal deductions. Their hourly pay rate came to approximately $1.20 per hour.”

BAPS, however, made a distinction between employment and religious volunteer service, known as seva. A spokesperson for BAPS, Ronak Patel, explained, “The artisans who helped to build our mandir came to the U.S. as volunteers, not as employees. We took care of the artisans’ needs in the U.S., including travel, lodging, food, medical care, and internet and prepaid phone cards so they could stay in touch with their families in India. BAPS India also supported the artisans’ families in India, so they did not suffer financial hardship as a result of the artisans’ seva in the U.S.”

Many of the laborers who participated in the temple’s construction arrived in New Jersey from India on religious visas and belonged to the Dalit community, historically marginalized groups in South Asia’s caste system. The lawsuit claimed that temple leadership enforced the caste hierarchy at work.
The lawsuit has been put on hold, with 12 of the original 21 plaintiffs moving to dismiss their claims. BAPS Akshardham spokespeople have assured that the temple will be a place for people of all creeds and castes to gather in community.

The temple’s walls feature carvings of historical figures like Martin Luther King Jr. and Abraham Lincoln, emphasizing inclusivity. Trivedi commented, “When you come to the mandir, you will see people of all genders, all castes, and social backgrounds living, eating, praying, loving, and serving together.”
However, activists argue that the allegations still raise questions about the line between religious service and work exploitation, which particularly affects vulnerable Dalit communities.

Sunita Viswanath, a civil rights activist and co-founder of the civil rights group Hindus for Human Rights, expressed her concerns, saying, “A place of worship, a temple, is such an important space, especially for an immigrant community who’s making a home in a new country. I would want anybody who goes to the temple to really ask themselves, really do some soul searching, about going to a temple where there are such serious allegations of labor and human rights violations.”

The construction of the temple was no small feat, involving the placement of 2 million cubic feet of stone in Robbinsville Township. The temple is a cultural blend, featuring materials sourced from around the world and nods to American history.

The outside of the temple was built with non-traditional Bulgarian limestone to withstand New Jersey’s cold winters. The interior includes stone from various countries, including Greece, Italy, and India. A traditional Indian stepwell contains waters from 300 bodies in India and all 50 U.S. states. Notably, women played key roles in running the project, a rarity in temple construction.

Trivedi sees the temple’s design as representative of the diverse community that will gather there, with inclusivity reflected on the walls. He said, “That kind of inclusivity is not just talked about, it’s actually seen on the walls.”

This landmark Hindu temple in New Jersey, with its rich cultural diversity and complex history, is poised to become a significant focal point for Hindu and Indian American communities across the nation.

IMF Says Global Economy ‘Limping Along’, Cuts Growth Forecast For China, Euro Zone

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterFinance/Economy 0

The initial complaint stated, “For these long and difficult hours of work, the workers were paid an astonishing $450 per month, and even less when Defendants took illegal deductions. Their hourly pay rate came to approximately $1.20 per hour.”

The lawsuit has been put on hold, with 12 of the original 21 plaintiffs moving to dismiss their claims. BAPS Akshardham spokespeople have assured that the temple will be a place for people of all creeds and castes to gather in community.

However, activists argue that the allegations still raise questions about the line between religious service and work exploitation, which particularly affects vulnerable Dalit communities.

The Investment Wisdom of Warren Buffett: Earning Money While You Sleep

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterBusiness 0

Warren Buffett, a renowned investor, has had a remarkable career marked by astounding returns. Over the span of almost six decades, from 1964 to 2022, his conglomerate, Berkshire Hathaway Inc. (NYSE: BRK), achieved an overall gain of 3,787,464%. This impressive performance significantly outshone the S&P 500, which delivered a return of 24,708% during the same period.

Buffett, known for his investment acumen, doesn’t solely rely on stocks that soar in value; he’s also a proponent of collecting dividends, often stating, “If you don’t find a way to make money while you sleep, you will work until you die.”

Many companies in Buffett’s extensive portfolio pay dividends to their shareholders. In this discussion, we’ll focus on Chevron Corp. (NYSE: CVX), the largest energy stock within Berkshire Hathaway’s holdings.

As of June 30, Berkshire Hathaway held a substantial 123,120,120 shares of Chevron. At that time, the value of this position was estimated at $19.4 billion, making Chevron the fourth-largest publicly traded holding in Berkshire’s portfolio.

The energy sector, driven by oil prices, can be quite volatile, experiencing significant price fluctuations. Chevron’s shares saw substantial gains in 2021 and 2022. However, in 2023, they faced a decline of approximately 6.7%.

Beyond the potential for capital gains through stock trading, investors can also benefit from the dividends offered by the energy giant. Chevron currently maintains a quarterly dividend rate of $1.51 per share, resulting in an annual yield of 3.7%. Given Berkshire’s substantial holding of 123,120,120 Chevron shares, this equates to a potential quarterly dividend income of $184.68 million from the company.

The beauty of collecting dividends is that you don’t need to be the “Oracle of Omaha” to take advantage of opportunities like those presented by Chevron.
Growing Dividends from Chevron

In January, Chevron’s board made the decision to enhance the company’s quarterly dividend by 6%, bringing it to $1.51 per share. This increase sets Chevron on course to achieve its 36th consecutive year of boosting its annual dividend payout per share.

Chevron adheres to a quarterly distribution schedule. If an investor’s goal is to accumulate $1,000 per month from Chevron, this translates to $3,000 per quarter. To attain this income level, an investor would need to own approximately 1,986.75 shares of Chevron. This calculation is achieved by dividing the desired quarterly income of $3,000 by the per-share quarterly payout of $1.51.

Considering Chevron’s current stock price of $162.23 per share, amassing 1,986.75 shares would equate to an investment worth approximately $322,311.

For those with a more modest target of earning $200 per month, equivalent to $600 per quarter, they would require approximately 397.35 shares (calculated as $600 divided by $1.51) or an investment totaling around $64,462 in Chevron stock (computed as 397.35 shares multiplied by $162.23).

Although Chevron’s stock has recently experienced a pullback, analyst Nitin Kumar from Mizuho holds an optimistic outlook for the oil supermajor. Kumar has assigned a Buy rating to the company and set a price target of $215, which stands approximately 33% above the current stock price.

It’s important to note that stocks can exhibit considerable fluctuations, and even the most reputable analysts are not infallible. Therefore, conducting thorough research and due diligence before making investment decisions is always advisable.

Renowned Statistician Calyampudi Radhakrishna Rao, a Pioneer of Modern Data Analysis, Passes Away at 102

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterEducation, Profile 0

Calyampudi Radhakrishna Rao, a distinguished figure in the world of statistics who played a pivotal role in shaping modern scientific data analysis, has passed away at the age of 102. Rao’s groundbreaking work, including his development of ‘information geometry’ and data-reduction techniques, has had a profound impact on a wide range of fields, from agricultural sciences and biomedical research to econometrics, industrial engineering, social sciences, and signal processing. His contributions were so influential that they were even instrumental in uncovering the Higgs boson, a significant discovery at CERN, the European particle-physics laboratory near Geneva, Switzerland.

Rao’s remarkable journey began in Hadagalli, India, where he was born. His father, a police inspector, frequently moved due to job postings until the family eventually settled in Visakhapatnam, India. Recognizing Rao’s exceptional mathematical talents, both of his parents encouraged him to pursue bachelor’s and master’s degrees in mathematics at Andhra University in Visakhapatnam.

Picture: IE

In 1941, Rao joined the Indian Statistical Institute (ISI) in Kolkata, which was founded and led by the eminent statistician P. C. Mahalanobis. At the time, the field of statistical inference was still in its formative stages. Rao embarked on a master’s course in statistics at the University of Calcutta in the same year, where he laid the groundwork for many of the data analysis tools in use today. His early work, including his master’s thesis in 1943, introduced the ‘perimeter’ test for comparing multiple experimental groups, which subsequently gave rise to the multivariate analysis of variance (MANOVA) procedure. Rao’s innovative contributions continued with the derivation of the Cramér–Rao inequality in 1943, providing a lower bound for estimating unknown parameters within a statistical population, a concept essential for fields such as medical research.

In addition to his exceptional mathematical contributions, Rao also made a notable foray into archaeology and ethnology in 1946 when he worked at the Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology at the University of Cambridge, UK. There, he analyzed measurements of ancient skulls unearthed from graves in Sudan, enabling the categorization of these remains by tribe and age. During this time, he also began his PhD studies under the guidance of the renowned statistician Ronald Fisher, one of the founding fathers of modern statistics. Rao’s work extended to mapping mouse chromosomes for genetic linkage studies, leading to statistical methodologies that are foundational in modern data analysis.

Rao’s work was not confined to academia. His statistical techniques found applications in the design of experiments and devices, including computer chips. By selecting key parameters for robust product design while minimizing costs, time, and labor, Rao’s contributions led to the development of ‘orthogonal arrays,’ which subsequently played a crucial role in Japan’s industrial quality revolution in the 1970s under the guidance of Japanese engineer Genichi Taguchi.

Returning to the ISI in 1948, Rao was appointed as a professor the following year, marking a remarkable achievement as he was not yet 29 years old. Although he had also applied for a lectureship at Cambridge, he was denied the position with the reason that “foreigners” were not typically appointed to teach English students. Nonetheless, Rao’s leadership at the ISI helped it become one of the world’s foremost statistical institutes. He served as the head of research and training and later as the director.

After his mandatory retirement in 1978, Rao moved to the United States. There, he made a significant impact on statistics programs at the University of Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, where he co-established the Center for Multivariate Analysis. His influence extended to Pennsylvania State University in State College in 1988 and, in 2010, to the University at Buffalo, New York. In 2007, the C. R. Rao Advanced Institute of Mathematics, Statistics, and Computer Science was established in Hyderabad, India, in his honor.

Among Rao’s extensive body of work, two of his books, “Advanced Statistical Methods in Biometric Research” (1952) and “Linear Statistical Inference and its Applications” (1965), stand as iconic texts. These books have played a pivotal role in training generations of statisticians around the world. Notably, just a few months before his passing, Rao received the International Prize in Statistics, becoming the fourth recipient of this prestigious award, which was established in 2017 to advance the understanding of the role of statistics in contemporary life.

Beyond his impressive contributions to the world of statistics, Rao had a passion for south Indian classical dances, photography, and gardening. He was celebrated as an exceptional teacher who instilled in his students the ability to think independently. Rao was known for his humility, soft-spoken nature, and gentle demeanor, leaving an indelible mark on the field of statistics. His loss will be deeply felt, but his legacy will endure as a source of inspiration and innovation.

The Impact of Religion on Well-Being: A Global Perspective

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterLifestyle, Religion 0

A recent Gallup report reveals that religious individuals worldwide tend to exhibit more positivity, higher social support, and greater community involvement when compared to their non-religious counterparts. This comprehensive study, spanning a decade of data, highlights the complexity of measuring the well-being of religious people, and it emphasizes that the benefits of religion can vary significantly from one country to another. However, it’s essential to acknowledge that not everyone is equally interested in or receptive to the potential advantages of religious engagement.

The report, released on October 10, states, “Gallup World Poll data from 2012-2022 find, on a number of wellbeing measures, that people who are religious have better wellbeing than people who are not.”

To assess these differences, the study evaluated nine aspects of individuals’ lives, covering positive interactions, social lives, civic engagement, physical health, community basics, optimism, and more. Each of these nine indexes was scored on a scale from 0 to 100, based on responses to a series of questions.

For instance, the positive experience index included questions like “Did you smile or laugh today?” and “Were you treated with respect?” The civic engagement index inquired about charitable donations and assisting strangers, while the physical health index asked about limitations in performing typical age-related activities and the presence of physical pain. The community basics index explored housing and infrastructure.

Religious individuals scored higher than their non-religious counterparts on five of Gallup’s indexes: social life (77.6 compared to 73.7 for non-religious individuals), positive experience (69 to 65), community basics (59.7 to 55.6), optimism (49.4 to 48.4), and civic engagement (35.8 to 31).

In two indexes, religious and non-religious individuals showed similar scores: the “life evaluation” index, which assesses whether individuals are thriving or suffering, and their local economic confidence.

However, religious individuals scored lower on two other indexes: negative experience and physical health.

Notably, these differences between religious and non-religious individuals were most pronounced in highly religious countries. Even small variations can have significant global implications. The report states, “Each one-point difference in index scores between religious and nonreligious people represents an effect for an estimated 40 million adults worldwide.”

For example, the four-point difference in the Positive Experience Index means that approximately 160 million more adults globally have positive experiences due to their religious affiliation.

The report suggests that religion and spirituality might serve as valuable resources for addressing the mental health crisis prevalent in many countries. However, the report also highlights the declining interest in and engagement with religion.

Gallup partnered with the Radiant Foundation for this report. The Radiant Foundation is associated with The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and promotes a positive view of religion and spirituality.

Jeff Jones, Gallup’s senior editor, commented on the complexity of quantifying the impact of religion and spirituality on well-being, especially as religious landscapes change and spiritual practices evolve. He noted, “With the changing nature of religious landscapes and spiritual practice, it can make quantitative measurement amid the changes challenging, as the traditional forms of spirituality — namely, attending formal religious services, are becoming less common, and people are seeking other ways to fulfill their spiritual needs.”

The report also cites several factors contributing to the decline of religious engagement around the world. These include growing polarization, which pits religious and non-religious individuals against each other, with the latter sometimes viewing the former as a threat. Religious groups, particularly from larger faith traditions, may wield their power in ways that others perceive as harmful.

The report suggests that “religious groups and individuals — particularly from the dominant religious group in a society — who are hostile to other religious groups may promote a cultural context that is harmful to the wellbeing of those outside the group. Resentment toward the dominant group may also tune people out to their messages, both those that are harmful (out-group animosity) but also that are helpful (serving others).”

The Gallup report provides valuable insights into the impact of religion on individuals’ well-being and the intricate dynamics at play in various countries. It underscores the potential benefits of religious engagement while acknowledging the challenges posed by the evolving landscape of spirituality and the declining interest in religion worldwide.

RFK Jr.’s Independent Run For President Draws GOP Criticism And Silence From National Democrats

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterProfile, USA 0

Republicans launched an attack on Robert F. Kennedy Jr. on Monday as the prominent environmental attorney and anti-vaccine activist officially announced his independent bid for the White House. This move has stirred concerns among conservatives that Kennedy, a former Democrat, could siphon votes away from former President Donald Trump in the 2024 election.

The Republican National Committee and Trump’s campaign wasted no time in critiquing Kennedy’s liberal background. Meanwhile, national Democrats remained silent on the matter as Kennedy made it clear in a speech in Philadelphia that he was distancing himself from both political parties.
Trump spokesperson Steven Cheung issued a statement cautioning voters not to be misled by those who feign conservative values. Cheung described Kennedy’s campaign as a “vanity project for a liberal Kennedy looking to cash in on his family’s name.”

This strong reaction highlights the uncertainty surrounding Kennedy’s much-anticipated decision to run as an independent. While it is likely to impact the 2024 race, which is shaping up to be a rematch between Trump and President Joe Biden, the exact implications remain unclear.

Kennedy, a member of one of the most renowned families in Democratic politics, initially pursued an improbable primary bid and surprisingly held more favorability among Republicans than Democrats. Even Trump himself had expressed his positive opinion of Kennedy just two weeks prior, stating, “I like him a lot. I’ve known him for a long time.”

Both Biden and Trump’s allies had, at times, questioned whether Kennedy would act as a spoiler against their respective candidates. Kennedy acknowledged both sides’ concerns, stating, “The truth is, they’re both right. My intention is to spoil it for both of them.”

Speaking from Philadelphia’s Independence Mall, where America’s founding documents were adopted, Kennedy emphasized his desire to distance himself from either political party. He spoke of a “rising tide of discontent” in the nation and expressed his aim to make a “new declaration of independence” from corporations, the media, and the two major political parties.

Hundreds of supporters, holding signs with slogans like “Declare your independence,” and chanting “RFK, all the way!” were enthusiastic about his decision. His supporters comprised a diverse mix of disillusioned Democrats, Trump voters seeking change, and political outsiders whose beliefs did not align with any single party. They believed that Kennedy could bring them together.

Peter Pantazis, a 40-year-old business owner from Delaware, expressed his optimism, saying, “He’s going to win. I’ve been praying that he’s going to decentralize the campaign, get away from the party system, and actually be the candidate of the people for the people. And that’s what he announced today.”

Brent Snyder, a disabled veteran from south Philadelphia, stated, “The last couple of years I’ve been noticing the Republican Party’s been going a way I didn’t like. Not that I agree with everything that’s happening to Trump, but I think right now he has more baggage than his country needs. The division right now is just terrible. We need someone to bring both sides together to make us work.”

The atmosphere among the crowd was filled with joy, hope, and occasionally, the faint scent of marijuana. Kennedy invoked historical figures like John Adams and George Washington to make a case for unity and warned against the pitfalls of partisan politics.

However, Kennedy’s independent campaign faces significant challenges in competing with the well-funded, experienced campaigns of Trump and Biden. During his announcement, there was a brief delay when he found that his speech was loaded upside-down in the teleprompter.

Kennedy’s decision to run independently comes shortly after progressive activist Cornel West abandoned his Green Party bid in favor of an independent presidential run. Additionally, the centrist group No Labels is actively working to secure ballot access for an unnamed candidate.

Recognizing the risk that Kennedy might draw votes away from Republicans, Trump’s allies have begun circulating opposition research aimed at undermining his support among conservative voters. The Republican National Committee released a fact sheet titled “Radical DEMOCRAT RFK Jr.” that highlighted instances of Kennedy’s support for liberal politicians and ideas, as well as his endorsement of conspiracy theories related to COVID-19 and past election claims.

On the other hand, Biden’s allies have largely dismissed Kennedy’s primary campaign as unserious. When asked for comment before the announcement, a Democratic National Committee spokesman responded with an eye-roll emoji. The DNC declined to comment on Monday.

Four of Kennedy’s eight surviving siblings issued a joint statement denouncing his candidacy, expressing concern about the potential harm it could cause to the country. They emphasized that while Bobby shares their family name, his values, vision, and judgment differ significantly from theirs.
Tony Lyons, co-founder and co-chairman of American Values 2024, a super PAC supporting Kennedy, dismissed these comments as part of a strategy to discredit him. He pointed out that disagreements within families are a natural part of democracy.

While Kennedy has historically identified as a Democrat and often invoked the legacies of his late father, Sen. Robert F. Kennedy, and his uncle, President John F. Kennedy, on the campaign trail, he has also developed relationships with far-right figures in recent years. He appeared on a channel associated with Sandy Hook conspiracy theorist Alex Jones and headlined an event on the ReAwaken America Tour, organized by Trump’s former national security adviser Michael Flynn.

Polls indicate that Kennedy is more favorably viewed by Republicans than Democrats. Some far-right conservatives have supported him for his fringe views, including his vocal distrust of COVID-19 vaccines, despite scientific evidence demonstrating their safety and effectiveness in preventing severe disease and death.

Kennedy’s anti-vaccine organization, Children’s Health Defense, is currently involved in a lawsuit against several news organizations, including The Associated Press, alleging antitrust violations related to their actions in countering misinformation about COVID-19 and vaccines. Kennedy had temporarily stepped away from the group upon announcing his presidential run, but he is listed as one of its attorneys in the lawsuit.

Google Announces New Generative AI Search Capabilities For Doctors

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterTechnology 0

Google Cloud unveiled new AI-driven search capabilities designed to assist healthcare professionals in swiftly retrieving accurate clinical information from various medical records. The healthcare sector houses extensive valuable data, but its scattered storage across multiple systems and formats can be an obstacle for clinicians. Google Cloud’s innovative search tool enables doctors to extract data from clinical notes, scanned documents, and electronic health records, consolidating it into a single accessible location. This innovation is expected to significantly save time and enhance efficiency for healthcare workers.

Lisa O’Malley, Senior Director of Product Management for Cloud AI at Google Cloud, highlighted the advantages of this technology, saying, “While it should save time to be able to do that search, it should also prevent frustration on behalf of clinicians and [make] sure that they get to an answer easier.”

With these new capabilities, healthcare professionals can bypass the cumbersome process of sifting through separate notes, faxes, and electronic health records to obtain patient histories. Instead, they can perform specific searches like “What medications has this patient taken in the last 12 months?” and access the relevant information seamlessly.

Furthermore, Google’s search features have broader applications, including accurate billing code assignment and assessing patient eligibility for clinical trials. To address concerns about data accuracy, the technology can trace and link information back to its original source within an organization’s internal data, mitigating doubts about AI-generated responses.

These search capabilities are particularly valuable in the context of the healthcare industry, where staffing shortages and excessive administrative work are prevalent. A 2016 study sponsored by the American Medical Association revealed that for every hour physicians spent with patients, they dedicated an additional two hours to administrative tasks. This study also indicated that physicians spent an extra one to two hours on clerical work outside of their regular working hours, commonly referred to as “pajama time.” Additionally, a January 2022 survey by Medscape reported that 53% of physicians experienced burnout, up from 42% in 2018.

Google aims to alleviate these burdens by reducing the time clinicians spend searching through records and databases. Lisa O’Malley expressed the company’s commitment to benefiting patients by making healthcare processes more efficient, stating, “Anything that Google can do by applying our search technologies, our health-care technologies and research capabilities to make the journey of the clinicians and health-care providers and payers more quick, more efficient, saving them cost, I think ultimately benefits us as patients.”

The new search functionalities will be accessible to health and life sciences organizations through Google’s Vertex AI Search platform, an extension of the existing Healthcare API and Healthcare Data Engine products. Aashima Gupta, Global Director of Health Care Strategy and Solutions at Google Cloud, emphasized the importance of seamlessly integrating these capabilities into clinicians’ workflows, ensuring they do not disrupt established routines.

Recognizing the healthcare industry’s historical reluctance to embrace new technology, Google has prioritized providing solutions that are user-friendly and unobtrusive to healthcare workers. Gupta stressed that they are cautious not to introduce friction into healthcare professionals’ daily workflows while empowering them with technology.
While customers can sign up for early access to Vertex AI Search for healthcare and life sciences, Google Cloud has already conducted tests with healthcare organizations such as Mayo Clinic, Hackensack Meridian Health, and Highmark Health.

Mayo Clinic, for example, is initially employing the Vertex AI Search tools for administrative purposes rather than clinical care. Cris Ross, Mayo’s Chief Information Officer, emphasized the organization’s cautious approach, stating that they will only integrate these tools into patient care when they are confident of their readiness.
In the future, Mayo Clinic envisions leveraging Vertex AI Search to assist nurses in summarizing lengthy surgical notes, managing complex medical histories, and rapidly answering specific patient-related queries. However, the organization is taking a gradual approach to assess where Google’s AI solutions can be most beneficial.
Richard Clarke, Chief Analytics Officer at Highmark Health, reported a positive initial response to the search tools within the organization, with more than 200 use-case ideas in the backlog. However, similar to Mayo Clinic, Highmark Health recognizes the challenge of prioritizing and scaling the technology while building trust among employees.

Despite these promising early signs, Google Cloud remains cautious in its deployment strategy, focusing on small-scale implementation with dedicated support. The aim is to ensure that the technology aligns with the unique needs and workflows of healthcare providers.

It’s important to note that Google Cloud does not access customer data for training models, and the service complies with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) to safeguard patient data.

Aashima Gupta, Global Director of Health Care Strategy and Solutions at Google Cloud, expressed excitement about the potential of Google’s tools to create a more comprehensive and cohesive healthcare experience. She highlighted the role of AI in connecting the dots from a patient’s perspective, making practical use cases in healthcare more feasible.

Google Cloud’s introduction of AI-driven search capabilities has the potential to streamline healthcare workflows, reduce administrative burdens on clinicians, and enhance the overall patient experience. By making it easier for healthcare professionals to access and utilize critical clinical information, Google aims to contribute to the efficiency and effectiveness of the healthcare industry while respecting established workflows and data security standards.

Psychologists Studied 40,000 Couples — The Single Phrase That Bettered Their Relationship

October 18, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterLifestyle 0

What if a single phrase could change the course of your relationship?

The language and the words you use when you talk with your partner always matter. They are at the core of how successful your relationship is gonna be — they can literally make it or break it.

After studying 40,000 couples, psychologists Dr. John Gottman and Dr. Julie Schwartz Gottman discovered the one phrase that can significantly contribute to any relationship’s success:

We all want to feel appreciated

The #1 thing we all want in our relationships is to be valued.

We want our partners to notice the things we do for them. We want our efforts to be acknowledged. We want to be seen.

A simple “thank you” can do the trick.

Making room for gratitude within a relationship builds intimacy and emotional safety. But anyone who’s ever been in a long-term relationship knows that it’s far more common to notice the things our partners do wrong instead of what they’re doing right — and vice versa.

To quote the Gottmans:

“But it’s easy to fall into the trap of only seeing what your partner is not doing. You develop a narrative where you’re the one putting in all the effort, and you start to believe it’s true.”

We take the things our partners do for us for granted

We say “thank you” when our colleague or friend brings us a cup of coffee or holds the door for us, but when our partners do the same thing, we keep our gratitude silent.

Think about all the small and thoughtful gestures you and your partner do for each other. For example, you might make a cup of tea for them every morning. They, in turn, might cook your favorite meal every time you’re feeling down.

How often do you say “thank you” to each other?

The thing is, most of us take the little things our partners do for granted and act as if saying “thank you” should be reserved for some special occasions. Over time, we even forget how important saying “thank you” really is.

And it’s really important. Research has shown that romantic partners who express gratitude are more than three times less likely to break up. Another study suggests that individuals who feel appreciated by their partners have better-functioning relationships and are more resilient to internal and external stressors.

How to open a cycle of appreciation and gratitude

When it comes to relationships, “thank you” is the most under-appreciated and under-used phrase.

Saying “thank you” to your partner is like saying “I appreciate you”. You don’t always need grand gestures or big love words to show your appreciation. Those two “humble” words work their magic.

Here are some situations where you or your partner (probably) don’t say thank you to each other but should:

With every little thing you do for each other (making a cup of coffee every morning, washing the dishes when it’s not one’s turn, or bringing home one’s favorite snack).
When you receive a genuine compliment (say “thank you” instead of deflecting the praise by saying something like “oh, it’s nothing”).
When one of you shows patience (e.g., when you run late, or when your partner is having a tantrum).
When one of you actively listens and gives the other one their undivided attention (say “thank you for listening”).
When you support each other, especially in times of need (say “thank you for being there with me when I was going through “X thing”).

Expressing gratitude to your partner might be the single best way to maintain a high-quality relationship.

You don’t have to go around saying thank you to each other 10 times a day, but you should say it often to make each other feel valued and appreciated.

It goes without saying that a good partner should be supportive and considerate but that doesn’t mean you should take the things they do for you for granted — and vice versa.

Every little thing one of you does for the other takes thoughtfulness, time, and energy, and none of you should ever feel your actions go unnoticed and under-appreciated.

Silent gratitude sucks. Be vocal. Say “thank you” more often. A cycle of mutual appreciation and gratitude can work wonders for your relationship.

(Margaret Pan is a freelance writer who writes to help others find love for others and themselves. This article originally appeared on YourTango)

Prof. Sujata Gadkar-Wilcox Appointed To The Connecticut Commission On Human Rights And Opportunities

October 11, 2023October 24, 2023 Staff ReporterProfile 0

Prof. Sujata Gadkar-Wilcox, associate professor of legal studies and chair of justice and law at the Quinipiac University has been appointed by Connecticut Gov. Ned Lamont as a Commissioner and Member of the Connecticut Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities (CHRO).

Prof. Sujata Gadkar-Wilcox is Chair of the Department of Justice and Law, and Associate Professor of Legal Studies at Quinnipiac University. She is also Executive Director of the Oxford Consortium for Human Rights and a Fulbright-Nehru Scholar.

Gadkar-Wilcox expressed interest in the Commission on Human Rights and Opportunities (CHRO) years ago and was notified when a seat became available. She intends to use her experience in this position as a professor to benefit her students.

“I teach my students to think about the way in which what we learn in the classroom can be utilized outside of the classroom,” said Gadkar-Wilcox. “I believe my position at the CHRO will provide me with new opportunities to learn how nondiscrimination laws in employment, housing and public accommodation are enforced in practice. I look forward to taking this knowledge back to my students and connecting it back to my own research in human rights and constitutional law.”

The goal of the commission is to eliminate discrimination through civil and human rights law enforcement and to establish equal opportunity and justice for all persons within the state, through advocacy and education. Gadkar-Wilcox’s new role entails overseeing the work of the regional staff offices, which receive and resolve cases from individuals who believe they have suffered illegal discrimination. She will also attend monthly meetings and work on compliance, enforcement and monitoring.

Her time in the legal studies field began as a litigation associate at a major law firm in New York in 2005 after graduating from law school. Gadkar-Wilcox subsequently became the director of a non-profit legal education organization to pursue her commitment to public interest law and then she came to Quinnipiac in 2011. She has served as the executive director of the Oxford Consortium for Human Rights for many years, too.

Programs at Quinnipiac, such as the global engagement fellows program, enable students to take the principles they learn in the classroom and build collaborative partnerships with community organizations, as well as show students how the law can serve as a tool for social justice. Gadkar-Wilcox supports and vouches for this program, as it is her deep passion to connect students with local communities.

Now, as she kickstarts her time at the CHRO, she will be able to make a difference both on an academic and state level, using her decades of research and work as support, she said. “As a South Asian woman, it is important to represent a different perspective on the CHRO and in public life that does not always get the same amount of visibility,” said Gadkar-Wilcox. “It is an honor and a privilege to apply my own academic training in a public capacity and to represent Quinnipiac and the South Asian community in this role.”

Scientists Confirm What’s Inside The Moon

October 11, 2023October 24, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

The verdict is in, and it appears the Moon is not composed of green cheese, as the age-old saying humorously suggested. An extensive investigation published in May has yielded intriguing insights into the Moon’s composition. It turns out that the inner core of the Moon is a solid sphere with a density similar to that of iron. This discovery has the potential to resolve a long-standing debate regarding the Moon’s inner core, shedding light on its history and, by extension, the history of the Solar System.

A team led by astronomer Arthur Briaud from the French National Centre for Scientific Research in France presented their findings. They asserted, “Our results question the evolution of the Moon’s magnetic field thanks to its demonstration of the existence of the inner core and support a global mantle overturn scenario that brings substantial insights on the timeline of the lunar bombardment in the first billion years of the Solar System.”

To gain insight into the interior composition of celestial bodies within the Solar System, scientists typically rely on seismic data. By analyzing the way acoustic waves generated by seismic events travel through and interact with materials inside planets or moons, researchers can create detailed interior maps of these objects.

In the case of the Moon, seismic data collected during the Apollo missions has been available, but its resolution was insufficient for accurately determining the state of the Moon’s inner core. While the presence of a fluid outer core was known, the exact nature of the Moon’s core remained a subject of debate, with models proposing both a solid inner core and an entirely fluid core appearing to fit the available Apollo data.

To definitively settle this question, Briaud and his team compiled data from various space missions and lunar laser ranging experiments to create a comprehensive profile of several lunar characteristics. These included the extent of the Moon’s deformation caused by its gravitational interactions with Earth, variations in its distance from Earth, and its overall density.

The researchers then conducted modeling experiments involving different core compositions to determine which one aligned most closely with the observed data. Their analysis yielded several significant findings.

Firstly, the models that best matched the known properties of the Moon suggested active overturn processes occurring deep within the lunar mantle. This phenomenon involves denser material inside the Moon moving toward its center, while less dense material rises upward. This activity has long been proposed as a potential explanation for the presence of certain elements in lunar volcanic regions, and the team’s research adds further evidence in favor of this hypothesis.

Additionally, the study revealed that the lunar core closely resembles that of Earth, featuring an outer fluid layer and a solid inner core. According to their modeling, the outer core has a radius of approximately 362 kilometers (225 miles), while the inner core has a radius of around 258 kilometers (160 miles). This inner core’s density was estimated to be approximately 7,822 kilograms per cubic meter, remarkably close to that of iron.

Interestingly, in 2011, a team led by NASA Marshall planetary scientist Renee Weber arrived at a similar conclusion using advanced seismological techniques applied to Apollo mission data. They identified evidence of a solid inner core with a radius of approximately 240 kilometers and a density of about 8,000 kilograms per cubic meter. Briaud and his team view their findings as confirmation of these earlier results, forming a compelling case for the presence of an Earth-like core within the Moon.

The implications of this discovery extend to the Moon’s evolution. It is known that shortly after its formation, the Moon possessed a robust magnetic field, which began to decline approximately 3.2 billion years ago. The existence and composition of the lunar core are closely linked to the origin and eventual disappearance of this magnetic field. Understanding these factors could provide valuable insights into the Moon’s history and its magnetic past.

As humanity looks forward to returning to the Moon in the near future, seismic verification of these findings may not be far off. This exciting revelation about the Moon’s inner core composition brings us one step closer to unraveling the mysteries of our celestial neighbor and the broader history of our Solar System.

Google Announces New Generative AI Search Capabilities For Doctors

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterHealth, Technology 0

While customers can sign up for early access to Vertex AI Search for healthcare and life sciences, Google Cloud has already conducted tests with healthcare organizations such as Mayo Clinic, Hackensack Meridian Health, and Highmark Health.

In the future, Mayo Clinic envisions leveraging Vertex AI Search to assist nurses in summarizing lengthy surgical notes, managing complex medical histories, and rapidly answering specific patient-related queries. However, the organization is taking a gradual approach to assess where Google’s AI solutions can be most beneficial.

Richard Clarke, Chief Analytics Officer at Highmark Health, reported a positive initial response to the search tools within the organization, with more than 200 use-case ideas in the backlog. However, similar to Mayo Clinic, Highmark Health recognizes the challenge of prioritizing and scaling the technology while building trust among employees.

Mongolia in Tibetan Buddhism and China’s Influence

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterCulture, World 0

For centuries, Tibetan Buddhism has been guided by the Dalai Lama, an 88-year-old spiritual leader who sought refuge in India in 1959 and has since lived in exile. However, Beijing views the Dalai Lama as a separatist figure and insists that only the Communist Party, an avowedly atheist organization, possesses the authority to designate his next reincarnation, as well as that of other prominent lamas. This control over religious leadership is part of China’s strategy to diminish the Dalai Lama’s influence in Tibet and suppress any challenges to the Communist Party’s dominance. As the Dalai Lama advances in age, tensions escalate over the eventual struggle between Tibetan exiles and Beijing for the legitimate succession of his reincarnation.

Mongolia’s Complicated Role in the Tibetan Buddhist Leadership

Mongolia plays a pivotal role in this complex narrative due to the significant following the Dalai Lama enjoys within its borders. Nearly half of Mongolia’s 3.4 million population identifies as Buddhist. The roots of Tibetan Buddhism in Mongolia run deep, with a history spanning over seven centuries. Nevertheless, the faith faced severe suppression for more than seven decades during Mongolia’s socialist rule, which began in 1924. The resurgence of Buddhism only occurred following democratic reforms in the 1990s.

The veneration of the Dalai Lama has created a challenging situation for the Mongolian government. Mongolia heavily relies on China for virtually all its trade, which puts them in a vulnerable position. Beijing responded to the Dalai Lama’s 2016 visit to Mongolia by closing border crossings, imposing tariffs, and canceling bilateral talks, signaling the consequences of any association with the spiritual leader in the eyes of China.

Mongolia’s Spiritual Leader: The Bogd

The spiritual leader of Tibetan Buddhism in Mongolia is known as the Bogd, formally addressed as the Jebtsundamba Khutughtu. This position boasts a rich history dating back nearly four centuries to the descendants of the Mongol emperor Kublai Khan. Currently, an 8-year-old boy represents the 10th incarnation of the Bogd, succeeding the previous one who passed away in 2012.

Although Tibetan Buddhism does not adhere as rigidly to hierarchical structures as some organized religions, such as the Roman Catholic Church, the Bogd holds one of the most esteemed senior positions in Tibetan Buddhism, ranking after the Dalai Lama and the Panchen Lama. Notably, the Panchen Lama, who was appointed by the Dalai Lama in 1995, was abducted by China and replaced with a monk chosen by Beijing, illustrating China’s aggressive interference in Tibetan religious affairs.

The Enigmatic Process of Lama Selection

The selection process for high lamas is shrouded in mystery. Tibetan Buddhist leaders claim to follow an ancient tradition involving mystical visions and astrology to guide their search. Candidates are subjected to tests to determine if they exhibit qualities considered exceptionally holy. In the case of the boy chosen as the next Bogd, religious officials disclosed that he underwent a secret test as a toddler and successfully identified personal artifacts belonging to the previous Bogd.

Throughout history, this process has been criticized for being influenced by politics and, at times, corruption. In the late 18th century, Emperor Qianlong of China attempted to address these concerns by introducing a system where lots were drawn from a golden urn to select lamas. The Chinese Communist Party has revived this “golden urn” system as part of its efforts to control the appointment of senior monks. However, this system is widely viewed as illegitimate by those outside China.

The intricate relationship between Mongolia, Tibetan Buddhism, and China reflects the challenges and complexities surrounding religious leadership, succession, and external influence. As the Dalai Lama’s advancing age raises questions about his reincarnation, the dynamics between these key players will continue to shape the future of Tibetan Buddhism in the region.

How Did Mahatma Gandhi’s Portrait Come On Indian Banknotes

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterIndia, Finance/Economy 0

Throughout history, the lens of prominent photographers captured Mahatma Gandhi, but perhaps the most iconic image of him is the one adorning Indian currency notes. As the Father of the Nation, it might seem natural for him to be featured on India’s national currency, but this honor was conferred upon him several decades after India gained independence in 1947. In 1996, Gandhi’s image became a permanent fixture on all denominations of legal banknotes issued by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI), the nation’s central bank entrusted with overseeing India’s banking system. As we approach Gandhi’s birth anniversary, we delve into the origins of this portrait, the symbol it replaced, and the suggestions that have emerged for featuring other iconic figures on Indian banknotes.

The Origins of Gandhi’s Image on Indian Currency

The portrait of Gandhi on Indian banknotes is not a caricature; rather, it is a cut-out of a photograph taken in 1946, where he stands alongside British politician Lord Frederick William Pethick-Lawrence. This particular photograph was chosen because it captured Gandhi with a suitable smile, which was then mirrored to create the iconic portrait. Interestingly, the identities of the photographer behind this image and the person who selected it remain shrouded in mystery.

The responsibility of designing Indian rupee notes lies with the RBI’s Department of Currency Management, which must obtain approval for its designs from the central bank and the Union government. According to Section 25 of the RBI Act, 1934, the central government has the authority to approve the “design, form, and material of banknotes” based on recommendations made by the central board.

When Gandhi First Appeared on INR Notes

Gandhi’s first appearance on Indian currency occurred in 1969 when a special series was issued to commemorate his 100th birth anniversary. These notes, bearing the signature of RBI Governor LK Jha, depicted Gandhi against the backdrop of the Sevagram Ashram.

In October 1987, a series of Rs 500 currency notes featuring Gandhi was introduced.

The Banknotes of Independent India

Following India’s declaration of independence on August 15, 1947, the RBI initially continued to issue notes featuring King George VI from the colonial period. However, this situation changed in 1949 when the government of India introduced a new design for the 1-rupee note. In this new design, King George was replaced with a symbol of the Lion Capital of Ashoka Pillar at Sarnath.

The RBI museum website shares insights from that era, noting that there were deliberations about selecting symbols for independent India. Initially, the idea was to replace the King’s portrait with that of Mahatma Gandhi. Design proposals were even prepared for this purpose. However, the consensus eventually shifted towards choosing the Lion Capital at Sarnath in place of Gandhi’s portrait. The new banknote designs largely followed the earlier patterns.

Consequently, in 1950, the first Republic of India banknotes were issued in denominations of Rs 2, 5, 10, and 100, all bearing the Lion Capital watermark. Over the years, higher denomination legal tenders were introduced, with motifs on the back of the notes evolving to reflect various aspects of new India, from wildlife motifs such as tigers and sambar deer to depictions of agricultural activities like farming and tea leaf plucking in the 1970s. The 1980s saw an emphasis on symbols of scientific and technological advancements as well as Indian art forms, with the Aryabhatta satellite, farm mechanization, and the Konark Wheel featuring on various denominations.

Gandhi’s Portrait Becomes a Permanent Feature

By the 1990s, the RBI recognized the need to enhance the security features of currency notes due to advancements in reprographic techniques such as digital printing, scanning, photography, and xerography. It was believed that inanimate objects would be easier to forge compared to a human face. Consequently, Gandhi was chosen as the new face of Indian currency due to his universal appeal. In 1996, the RBI introduced the ‘Mahatma Gandhi Series’ to replace the former Ashoka Pillar banknotes. This series also incorporated several security features, including a windowed security thread, latent image, and intaglio features designed for the visually impaired.

In 2016, the ‘Mahatma Gandhi New Series’ of banknotes was announced by the RBI, retaining Gandhi’s portrait while adding the Swachh Bharat Abhiyan logo and additional security features on the reverse side.

Demands for Inclusion of Others on Banknotes

In recent years, there have been calls to feature figures other than Gandhi on Indian currency notes. In October 2022, Delhi Chief Minister Arvind Kejriwal appealed to the Prime Minister and the Union government to include the images of Lord Ganesha and goddess Lakshmi on currency notes.

Similarly, in 2014, there were suggestions to include Nobel Laureate Rabindranath Tagore and former President APJ Abdul Kalam on currency notes. However, then Finance Minister Arun Jaitley, addressing the Lok Sabha, revealed that the RBI had rejected these proposals in favor of retaining Gandhi’s portrait. He stated, “The Committee decided that no other personality could better represent the ethos of India than Mahatma Gandhi.”

Furthermore, then RBI Governor Raghuram Rajan emphasized that while India had many great personalities, Gandhi stood out above all others, and other choices could potentially be controversial.

The journey of Mahatma Gandhi’s image on Indian currency is a reflection of India’s evolving identity and the significance attributed to its national icons. While there have been calls to diversify the figures featured on banknotes, Gandhi’s enduring presence continues to symbolize the ethos of India.

Pope Francis Suggests Possibility Of Blessing Same-Sex Unions

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterLifestyle, Religion 0

Pope Francis has responded to a challenge posed by five conservative cardinals regarding church teachings on homosexuality, indicating the potential for blessings of same-sex unions under certain conditions. The Vatican recently released a letter, dated July 11, written by Pope Francis in response to a set of five questions, or “dubia,” raised by the cardinals a day earlier. In the letter, Pope Francis suggests that the possibility of blessing same-sex unions could be explored, provided it does not confuse such blessings with sacramental marriages.

New Ways Ministry, an organization advocating for LGBTQ+ Catholics, considers this letter a significant step forward in making LGBTQ+ Catholics feel more welcome in the church and a step away from their marginalization.

While the Vatican maintains that marriage is a sacred bond between a man and a woman, it has traditionally opposed same-sex marriage. However, Pope Francis has previously expressed support for civil laws granting legal benefits to same-sex couples. In certain parts of Europe, Catholic priests have been blessing same-sex unions without facing reprimand from the Vatican.

The Pope’s response to the cardinals represents a shift from the Vatican’s official stance. In a 2021 explanatory note, the Congregation for the Doctrine of the Faith stated that the church could not bless gay unions because “God cannot bless sin.”

In his recent letter, Pope Francis restated that marriage is a union between a man and a woman. However, in response to the cardinals’ inquiry about homosexual unions and blessings, he emphasized the importance of “pastoral charity,” which requires patience and understanding. He noted that priests should not merely reject or exclude but should consider forms of blessing requested by individuals that do not convey a mistaken view of marriage.

Pope Francis explained that when a blessing is requested, it is a plea for God’s assistance, a desire to live a better life, and trust in a benevolent higher power. While there are situations that are objectively “not morally acceptable,” he stressed that “pastoral charity” requires treating people as sinners who may not bear full responsibility for their circumstances.

He further advised that dioceses and bishops’ conferences need not establish fixed norms or protocols regarding this issue. Instead, it can be addressed on a case-by-case basis, recognizing that the life of the church operates beyond mere regulations.

Francis DeBernardo, executive director of New Ways Ministry, welcomed the Pope’s stance, stating that allowing pastoral ministers to bless same-gender couples implies recognition within the church that holy love can exist between same-gender couples. He viewed this as a significant step towards greater equality for LGBTQ+ Catholics.

The five cardinals, all of whom are conservative prelates from various parts of the world, had posed several challenges to Pope Francis regarding church teachings on homosexuality, women’s ordination, papal authority, and other matters in their letter. They made this material public just two days before the commencement of a major three-week synod at the Vatican, where LGBTQ+ Catholics and their role in the church were among the discussion topics.

These cardinals, who are among Pope Francis’ most vocal critics, are all retired and belong to the doctrinaire generation of cardinals appointed by St. John Paul II or Pope Benedict XVI. The signatories included Cardinals Walter Brandmueller of Germany, a former Vatican historian; Raymond Burke of the United States, who was removed by Pope Francis from his position as head of the Vatican supreme court; Juan Sandoval of Mexico, the retired archbishop of Guadalajara; Robert Sarah of Guinea, the retired head of the Vatican’s liturgy office; and Joseph Zen, the retired archbishop of Hong Kong.

Some of these cardinals had previously signed a set of “dubia” in 2016 challenging Pope Francis’ position on allowing divorced and civilly remarried couples to receive Communion. At that time, they were concerned that his stance contradicted the church’s teaching on the indissolubility of marriage. Pope Francis did not respond to their questions, and two of their co-signatories subsequently passed away.

In response to their latest questions, Pope Francis did reply, although the cardinals found his response unsatisfactory. They revised their five questions, resubmitted them to the Pope, and requested a simple “yes” or “no” response. When they did not receive such a response, they decided to make the texts public and issue a “notification” to the faithful.

The Vatican’s doctrinal office later published the Pope’s reply to them, although it omitted his introductory remarks encouraging the cardinals not to fear the synod.

Alcohol’s Impact on Your Brain and Heart

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterHealth 0

Light-to-moderate alcohol consumption has long been associated with better heart health, but the exact reasons behind this connection have remained a mystery. Despite the well-known health risks associated with alcohol, including a higher risk of cancer and neurological aging, researchers from Massachusetts General Hospital have shed light on one potential explanation. Their recent study, published in the Journal of the American College of Cardiology, reveals that alcohol may reduce stress signals in the brain, resulting in less strain on the heart.

To unravel this phenomenon, scientists delved into data from over 50,000 individuals from the Mass General Brigham Biobank, a comprehensive research database. Their findings confirmed that light-to-moderate drinking was indeed linked to a significant reduction in the risk of cardiovascular disease. Importantly, the extensive scale of this study enabled them to rule out external factors such as socioeconomic status, physical activity, and genetics that often complicate smaller-scale research. It became evident that something unique was at play, a discovery further illuminated by examining participants’ brain scans.

These brain scans revealed that alcohol could have enduring effects on stress levels within the brain, subsequently relieving the heart from excessive burdens, even days after the last drink. The brain’s stress network is akin to a tug-of-war, with the amygdala, responsible for emotions, on one side, and the prefrontal cortex, governing executive functions, on the other. During stressful situations, the amygdala sends distress signals, while the prefrontal cortex can inhibit the amplification of this alarm throughout the body, including the heart.

Dr. Ahmed Tawakol, a study author and co-director of the Cardiovascular Imaging Research Center at Massachusetts General Hospital, noted that alcohol is known to alleviate the amygdala’s alarm response. However, the researchers posed a unique question: does it exert long-term effects on these systems? Analyzing brain scans from over 1,000 study participants, they discovered that light-to-moderate drinkers experienced sustained reductions in amygdala activity, with prefrontal cortex activity remaining unaffected when alcohol was not in their systems. While the data did not allow researchers to determine whether this effect on the amygdala would diminish if individuals ceased drinking altogether, this dampening of amygdala activity was associated with a notable 22% decrease in cardiovascular disease risk.

Moreover, when the researchers specifically examined light-to-moderate drinkers with a history of anxiety, characterized by an overactive stress network, they observed a doubling of the effect. Dr. Tawakol explained, “Rather than the 22% reduction, people with prior anxiety had a 40% reduction in heart disease.” However, he emphasized, “I know that a lot of people will hear that and say, ‘Well, I’m anxious. That’s why I drink—I guess there’s a benefit.’ But there is no safe quantity of alcohol.”

While these findings are intriguing, Dr. Tawakol highlighted that there are alternative, safer ways to tap into this stress-reducing pathway. Exercise, for instance, is currently being studied by Tawakol and has been shown to increase prefrontal cortex activity, achieving similar stress-reduction benefits. Adequate sleep, too, operates along similar lines. Dr. Tawakol’s ultimate objective, however, is to identify pharmacological interventions that can safely diminish amygdala activity. He stressed the need to move beyond conventional recommendations like “get more sleep and exercise” in light of this newfound pathway that, when targeted, can double the reduction in cardiovascular disease risk.

The Evolution of the USD to INR Exchange Rate

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterFinance/Economy 0

The United States dollar (USD) stands as one of the world’s most influential currencies, boasting the highest global trade volume. When assessing the strength or weakness of the Indian rupee (INR), the preferred benchmark has consistently been the USD. Remarkably, there was a time when the USD to INR exchange rate was less than 5. However, in 2023, the exchange rate has surged to approximately ₹83 for every 1 US dollar. This article delves into the intriguing history of the USD to INR exchange rate, spanning from pre-independence India to the present day. We’ll explore pivotal economic events that have left an indelible mark on India’s currency landscape.

Here’s the USD to INR history since India’s independence, put concisely for you

Year	Exchange Rate [1 USD to 1 INR]
1947	3.30
1949	4.76
1966	7.50
1975	8.39
1980	6.61
1990	17.01
2000	44.31
2005	43.50
2006	46.92
2007	49.32
2008	43.30
2009	48.82
2010	46.02
2011	44.65
2012	53.06
2013	54.78
2014	60.95
2015	66.79
2016	67.63
2017	64.94
2018	70.64
2019	72.15
2020	74.31
2021	75.45
2022	81.62
2023 (as of October 3, 2023)	83.18

Dollar vs. Rupee: A Historical Perspective

The USD to INR exchange rate encapsulates India’s economic journey, with fluctuations mirroring the country’s economic fortunes over the years. By examining the shift from the 1947 rate of 1 US dollar to the Indian rupee, we can gauge the rupee’s strength over time.

Pre-Independence Era – Before 1947

The pre-independence era was characterized by British colonial rule in India, which exerted a profound influence on the nation’s economy, including its currency. Consequently, the value of the rupee was closely tied to economic conditions in Britain. The British Pound, much like other global currencies, had a fixed conversion rate to the USD, with the US dollar itself pegged to gold under the Bretton Woods Agreement.

In the 1930s, the Great Depression sent shockwaves through the global economy, impacting India, a British colony, even more profoundly. Notably, some argue that in 1947, 1 US dollar had a better value compared to later years, possibly due to the British Pound’s higher value relative to the USD. During this period, £1 was equivalent to ₹13.37 Rupees, suggesting that $1 might have been worth ₹4.16 at that time.

Post-Independence – 1947 to 1991

After gaining independence in 1947, India adopted a fixed exchange rate system aimed at stabilizing international trade by managing exchange rate fluctuations through government interventions. While this approach provided stability, it also limited the currency’s ability to respond to changing economic conditions.

The USD to INR exchange rate remained relatively stable, with occasional disruptions caused by wars with Pakistan and China, which strained India’s foreign exchange reserves. Global events like the 1970s oil crisis triggered inflationary pressures, driving up the dollar rate. India’s efforts to balance economic growth, foreign policy, and currency stability played a pivotal role in determining the USD to INR exchange rate during this period.

In response to the Nixon shock in 1971 and the Smithsonian Agreement, both of which had lasting implications for the USD, the Reserve Bank of India and the Indian government implemented various adjustments to the Indian Rupee’s price. By 1975, the INR transitioned from a par value method to a pegged system and eventually to a basket peg.

During Economic Reforms and Liberalisation – 1991 to 2000

The period from 1991 to 2000 marked a turning point in India’s economic history, significantly impacting the USD to INR exchange rate. In 1991, India initiated economic reforms and liberalization measures designed to open its economy to foreign investments and reduce trade barriers. These reforms shifted the country from a fixed exchange rate system to a more flexible one, allowing greater flexibility in exchange rate determination. During this time, 1 USD to INR was approximately 35.

By 2000, the exchange rate had risen, with 1 USD equating to about 45 INR. Factors contributing to this increase included the need to attract foreign capital, address trade imbalances, and global economic events like the late 1990s Asian financial crisis. India’s modernization efforts further shaped the USD to INR exchange rate during this transformative period.

21st Century – 2001 to 2023

In the early 21st century, spanning from 2001 to 2023, the USD to INR exchange rate reflected India’s dynamic economic landscape and global economic conditions. It commenced at approximately 1 USD to 1 INR at 47 in 2001, weakened to around ₹75 in 2020, and further declined to approximately ₹80 in 2023.

While India experienced robust economic growth, attracting foreign investments, the 21st century also witnessed global events with adverse implications for the INR’s value, such as the 2008 financial crisis. The COVID-19 pandemic introduced additional complexities, influencing exchange rates worldwide, including the INR. During this period, domestic economic factors, foreign investments, and global economic developments have collectively shaped the INR’s exchange rate.

Factors Influencing Exchange Rates

Several factors have a bearing on the USD to INR exchange rate:

Trade Balances:A country’s trade balance, reflecting the difference between exports and imports, can impact its currency’s value. A trade surplus (more exports than imports) can strengthen the currency, while a deficit can weaken it.
Inflation:High inflation rates can erode the purchasing power of a currency, leading to depreciation. Central banks often employ interest rates to control inflation, thereby influencing exchange rates.
Interest Rates:Higher interest rates make a country’s economy more attractive to foreign investors, resulting in increased demand for the currency. This heightened demand strengthens the currency’s value relative to others, causing it to appreciate.
Geopolitical Events:Political stability and international relations can affect investor confidence and currency value.
Foreign Direct Investment (FDI):A country’s appeal to foreign investments can impact its currency. Higher rates of FDI can strengthen the currency, while lower rates can weaken it.

From the pre-independence era, marked by British colonial rule, to the post-independence challenges, economic reforms, and the dynamic 21st century, both domestic and international factors have influenced the value of the Indian rupee. The history of the USD to INR exchange rate provides a captivating journey through India’s economic evolution.

Exploring Zealandia: A Hidden Continent’s Mysteries Unveiled

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterEnvironment, Science 0

You might think you know all the continents, but what about Zealandia? In 2017, a previously unknown expanse of New Zealand’s shores made global headlines when it was unveiled to the world.

Zealandia, referred to as Te Riu-a-Māui in the Māori language, encompasses over 5 million square kilometers, dwarfing the subcontinent of India in size, being twice its magnitude.

The reason for this lies in the fact that a staggering 95 percent of its landmass is concealed beneath the southwest Pacific Ocean, having submerged eons before human beings walked the Earth. Only a substantial mountain chain, essentially comprising the two islands of New Zealand, along with some petite oceanic islands, protrudes above the water’s surface.

The newly discovered continent, Zealandia, remains shrouded in mystery due to its virtually inaccessible nature. Nevertheless, an international team of geologists has collaborated to create a novel geological map encompassing Zealandia. This map was fashioned through a fusion of ocean-recovered rock samples and advanced geophysical mapping techniques.

During their quest for samples, geologists identified extensive sandstone formations and deposits of basaltic rock pebbles along Zealandia’s outer boundaries. These sandstones are estimated to be approximately 95 million years old and contain older granite and volcanic pebbles, suggesting that when Zealandia was above sea level, it was traversed by rivers streaming from volcanic highlands and filling tectonic basins.

The volcanic highlands were an active geological feature at least 30 to 50 million years prior, but the erosion likely occurred when the sandstone layers were deposited.

Geologists posit that Zealandia underwent a gradual inundation roughly 40 million years ago. This conclusion is substantiated by the discovery of basalt pebbles linked to underwater volcanic activity.

The findings from this research, titled “Reconnaissance basement geology and tectonics of North Zealandia,” have been documented in the 2023 edition of the journal Tectonics.

Uma Sofia Srivastava Crowned Miss Teen USA

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterWomen 0

Mexican-Indian high school student, Uma Sofia Srivastava from New Jersey has been crowned Miss Teen USA 2023, which saw participation from over 50 young women from across the country, in a live-streamed contest in Nevada state. The 16-year-old high school Junior at the Academy of St Elizabeth had become the first Mexican-Indian Miss New Jersey Teen USA earlier this year.

“IS THIS REAL??? I am so grateful and honored that I’m the first Mexican-Indian, first New Jersey, your MISS TEEN USA 2023!!!” Srivastava wrote on social media after winning the coveted title last week.

“This night is truly the best night of my life because I was crowned with the people that have loved and supported me throughout everything cheering for me in the audience.”

Srivastava, who speaks English, Spanish, Hindi and French, hopes to become a UN Ambassador.

She works with the Lotus Petal Foundation to help underprivileged children in India receive a well rounded education, proper nutrition and healthcare.

A co-founder of the Diversity & Inclusion campaign at her school, Srivastava also participates in Mock Trial and Model United Nations, according to her pageant biography.

She has authored and illustrated a book, “The White Jaguar”, which she says, is to inspire people of all ages to embrace what makes them unique.

Also a pianist, Srivastava runs her own blog, That’s Fan Behavior, where she writes about her experience as a woman of colour and current events.

Miss New York Teen USA Stephanie Skinner was named first runner-up and Miss Pennsylvania Teen USA Maggie Ross was second runner-up in the pageant.

New Discoveries in Orion Nebula Challenge Astronomical Theories

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterScience 0

Recent images from the James Webb Space Telescope have unveiled intriguing pairs of planet-like objects in the Orion Nebula that defy previous detection. The Orion Nebula, a luminous cloud of dust and gas, is among the most prominent nebulae in the night sky and is recognizable as the “sword” in the Orion constellation. Situated 1,300 light-years from Earth, this nebula has been a focal point for astronomers, offering a plethora of celestial objects to investigate, including planet-forming disks encircling young stars and brown dwarfs, which are celestial bodies with mass falling between that of planets and stars.

Astronomers employed Webb’s near-infrared camera, known as NIRCam, to capture comprehensive images of the Orion Nebula, spanning both short and long wavelengths of light, thereby unveiling unprecedented insights and unforeseen revelations.

In their examination of the short-wavelength image of the Orion Nebula, astronomers Samuel G. Pearson and Mark J. McCaughrean directed their attention to the Trapezium Cluster, a youthful star-forming region approximately one million years old, teeming with thousands of emerging stars. Among these stars, the scientists identified brown dwarfs, celestial objects too small to initiate the nuclear fusion process characteristic of stars. Brown dwarfs possess a mass less than 7% that of the Sun.

While on the quest to locate additional low-mass isolated entities, the astronomers stumbled upon an entirely novel phenomenon: pairs of planet-like objects with masses ranging from 0.6 to 13 times that of Jupiter. These enigmatic objects appeared to challenge some fundamental tenets of astronomical theories, prompting the scientists to christen them “Jupiter Mass Binary Objects,” or JuMBOs.

Although some of these JuMBOs exceed the mass of Jupiter, they are generally comparable in size, only slightly larger. According to Pearson, a European Space Agency research fellow based at the European Space Research and Technology Centre in the Netherlands, “Although some of them are more massive than the planet Jupiter, they will be roughly the same size and only slightly larger.”

The astronomers’ investigation unveiled a total of 40 pairs of JuMBOs and two triple systems, all of which exhibited wide orbits around one another. Despite their paired existence, these objects typically maintained a separation of about 200 astronomical units, equivalent to 200 times the distance between Earth and the Sun. Completing an orbit around each other required a substantial duration, ranging from 20,000 to 80,000 years.

These enigmatic JuMBOs exhibited a temperature range spanning from 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit (537 degrees Celsius) to 2,300 degrees Fahrenheit (1,260 degrees Celsius). These gaseous entities are relatively youthful in astronomical terms, boasting an age of approximately one million years, whereas our solar system has endured for 4.57 billion years

Mark J. McCaughrean, senior adviser for science and exploration at the European Space Agency, aptly characterized these objects as “3-day-old babies” compared to the age of our solar system. Their continued luminosity and warmth stem from the energy they retained at their formation, allowing them to emit detectable light.

To document their discoveries in the Orion Nebula, McCaughrean and Pearson composed two research papers, which have been submitted for publication in academic journals. Preliminary findings are available on the preprint platform arXiv. However, numerous questions about JuMBOs persist, particularly regarding their origins.

The formation of stars typically originates from massive clouds of gas and dust that succumb to gravitational forces, a process accompanied by the emergence of planetary systems. Nevertheless, existing theories fail to account for the formation of JuMBOs or their presence in the Orion Nebula, as McCaughrean noted. While some might liken JuMBOs to rogue planets, objects of planetary mass that roam through space independently of stars, it remains challenging to explain how pairs of these objects were simultaneously expelled while maintaining gravitational connection.

Pearson emphasized the implications of these discoveries, stating, “Scientists have been working on theories and models of star and planet formation for decades, but none of them have ever predicted that we would find pairs of super low mass objects floating alone in space — and we’re seeing lots of them.” This revelation raises questions about the understanding of both planet and star formation.

The Orion Nebula ranks among astronomers’ favored targets for observation. As telescopes grow in size and sophistication, they reveal an increasing number of objects within this nebula. Pearson underscored the significance of Webb’s infrared capabilities, stating, “JWST is the most powerful infrared telescope that has ever been built, and these observations simply wouldn’t be possible with any other telescope.”

Future observations scheduled for early 2024 may provide further insights into the atmospheric compositions of JuMBOs. Researchers also seek to refine their understanding of these objects by obtaining precise measurements of their masses. Furthermore, investigations focused on other star-forming regions could determine whether JuMBOs are present beyond the confines of the Orion Nebula.

As Pearson summarized, “The main question is, ‘What?! Where did that come from?’ It’s just so unexpected that a lot of future observations and modeling are going to be needed to explain it.”

US May See Deep Recession, Could Impact India’s Markets, Exports: Economist

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterFinance/Economy 0

The United States could potentially face a significant economic downturn in the near future, and such a scenario would not only impact India’s vital services sector, a key component of the nation’s GDP, but also introduce substantial volatility into both the bond and equity markets, according to a prominent economist.

In an exclusive interview with NDTV, Neelkanth Mishra, the Chief Economist for Axis Bank and part-time chairperson of the Unique Identification Authority of India, expressed his concerns about the United States potentially entering a recession. While initial expectations were that the U.S. would experience a decline in GDP growth, this did not materialize by the end of September, with some believing a “soft landing” was in store.

Mishra offered a counterpoint, highlighting a significant increase in the U.S. fiscal deficit. “Our analysis says, however, that this year, their fiscal deficit has gone up by 4% of their GDP. They had targeted $1 trillion – their fiscal year ends on September 30 – and they ended up with a figure of $2 trillion. If the fiscal deficit is so high, there can’t be a recession,” he explained. However, the challenge lies in maintaining this elevated fiscal deficit to sustain economic growth.

“Even if they manage to keep the fiscal deficit flat next year, which is a problem in itself, the economy will go into a recession. Because of the fiscal deficit being so high, no one is wanting to buy U.S. bonds. Rates are rising because of that, and this is going to lead to a contraction in demand across the world. So, the recession that will happen could be a very deep one,” he cautioned.

Turning his attention to the potential impact on India, Mishra identified four key pathways. Firstly, the services sector, which is already experiencing sluggish growth, could further decelerate, impacting India’s IT services industry and business services exports, which constitute 10% of India’s total exports. This decline could potentially result in a 1% reduction in GDP growth.

The second pathway involves the impact on goods exports, with a drop in demand anticipated. Mishra emphasized that demand for goods is already low in China, Europe, and Japan, and if it also diminishes in the U.S., it could affect India’s goods exports.

The third concern revolves around the risk of product dumping in India. If India remains the sole bastion of demand resilience, manufacturers worldwide may flock to sell their products in India, negatively impacting Indian manufacturers.

Lastly, a U.S. recession could affect the yield on its government bonds, leading to an increase in the cost of capital for other economies. This could particularly affect Indian borrowers, making it harder to secure dollar loans and introducing volatility into financial markets, including bonds and equities.

Addressing how India can prepare for such potential turbulence, Mishra stressed the importance of macroeconomic stability over risk-taking to navigate these uncertain waters. He asserted that macroeconomic stability provides the foundation for sustained long-term growth.

Responding to a question about a recent Morgan Stanley report, which suggested that India’s stock market could rise by 10% with a stable government after 2024 but might fall by 20-60% if stability is not achieved, Mishra challenged this viewpoint. He argued that the central government’s impact on the economy is typically seen over a medium-term horizon, in the range of 3-5 years. State governments, on the other hand, play a more substantial role in short-term economic momentum, influencing foreign and private investments. Mishra highlighted demographic trends in India, such as falling fertility rates and increasing net savings, as indicators of economic strength that are relatively impervious to changes in the central government.

He underlined that this sensationalist forecasting does not align with the economic realities in India. Housing construction, a significant driver of the Indian economy, is unlikely to be significantly affected by changes in the government.

Regarding advice for the middle class in the face of potential economic turbulence, Mishra recommended caution in the coming year or year-and-a-half, as the global economy could experience significant volatility. However, he also expressed optimism about India’s economic trajectory over the next 5-7 years, suggesting that there is no cause for undue concern.

Neelkanth Mishra, a prominent economist, has voiced concerns about the possibility of a deep recession in the United States and its potential impact on India, emphasizing the importance of macroeconomic stability and challenging sensationalist forecasts about the Indian economy. He advised caution in the short term but expressed optimism about India’s longer-term economic prospects.

American Job Market Thrives in September, Exceeding Expectations

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterBusiness, Finance/Economy 0

In a clear demonstration of ongoing economic strength, American payrolls experienced a significant increase of 336,000 in September, as reported by the Labor Department on Friday. This growth, nearly double what economists had predicted, reaffirmed the robustness of the labor market and the resilience of the economy, which has been grappling with various challenges.

Remarkably, this marked the 33rd consecutive month of job expansion, with September’s surge being the most substantial since January. Meanwhile, the unemployment rate, based on household surveys, remained stable at 3.8 percent, maintaining a level below 4 percent for nearly two years—an achievement not witnessed since the late 1960s.

Samuel Rines, an economist and managing director at Corbu, a financial research firm, commented, “This is an economy on fire,” reflecting the enthusiasm surrounding the economic performance.

Notably, data revisions also brought good news, with hiring figures for July and August being adjusted upwards, revealing an additional 119,000 jobs compared to previous records. These revisions underscored employers’ confidence in the ongoing economic recovery and their belief that there is ample room for further growth.

Andrew Flowers, a labor economist at Appcast, a firm specializing in online recruiting, pointed out that “Fears of an imminent recession have been easing since the spring, allowing businesses to revisit hiring plans they put on hold.”

The release of these figures drew considerable attention from Federal Reserve policymakers, who have been grappling with the challenge of balancing wage and price control through interest rate adjustments. Robust job growth often triggers a sell-off among investors due to concerns over potential rate hikes, which can negatively impact stock and bond prices.

Surprisingly, the market’s response on Friday was generally positive, primarily because the report indicated that the economy was still expanding while wage growth remained moderate, leading many to believe that the Federal Reserve would maintain steady interest rates. Average hourly earnings for workers showed a 0.2 percent increase from the previous month and a 4.2 percent increase from September 2022. While these figures were solid, they fell slightly short of expectations, with the one-year growth rate being the slowest since March 2020.

David Cervantes, founder of Pine Brook Capital Management, an asset management firm, emphasized, “I don’t think the headline jobs number necessarily means an inflationary impulse because average hourly earnings gains are going down,” providing reassurance for those concerned about the inflationary impact of rising wages.

Officials from the Biden administration hailed the report as unequivocally positive, with Jared Bernstein, chair of the White House Council of Economic Advisers, stating, “Simply put, good news is good news, full stop,” highlighting the persistently strong job market under Bidenomics.

The economy’s resilience, more than three years into the recovery from Covid pandemic shutdowns, is evident in various ways. Inflation-adjusted economic growth has accelerated over the summer, even as overall price increases have slowed compared to a year ago. While spending has moderated since its rapid pace in 2021, demand for travel, hospitality, and event tickets remains high, and jobless claims are at their lowest levels since February 2020.

Furthermore, the accumulated savings of Americans during the pandemic have endured longer than expected. In 2019, U.S. households held approximately $980 billion in “checkable deposits,” including checking, savings, and easily cashable money market accounts. In 2023, this figure has surged to over $4 trillion.

However, there are reasons for caution. The suspension of mandatory federal student loan repayments, a pandemic relief measure, is ending this month. The housing market has been affected by a shortage of supply and rising interest rates, resulting in nearly frozen activity and record high home prices.

Consumer sentiment, as measured by the University of Michigan’s index, has improved significantly compared to the previous year but remains well below late 2010s levels. Additionally, it appears that high interest rates will persist for an extended period, posing challenges not only for households but also for businesses in need of fresh financing.

Nevertheless, for the time being, economic activities continue to progress steadily. The MetLife and U.S. Chamber of Commerce Small Business Index, which gauges confidence among small business owners, reached its highest level this quarter since the beginning of the pandemic. This score is roughly in line with late 2019 levels, with 66 percent of small businesses reporting that business conditions are healthy, and 72 percent expressing comfort with their cash flow, despite increased labor costs.

Tom Sullivan, vice president of small business policy at the U.S. Chamber of Commerce, observed, “Main Street employers are showing remarkable resiliency in the face of high inflation and a shortage of workers,” adding that small business owners are feeling more optimistic compared to a year ago, with recession fears receding and inflation gradually easing.

Throughout this year, there has been an ongoing struggle between an economy delivering greater-than-expected overall growth and the concerns of many American families still grappling with the impact of two years of significant increases in living costs. The reduction of federal aid and tax credits has led to an increase in poverty, and energy prices have experienced unpredictable fluctuations.

Most leading indicators, which aim to identify and predict significant shifts in the business cycle, still exhibit warning signs. However, some argue that these data may be influenced by the peculiarities of an economy returning to normalcy after the shock of the pandemic.

Michael Kantrowitz, chief investment strategist at Piper Sandler & Company, noted, “The reality of the business cycle is that there are only two times when ‘all’ the data are moving in the same direction: a recovery and a recession,” indicating that mixed and less clear data outside of these extreme phases should not be dismissed.

As markets grapple with uncertainty, many workers are advocating for a larger share of the still-expanding economic pie. While nonsupervisory employees have seen recent wage increases, private sector hourly workers are currently averaging approximately $17 per hour this year, according to payroll processor ADP. Nevertheless, many workers continue to feel that their wages do not adequately meet their needs.

Jonathan Quito, a 27-year-old ramp agent at La Guardia Airport, shared his perspective, stating that despite a $1 per hour raise last year, he finds it insufficient to cover the rising costs of living in New York City, including groceries, public transportation, and rent. He emphasized the importance of worker advocacy and unionization efforts to secure better wages and improved living conditions.

He concluded, “Eventually, you know, I want to be able to start my own family and stuff,” highlighting his aspiration for a more secure financial future.

Narges Mohammadi, Iranian Rights Activist Receives Nobel Peace Prize

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterProfile, World 0

Iran’s most prominent human rights advocate, Narges Mohammadi, who is currently imprisoned in Evin Prison, was awarded the 2023 Nobel Peace Prize in an effort by the Norwegian Nobel Committee to support women’s rights in Iran.

Ms. Mohammadi, aged 51, has spent the majority of the past decade in and out of prison, facing charges of “spreading anti-state propaganda” and is currently serving a 10-year sentence, as part of Iran’s ongoing campaign to suppress her activism.

Despite her incarceration, she has remained one of the most vocal critics of Iran’s government. She organized protests within the prison, penned opinion pieces, and conducted weekly workshops for female inmates on their rights, particularly in response to a significant uprising led by women in Iran last year after the death of Mahsa Amini, a 22-year-old who died in the custody of the country’s morality police.

Ms. Mohammadi’s family released a statement on her behalf, vowing to continue her activism within Iran even if it meant spending the rest of her life in captivity. She stated, “Standing alongside the brave mothers of Iran, I will continue to fight against the relentless discrimination, tyranny, and gender-based oppression by the oppressive religious government until the liberation of women.”

The Nobel committee not only recognized Ms. Mohammadi’s efforts but also acknowledged the hundreds of thousands of people who have protested against Iran’s discriminatory policies against women. Berit Reiss-Andersen, who leads the committee, noted, “Her struggle has come at tremendous personal cost.”

Iranian authorities remained silent in response to the news of Ms. Mohammadi’s award, with state-affiliated media dismissing it as a Western plot to incite further unrest. However, her family, human rights activists, and supporters celebrated the recognition.

Kenneth Roth, former executive director of Human Rights Watch, praised Ms. Mohammadi’s resilience, stating, “She even treats prison as an opportunity to document and publicize that repression.”

While the international attention may eventually lead to Ms. Mohammadi’s release, her family expects Iran to increase pressure on her in captivity in the short term.

Ms. Mohammadi’s activism has focused on various issues, including Iran’s hijab law, violence and sexual harassment against women, the status of women under the religious government, the rights of death row prisoners, and the transition to democracy in Iran.

She is the 19th woman to be awarded the Nobel Peace Prize since its inception in 1901 and the second Iranian woman to win, following Shirin Ebadi in 2003. Ms. Ebadi, a human rights lawyer and Ms. Mohammadi’s mentor, expressed hope that the recognition would lead to the release of political prisoners and bring freedom and democracy to Iran.

Narges Mohammadi’s journey began in her hometown of Zanjan, Iran, where she was born into a middle-class family. Her activism started with childhood memories of her mother visiting her uncle in prison and listening to the names of executed prisoners on television. She pursued a degree in physics in college and quickly became involved in activism, founding women’s hiking and civic engagement groups.

Picture: NYT

Her activism intensified after her employer was forced to terminate her in 2008, and she was banned from working in engineering. She authored the book “White Torture,” which documented psychological torture and abuse of prisoners in Iran. Earlier this year, she received PEN America’s Barbey Freedom to Write Award and was named one of the recipients of the United Nations’ World Press Freedom Prize.

Last year, Ms. Mohammadi’s activism gained renewed urgency following the nationwide uprising triggered by the death of Mahsa Amini in the custody of the morality police. The Iranian government responded with force, resulting in numerous deaths, arrests, and protests. Despite the government’s actions, Ms. Mohammadi remained steadfast in her commitment to change within Iran.

The Nobel Peace Prize recognizes Narges Mohammadi’s unwavering dedication to human rights and women’s rights in Iran, even in the face of adversity and imprisonment. Her story serves as an inspiration to those fighting for justice and freedom around the world.

America’s National Debt Hits Record $33 Trillion

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterFinance/Economy, USA 0

In September, the gross national debt of the United States reached a staggering $33 trillion, a new record following its previous milestone of $32 trillion earlier in the year. This alarming figure is accompanied by a concerning trend: the U.S. is currently spending more on paying interest on its national debt than on its national defense, as reported by the Treasury’s monthly statement.

The fiscal year up to August saw the Treasury disbursing $807.84 billion in interest payments on its debt securities, while the Department of Defense’s budget for military programs amounted to only $695.44 billion during the same period. This juxtaposition becomes even more significant when considering that the United States outspends every other nation on defense.

The recent years have been marked by significant government spending, leading to a deficit, which occurs when government expenditures exceed tax revenues in a fiscal year. The COVID-19 pandemic triggered the approval of several substantial bills, including the American Rescue Plan Act, with a price tag of $1.9 trillion. The Congressional Budget Office estimates that the debt ceiling package signed into law in the summer to prevent a national default could reduce the deficit by $1.5 trillion over the next decade. However, the Committee for a Responsible Budget (CRFB), a nonprofit organization specializing in federal budget and fiscal matters, suggests that the actual savings could be closer to $1 trillion, depending on “side deals” outside the agreement.

CRFB President Maya MacGuineas emphasized the necessity of addressing healthcare, Social Security, and the tax code to regain control over the national debt.

The government’s borrowing spree in recent years took place during a period of historically low interest rates. However, as interest rates rise and prices continue to climb, the cost of servicing this debt is set to increase. According to the Peter G. Peterson Foundation, nearly $2 billion is spent daily on interest payments for the national debt.

Furthermore, the government’s substantial debt levels can crowd out other borrowing opportunities in the economy, making it more difficult for corporations to secure loans. As Phillip Braun, a clinical professor of finance at Northwestern University’s Kellogg School of Management, explained, “There’s only so much money in the economy, and so with the government borrowing such large amounts, there’s only so much that people are willing to lend overall in the economy, so it pushes out other types of borrowing.” The government had an opportunity to refinance its debt when interest rates were low, but this opportunity was missed, leading to unnecessarily higher borrowing costs.

Who Owns America’s National Debt?

The national debt in the United States is diverse, similar to having various types of personal debt like credit cards, mortgages, and car payments. The U.S. Department of the Treasury manages the national debt, classifying it into two categories: intragovernmental debt and debt held by the public.

Intragovernmental debt, accounting for approximately $6.8 trillion of the national debt, represents obligations between different government agencies. The larger portion of the debt, around $26.2 trillion, is held by the public. This segment includes ownership by foreign governments, banks, private investors, state and local governments, and the Federal Reserve, primarily in the form of Treasury securities, bills, and bonds.

Foreign governments and private investors are among the most significant holders of public debt, possessing roughly $8 trillion. Approximately 50% of this debt is owned by private and public domestic entities, while the Federal Reserve Bank holds approximately 20%. However, there is a silver lining concerning the debt held by the Federal Reserve.

Phillip Braun explained, “The Federal Reserve owns a lot of government debt. The Treasury does pay interest payments to the Federal Reserve, but then the Federal Reserve turns around and gives it back to the Treasury — that alleviates some of the issues.”

A Warning Signal

Rising interest rates are poised to exacerbate the national debt crisis, complicating the government’s ability to respond to economic slowdowns. Michael A. Peterson, CEO of the Peter G. Peterson Foundation, warned, “As we have seen with recent growth in inflation and interest rates, the cost of debt can mount suddenly and rapidly. With more than $10 trillion of interest costs over the next decade, this compounding fiscal cycle will only continue to do damage to our kids and grandkids.”

‘Gadar 2’ Is Set For Its World Digital Premiere On ZEE5 Global From 6th October 2023!

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterCinema 0

Viewers can catch ZEE5 Global’s unmissable slate and stock up on their yearlong entertainment by subscribing to the Annual pack and grabbing the limited-time special offer price.

ZEE5 Global is the digital entertainment destination launched by Zee Entertainment Enterprises Limited (ZEEL), a global Media and Entertainment powerhouse. The platform launched across 190+ countries in October 2018 and has content across 18 languages: Hindi, English, Bengali, Malayalam, Tamil, Telugu, Kannada, Marathi, Oriya, Bhojpuri, Gujarati, Punjabi, including six international languages Malay, Thai, Bahasa, Urdu, Bangla and Arabic. ZEE5 Global is home to 200,000+ hours of on-demand content. The platform brings together the best of Originals, Movies and TV Shows, Music, Health and Lifestyle content in one destination. In addition, ZEE5 Global offers features like 15 navigational languages, content download options and Voice Search.

ZEE5 Global Announces The World Digital Premiere ‘Gadar 2’ starring Sunny Deol and Ameesha Patel

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterEntertainment 0

ZEE5 Global, the world’s largest streaming platform for South Asian content, announces the world digital premiere of the biggest Hindi blockbuster of the year, ‘Gadar 2’ today. After a successful theatrical run collecting 63M USD in India and still counting, Gadar 2 is set for another successful innings on ZEE5 Global on 6^th October. Produced by Zee Studios and directed by Anil Sharma, the superhit sequel to the 2001 hit ‘Gadar’ will see Sunny Deol, Ameesha Patel and Utkarsh Sharma reprise their roles as Tara Singh, Sakeena and Charanjeet “Jeete” Singh respectively.

Gadar 2 brings back India’s most loved family of Tara, Sakeena & Jeete; 22 years after its predecessor. Set against the backdrop of Indo-Pakistan war of 1971, Tara Singh, once again, will face every enemy to protect the honor of his country and family. This time, the narrative will delve deeper into the enduring love of Tara Singh and Sakeena and additionally, will see a strong father-son bond between Tara Singh and Charanjeet as the latter lands in Pakistan and ends up being caught and tortured. While the last time, Tara Singh visited Pakistan to get his wife back, this time, he will return to rescue his son.

So, gear up for bigger, better and bolder action sequences from Sunny Deol and a repeat of his most popular dialogue “Hindustan zindabad tha, zindabad hai aur zindabad rahega” which will continue to echo in every Hindustani’s heart for a long time. The movie will also see Sunny Deol reprise his famous handpump scene and sing and dance to the original chartbusters (from the 2001 film) like ‘Udd Jaa Kaale Kaava’, ‘Main Nikla Gaddi Leke’ and recreate the same magic from 2001.

Archana Anand, Chief Business Officer, ZEE5 Global said, “Bollywood blockbusters have always transcended geographical boundaries and resonated with global viewers through their powerful and emotionally charged stories. With the World Digital Premiere of Gadar 2, ZEE5 Global is thrilled to present our global viewers with the sequel to one of Hindi cinema’s all-time blockbuster hits that has captivated audiences for over 22 years”.

Shariq Patel, CBO, Zee Studios said, “Gadar 2 brought back India’s most loved family of Tara Singh, Sakeena and Jeete; 22 years after its predecessor. Hindustan Ka Asli Blockbuster will make history once more with its digital premiere on ZEE5 Global”.

Sunny Deol said, “We are absolutely delighted with the overwhelming response that ‘Gadar 2’ has received in theatres. Now with its World Digital Premiere on ZEE5 Global, I am very excited for the movie to reach a wider, global audience. Gadar 2 is a perfect family entertainer which will keep the viewers completely engaged and entertained. I urge everyone to watch it if you haven’t already and watch it again if you have”.

Ameesha Patel said, “Sakeena is a character who has stayed with me throughout my career, and I was so excited to revisit her in ‘Gadar 2.’ The chemistry between Tara and Sakeena is timeless, and the sequel reignites that magic for our fans. ZEE5 Global’s platform allows us to connect with a global audience, and I’m thrilled that viewers from around the world will have the opportunity to witness this epic love story, all over again but with more twists and action”.

Director Anil Sharma said, “The story of ‘Gadar’ is etched in the memories of every movie lover and with Gadar 2, we have tried to recreate the same magic. I am beyond thrilled that Gadar 2 has become one of the most successful Hindi films of all time and now with its World Digital Premiere on ZEE5 Global, I hope that the film breaks more records and reaches more people across the world”.

Arya Samaj of Chicago Celebrates 200 Years of Maharshi Dayanand Saraswati Ji

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterCommunity 0

Arya Samaj of Chicago land also hosted Mega Multikund Maha Yajna on Sunday, October 1st, 2023 at 700 Hillview Ave., West Chicago, IL. The event was a celebration of 200 Years of Maharshi Dayanand SaraswatiJi – An Uplifting Socio-Spiritual Celebration

The Prime Minister of India, Shri Narendra Modi inaugurated the year-long celebrations commemorating the 200th birth anniversary of Maharishi Dayanand SaraswatiJi, at Indira Gandhi Indoor Stadium in Delhi on February 12th, 2023 and it is echoed by all Arya Samajs around the world.

“When the British imposed the policy of appeasement on the Indians, Arya Samaj started the Vedic movement in the country. Arya Samaj has been a vibrant movement in India. There was a time when Arya Samaj was dominant from Basti to Karachi,” said the chief minister addressing the Golden Jubilee Mahotsav of Arya Samaj in Basti.

Maharshi Dayanand SaraswatiJi was born on 12th February 1824. Maharishi Dayanand SaraswatiJi was a social reformer who founded Arya Samaj in 1875 to counter social inequities prevalent during the times. Maharshi Ji had played crucial role in the Indian Freedom movement, united all Hindus, Women Rights, Child Marriage, Important of Vedas. Arya Samaj has played a crucial role in the cultural and social awakening of the country through its emphasis on social reforms and education.

Ajay Gharia Ji and Ash Perti Ji along with Dr. Ashok MehtaJi and all board members of Arya Samaj of Chicago land had planned the Multikund Maha Yajna. Devotees from all over Chicago land joined the celebration and 21 families joined as Yajmans. It was a wonderful program with three havan kunds set outside. Dr. Kamlesh Chokshi Ji – One of the top scholars from India who retired as Director/Professor from Gujarat University had performed the Havan with vadic mantras. AsmitaJi and SarlaJi had sung the ardas/prayer. Pratibha Jairath Ji along with Shree Kamath Ji, Shaila Khedkar Ji and Jitendra Bulsara Ji sang the melodious bhajans. Dr. Ashok Mehta Ji, Ramesh Malhan Ji and Om Dhingra Ji had thanks everyone.

Indian Lawmakers Conclude Session in Old Parliament Building Amid Controversy Over New Facility

October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Indian lawmakers have wrapped up their final session in the current Parliament building before relocating to a new facility, in response to a call from Prime Minister Narendra Modi. During the
session, Modi celebrated India's parliamentary history and highlighted the recently concluded Group of 20 (G20) summit.

This move comes after major opposition parties boycotted the inauguration of the new Parliament back in May, deeming it extravagant. It marked a rare instance of unity against Modi’s Hindu nationalist ruling party, which has held power for nine years and is now seeking a third term in the upcoming elections.

The new Parliament building, characterized by its triangular shape, came with an estimated price tag of $120 million. It’s a part of a broader $2.8 billion renovation project in central New Delhi, aimed at modernizing British-era offices and residences. This comprehensive initiative, known as the “Central Vista” spans over 3.2 kilometers (1.9 miles) and encompasses new government ministry and department buildings, as well as Modi’s upcoming private residence.

During his speech in the lower house, Modi praised his government for its role in the G20 summit. This summit witnessed India’s pivotal role in brokering compromises among divergent
global powers on crucial global matters. Modi specifically underscored India's efforts in bringing the African Union into the G20 fold. He also mentioned the recent successful lunar mission, in which India’s spacecraft landed near the moon’s southern pole.

Modi’s address didn’t solely focus on recent achievements; he also delved into Parliament’s historical significance and highlighted some major decisions made by his government within the parliamentary context.

The announcement of this five-day special session last month drew criticism from opposition lawmakers, who argued that the Modi government had not been transparent about its
parliamentary agenda. Only last week did the government release a "tentative list" that outlined four proposed bills, including a contentious one expected to alter the process of appointing India’s chief election officer.

The new Parliament building is situated in close proximity to the old one, a circular structure designed by British architects in the early 20th century. The new facility, spanning four stories,
boasts a total of 1,272 seats across two chambers, nearly 500 more than the previous one.

Largest Hindu Temple Outside India Inaugurated In New Jersey

October 11, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterCulture, Religion 0

BAPS Swaminarayan Akshardham, the largest Hindu temple in the United States, opened its doors on Sunday, October 8th, in New Jersey. Situated in the city of Robbinsville, New Jersey, this temple is heralded as the largest Hindu temple outside of India in the modern era.

In a letter to BAPS Swaminarayan Akshardham, Prime Minister Narendra Modi conveyed the profound spiritual significance of this occasion for devotees worldwide, stating, “It is an occasion of profound spiritual significance for the vast legion of devotees worldwide.” The temple will be accessible to the public starting from October 18th.

Architectural Marvel

This magnificent temple is a testament to unparalleled craftsmanship. Its construction involved four distinct varieties of marble from Italy and limestone from Bulgaria. These precious materials embarked on an extraordinary journey, spanning thousands of miles from their origins to India and ultimately reaching their final destination in New Jersey, as reported by the Associated Press. On-site, skilled artisans meticulously assembled these intricately carved pieces, akin to assembling a colossal jigsaw puzzle, resulting in the creation of this monumental Hindu temple.

Covering an expansive 126-acre area, this architectural masterpiece owes its existence to the unwavering dedication of artisans and volunteers who devoted approximately 4.7 million hours to painstakingly hand-carve around two million cubic feet of stone, according to the report.

The temple’s walls are adorned with carvings of historical figures, including prominent figures like Martin Luther King Jr. and Abraham Lincoln, as highlighted by Yogi Trivedi, a temple volunteer and a scholar of religion at Columbia University, in a statement to NBC News. He marveled at the temple’s beauty, saying, “I wake up every morning and scratch my eyes thinking, ‘Am I still in central New Jersey?’ It’s like being transported to another world, specifically to India.”

Construction Efforts

The construction of the Akshardham temple, a collaborative effort involving 12,500 volunteers from around the world, commenced in 2011, according to PTI.

This monumental achievement marks a significant milestone for the Hindu community in the United States and stands as a symbol of the dedication, craftsmanship, and unity of its creators. As it opens its doors to the public, it is poised to become a source of inspiration and a place of spiritual significance for devotees and visitors alike.

Hamas’ Surprise Attack Forces Reassessment of Israeli-Palestinian Conflict

October 11, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterWorld 0

On October 7th, Israel experienced a shockingly unexpected attack, reminiscent of the 1973 October War, which brought the nation to the brink 50 years ago. This recent assault by Hamas from the Gaza Strip, occurring on a holiday morning and taking Israel off guard, draws parallels with historical conflicts that reshaped their respective landscapes. Similar to the Tet Offensive during the Vietnam War, the Hamas attack demonstrated unforeseen capacities, briefly overwhelming a superior military, and prompting a reevaluation of the conflict’s nature.

The prevailing assumption in Israel that the Palestinian conflict could be “managed” rather than resolved is now in question. Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu discarded this notion, declaring that the country was “at war,” not engaged in a mere operation or round of conflict. This shift in perspective has far-reaching implications, not only for Israel but also for global political and military leaders who must reconsider the potential outcomes of this conflict.

This attack has cast doubt on a potential peace deal between Israel and Saudi Arabia that hinged on the presumed acceptance of the status quo by the occupied Palestinians. It also challenges America’s longstanding hope to shift its focus away from the Middle East and rekindles the competition between global powers in the region. Once again, Israel and the Palestinians become pivotal players in the near future of geopolitics.

Israel had grown accustomed to brief, one-sided battles with Gaza militants, often fought using drones or fighter jets. Israeli officials even humorously referred to these encounters as “cutting the grass.” This routine became a stark military aspect of “managing the conflict,” a strategy that has dominated for decades. It operates on the assumption that there is no political solution to the contest for land between Jewish Israelis and Palestinians, both of whom lay claim to the same territory.

In the West Bank, home to 3 million Palestinians and around 500,000 Jewish settlers, much of the management falls under the purview of a robust internal security apparatus overseen by Palestinian National Authority President Mahmoud Abbas, also known as Abu Mazen. Abbas wagered that quelling violent resistance, including from Hamas, a rival to his Fatah party, would lead to negotiations resulting in a Palestinian state. However, this bet has not paid off.

Unlike the West Bank, the Gaza Strip, housing 2.2 million Palestinians, saw the departure of Jewish settlers and the Israeli military in 2005. Since then, it has been governed by Hamas, or the Islamic Resistance Movement, and sealed off by Israel. While Israel exerts control over Gaza’s power supply, telephone systems, and much of its economy, managing it has proven more challenging. Poverty is widespread, and the young population has limited options for leaving. Israeli security relied heavily on fences and walls, which Hamas guerrillas tunneled under in 2014 and demolished on October 7th, using paragliders.

The events that followed have left a deep impact on Israelis, who, in addition to possessing the region’s most powerful military, carry a reservoir of trauma. In the chaotic hours of that Sabbath morning, everything was overwhelmed: the Israel Defense Force, the Iron Dome missile defense system, and the sense of security that had led hundreds of young people to an overnight rave in the desert where the paragliders landed and opened fire. Some of these terrified revelers became among the approximately 100 hostages, including Israelis and foreign citizens, taken into Gaza.

The abduction of individuals, including the bodies of soldiers, has been a recurring tactic in the asymmetrical warfare faced by Israel. It provides bargaining leverage following hit-and-run operations. These actions, along with civilian casualties, ensure sympathy for Israel and afford it latitude in its responses. Prime Minister Netanyahu vowed to turn parts of Gaza “to rubble,” but doing so while dozens of Israeli hostages are in harm’s way presents a complex challenge.

The surprise attack by Hamas on Israel has shattered assumptions about managing the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. It has led to a shift in perspective from “management” to being officially “at war.” This development has far-reaching implications, influencing not only the regional dynamics but also global politics. The events that unfolded on that fateful day have left deep scars on the collective psyche of Israelis, and the situation remains fluid, with complex challenges ahead.

RFK Jr. Announces Independent Run For President

October 11, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterUSA 0

Trump spokesperson Steven Cheung issued a statement cautioning voters not to be misled by those who feign conservative values. Cheung described Kennedy’s campaign as a “vanity project for a liberal Kennedy looking to cash in on his family’s name.”

Tony Lyons, co-founder and co-chairman of American Values 2024, a super PAC supporting Kennedy, dismissed these comments as part of a strategy to discredit him. He pointed out that disagreements within families are a natural part of democracy.

Dr. Avinash Gupta Elected President Of FIA For 2024

October 11, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterCommunity 0

Avinash Gupta, a distinguished Indian-American physician has been elected as the president of the Federation of Indian Associations of New York, New Jersey, and Connecticut (FIA) for the year 2024.
FIA held its Annual General Body Meeting on October 4th, 2023 at Akbar Restaurant, Edison in New Jersey. Present on the occasion were the FIA’s board of Trustees, Senior Advisors Mr H.R. Shah & Dr Sudhir Parikh and the Executive Team along with others from different members associations.

Dr. Gupta, who currently holds the positions of Chief of Cardiology, President of Medical Staff at Monmouth Medical Center Southern Campus, and Member of the Ocean County Board of Health, previously served as the Executive Vice President of FIA. He has now been elected as the President of this diaspora organization, a long-standing and extensive non-profit grassroots umbrella organization.

The newly unveiled executive team for 2024 includes Saurin Parikh as Executive Vice President, Smita Miki Patel as Vice President, Deepak Goel as 2nd Vice President, Priti Patel as General Secretary, Mahesh Dubal as Joint Secretary, Sanjeev Singh as Treasurer, and Haresh Shah as Joint Treasurer.

FIA Chairman Ankur Vaidya expressed his appreciation for the hard work of the 2023 executive team. Gupta, reflecting on his experience as the FIA Vice President, described it as a valuable learning curve. He expressed his commitment to guiding FIA to new heights during his one-year tenure as president. Collaborating with his new team, Gupta aims to reinforce India-US relations.

Gupta’s vision encompasses several key objectives. He intends to champion the interests and well-being of the Indian diaspora in the United States. This will involve promoting cultural exchange and understanding, advocating for the community’s needs, and solidifying FIA’s role as a non-profit grassroots umbrella organization.

Furthermore, Gupta has articulated his dedication to social welfare projects and humanitarian initiatives. These efforts will not only support the Indian diaspora but also benefit the broader local community.

FIA, a venerable non-profit grassroots organization, revealed its 2024 executive team during its Annual General Meeting. Gupta’s presidency aims to enhance India-US ties, advocate for the Indian diaspora, promote cultural exchange, and engage in social welfare projects.

The newly elected President Dr Avinash Gupta said that he has learnt a lot this year during his tenure as the Vice President and thanked his team for all their support. He said that he looks forward to his tenure and would endeavor hard to take FIA to new heights with the support from his new Executive Team and was sure that all of them together will make their motherland India proud.

Dr Avinash Gupta said, he will work towards promoting the interests and welfare of the Indian diaspora in the US, fostering cultural exchange and understanding, advocating for the community’s needs, and strengthening the organization’s role as a non-profit grassroots umbrella organization. Dr Gupta will work on various social welfare projects and humanitarian efforts to support not only the Indian diaspora but also the broader local community.

Dr. Avinash Gupta, chief of Cardiology and president-elect of the medical staff at Monmouth Medical Center Southern Campus (MMCSC) in New Jersey has been elected the Executive Vice President of The Federation of Indian Associations. Current President Kenny Desai will continue in his 2nd term as the President of the FIA.

on Sunday, December 4th, 2023. The general body meeting was to share an overview of the compliance of all member organizations and to assess the overall workings of the FIA and its activities. In addition, the meeting motioned and approved 6 FIA resolutions to the FIA bylaws.

Dr. Avinash Gupta was awarded the Humanitarian Award in October this year, for his exemplary work in public health and social service during the pandemic, in the U.S. and in India. He is an alumni of the Rajendra Institute of Medical Sciences in Ranchi

In the U.S., Gupta led a team of 50 doctors and healthcare professionals to vaccinate 3,500 Indian Americans in Ocean County, New Jersey. As a president of Monmouth Country American Association of Physicians from India (AAPI), he helped raise $150,000 to Monmouth and Ocean County Food Bank. Gupta led the community leaders’ team in establishing the Siddhivinayak Temple and Indian Cultural Center in Toms River in 2012.

Dr. Gupta is very active in community service and has served as President of the Monmouth Ocean County Association of Physicians from India (MOCAAPI) and Bihar Jharkhand Association of North America (BJANA).

He also holds the prestigious title of Chief of Cardiology at Monmouth Medical Center and President of the Medical Staff at Monmouth Medical Center Southern Campus.
He is chairman of Shree Siddhivinayak Temple of USA, Indian Cultural & Community Center in Toms River, and was recently elected as Executive Vice President of FIA.

Dr. Gupta was recently honored for his exemplary work in public health and social service, especially for COVID-19-related relief and humanitarian work in India and the US. “Being involved with community groups and helping others has always been my passion. Community service is very rewarding and fulfilling. It has enriched me as a person,” said Gupta who received the humanitarian award from the Monmouth Medical Center-Southern Campus Gupta at a function in New Jersey on Diwali eve.

Dr. Gupta is married to Dr. Geeta Gupta for over 35 years. They have one son, Abhinav who is currently in his surgical residency. Dr. Gupta has made numerous contributions to healthcare, including initiatives both in the local area and in India to promote vaccinations against COVID-19. He was recognized as an honoree at MMCSC Humanitarian Gala in October last year.

FIA’s New Executive Team – 2024

President – Dr Avinash Gupta

Executive Vice President – Mr Saurin Parikh

Vice Presdent – Ms. Smita Miki Patel

General Secretary – Ms. Priti Patel

Jt. Secretary- Mr. Mahesh Dubal

Treasurer – Mr Sanjeev Singh

Jt. Treasurer- Mr. Haresh Shah

Immediate Past President – Mr. Kenny Desai

California Governor Vetoes Bill That Would Ban Caste Discrimination

October 11, 2023October 25, 2023 Staff ReporterCommunity 0

California Governor Gavin Newsom vetoed a bill on Saturday that aimed to explicitly prohibit caste discrimination within the state. This legislation, which had gained approval from the California legislature the previous month, sought to identify caste as a subset of ancestry in the state’s civil rights laws, granting residents legal recourse in cases of caste-based discrimination.

India’s caste system, evolving over centuries, established a rigid social hierarchy based on ideas of purity, with an individual’s caste assigned at birth. Although India formally outlawed caste discrimination shortly after gaining independence in 1947, caste-based bias and inequality persist and have spread to other nations.

In his explanation for vetoing the bill, Newsom argued that it was “unnecessary” because the state already prohibited discrimination based on caste. He stated, “In California, we believe everyone deserves to be treated with dignity and respect, no matter who they are, where they come from, who they love, or where they live. That is why California already prohibits discrimination based on sex, race, color, religion, ancestry, national origin, disability, gender identity, sexual orientation, and other characteristics, and state law specifies that these civil rights protections shall be liberally construed.”

Some groups, including individuals of Indian descent, opposed the California measure, contending that it unfairly generalized an entire community. While caste is most commonly associated with India and Hinduism, it has extended to other South Asian countries and religions.

In recent years, individuals who have experienced caste-based oppression in the United States, particularly in Silicon Valley where a substantial number of employees are South Asian immigrants, have begun to speak out about the discrimination they face.

A coalition of civil rights organizations, faith-based groups, and progressive legal scholars supported the bill’s effort to amend the state’s Fair Employment and Housing Act, the Unruh Act, and the Education Code to include “caste” and other aspects of ancestry. Nevertheless, the bill faced fervent opposition from some Indian Americans and Hindu organizations who argued that it unfairly stigmatized South Asians and Hindus.

Equality Labs, an advocacy organization representing Dalits, those at the lowest rung of India’s caste hierarchy, supported the bill. Despite Newsom’s veto, Equality Labs regarded it as a victory. Thenmozhi Soundararajan, Executive Director of Equality Labs, expressed, “While it is heartbreaking to receive the Governor’s veto, it is not a reflection of the incredible democratic power that our communities showed. We did the impossible. Caste-oppressed people have been mobilizing for years to fight against this form of historical violence and will continue to do so.”

Earlier in the year, Seattle became the first U.S. city to prohibit caste discrimination. Several higher education institutions, including Brown University, the California State University System, Colby College, and Brandeis University, have also incorporated caste protections into their nondiscrimination policies.

In 2020, California filed a lawsuit against the tech giant Cisco and two of its engineers, alleging discrimination against an Indian employee because of his lower caste status. Although the state later dropped the case against the two engineers, litigation against Cisco remains ongoing. Cisco stated at the time that it was dedicated to fostering an “inclusive workplace.”

Caste has been a contentious issue in California over the past two decades, particularly regarding the portrayal of Hinduism in textbooks. Some Hindu groups argued that proposed textbook language perpetuated bias and stereotypes against Hindus and lobbied for the removal or modification of certain references to the caste system.

Mixed Reactions After CA Governor Vetoes Caste Discrimination Bill

October 11, 2023October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterCommunity 0

Reactions began pouring in thick and fast on Saturday as soon as California Governor Gavin Newsom vetoed the controversial and groundbreaking caste discrimination Bill SB 403, a legislation that would have added caste to the anti-discriminatory clause of state law. It is no surprise that California’s Democratic Governor Newsom has shamefully vetoed the statewide bill that would have banned caste discrimination. Just days ago, Newsom (who is a multimillionaire himself) outrageously vetoed a bill backed by WGA, SAG-AFTRA, and other labor unions, which would have given unemployment benefits to workers on strike.

This veto on the bill to ban caste discrimination is not coincidentally coming at a time when US imperialism, led currently by President Biden and the Democrats, is courting the regime of Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi and his far-right BJP.

In fact, the Biden administration has said that the Modi regime is a “linchpin” in the US agenda in the New Cold War. And the Hindu right-wing organizations, such as the Hindu American Foundation, which opposed the anti-caste-discrimination bill, are closely aligned with the Modi regime.

It’s clear that Biden and the Democratic Party care far more for the strategic relations of the American ruling class with the reactionary Modi regime than they do for oppressed-caste and other marginalized people.

This is a setback, and it’s important activists and working people learn the lessons and understand why we won in Seattle but not in California.

As Socialist Alternative and I have said since we won our historic first-in-the-nation Seattle legislation against caste discrimination in February, we won because we built a fighting struggle of rank-and-file activists and workers, not putting our faith in Seattle’s Democratic Party establishment.

Here in Seattle too, Democrats, including self-described progressive ones, were initially opposed to our bill, some of them repeating Hindu right-wing talking points.

Seattle Democrats were forced to vote YES only because of the strength of our grassroots, working-class campaign. If anything, given the high stakes in a prominent state like California, such a fighting strategy was even more necessary.

Unfortunately, the NGOs that led the California effort failed to take this approach. They instead worked in collaboration with Democratic politicians, and refused to build a fighting campaign.

Ajay Shah, Convenor, HInduPACT and President of World Hindu Council of America (VHPA) said: “When politically motivated California assembly and senate succumbed to an 18-year long systematic multi-pronged attack engineered by forces inimical to Hindus in various forms, Hindus kept their struggle for truth, justice and equality alive. Today, we thank Gov. Newsom for rejecting Hinduphobic SB-403. SB-403 would have targeted Hindus kids in the elementary schools and Hindu professionals and business owners. It would have led to the bullying of Hindu children and baseless and yet relentless persecution and prosecution of Hindu professionals as we have seen in the CISCO case. I want to especially remember community organizer Milind Makwana who sacrificed his life as he fought against this Bill”

Rakhi Israni, HinduPACT Executive Director, Legal said: “We are grateful to Governor Newsom for standing up for the privacy of Californians. SB-403 would have made it easier for companies to collect and sell our personal information without our knowledge or consent. This is a critical issue, and we appreciate the Governor’s leadership in protecting our privacy. Governor Newsom’s veto of SB-403 is a victory for privacy. It sends a clear message that California will not stand for companies that track and sell our personal information without our consent. We urge the Legislature to sustain the Governor’s veto.”

Amitabh Mittal, General Secretary of World Hindu Council of America (VHPA) said: “Thank you, Gov Newson, for vetoing this draconian bill that attempted to harass and divide the entire Hindu community under the garb of a non-existent “caste” issue in the US. Congtulations to all Hindu, Buddhist, Sikh and Jain American Community members for this crucial victory. We’re proud of all the Leaders who worked relentlessly to make it happen. Nefarious designs of hate, divide and destroy have no place in these United States.

Tejal Shah, Convenor of HMEC (Hindu Mandir Empowerment Council), an initiative of World Hindu Council of America (VHPA), representing hundreds of North American temples said: “The impact of SB-403 on the Hindu temples and culture would have been devastating. Chanting of Sanskrit mantras during prayers would have been construed as castetist act. Today, we thank Gov. Newsom for protecting the right of Hindus to practice their religion in privacy and freely.”

Newsom’s veto of these pro-working-class and anti-oppression bills is a reminder, once again, of how the Democratic Party is as tied to the interests of the ruling class as the Republicans are. Working people and those fighting against caste discrimination and other forms of oppression need to build independent movements and fight to build our own political organizations, because the Democratic Party is a graveyard of social movements.

A Nobel For Illuminating Electron

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Scientists Pierre Agostini, Ferenc Krausz and Anne L’Huillier won the 2023 Nobel Prize in Physics for creating incredibly short pulses of light that can capture processes inside atoms and molecules, in work which could advance medical diagnostics and electronics.

The discovery

The trio was honoured for experimental methods that generate pulses of light that last attoseconds.

To understand how an electron travels, the scientists had to look at an extremely short time period — one-quintillionth of a second (known as an attosecond) — just like photographers use a quick shutter speed while photographing hummingbirds.

Applications

At this point, this science is about understanding our universe, but the hope is that it will eventually have many practical applications in electronics, diagnosing diseases and basic chemistry.

Potential applications of the discovery include medical diagnostics, where the shortest pulses can be used to identify molecules, and in electronics for understanding and controlling how electrons behave in a particular material.

Meet the scientists

Agostini, a French-American, works at the Ohio State University in Columbus. Krausz, who was born in Hungary, is director at the Max Planck Institute of Quantum Optics in Garching, Germany, as well as professor at the Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitaet in Munich. French-born L’Huillier is a professor at Lund University in Sweden.

And the money

The three will share the 11 million Swedish kronor (USD 1 million) drawn from a bequest left by the award’s creator, Swedish inventor Alfred Nobel, who died in 1896. The prize money was raised by 1 million kronor this year because of the plunging value of the Swedish currency.

Last year’s winner

Three scientists Alain Aspect (France), John Clauser (US) and Anton Zeilinger (Austria) jointly won the physics prize in 2022 for groundbreaking work in the field of quantum entanglement, where two particles are linked regardless of the space between them – something that unsettled Einstein himself who once referred to it as “spooky action at a distance”.

Washington Is Losing Credibility Over the Canada-India Spat

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterOpinion 0

Nearly five years ago, acting on a warrant from a federal judge in New York, Canadian police arrested a high-profile Chinese businesswoman, Meng Wanzhou, as she was changing planes at Vancouver’s international airport on her way from Hong Kong to Mexico City and points beyond.

The charges against Meng, the chief financial officer of Chinese mobile phone and electronics giant Huawei, had nothing to do with Canada. They involved allegations that she had knowingly used a Huawei subsidiary, Skycom, to do business with Iran in violation of U.S. sanctions against that country. In arresting her, Ottawa was merely complying with a U.S. request in accordance with standing extradition arrangements between the two countries. But it also complied for another, less tangible reason: Canada and the United States have long been among the world’s closest allies.

The economic, military, and civilian ties linking two countries with similar histories, and which stretch along either side of the world’s longest border, is so solid that one hears little hyperventilation or chest-beating about it in either country. It’s nothing like the United States’ relationship with Britain, which seems to require constant political reminders of the greatness of their partnership, or with Japan, which gets its own slightly less ritualized restatements of its importance to the United States.

In fact, Canada paid a high price for living up to its side of the relationship with Washington. Beijing condemned Meng’s arrest as arbitrary and illegal, warning Canada that there would be “grave consequences” for its actions. This proved no idle threat: Nine days after Meng’s arrest, China detained two Canadians, Michael Kovrig, a former diplomat, and Michael Spavor, an entrepreneur, on espionage charges. The two were held for the next three years, effectively as hostages, until Meng and her lawyers reached a deferred prosecution agreement with the U.S. government, allowing her to fly home. China, in return, released Kovrig and Spavor.

This saga, which consumed Canadian public attention from start to finish but rarely generated comparable attention south of Canada’s border, has been in my mind as I’ve watched Canada work its way through another sticky and delicate international spat. In this recent crisis, Prime Minister Justin Trudeau publicly expressed suspicion that India had been involved in the assassination of a Sikh activist named Hardeep Singh Nijjar on Canadian soil. This drew a furious response from New Delhi, resulting in the two countries expelling some of each other’s diplomats and India suspending new visas for Canadian applicants, among other measures.

India Asks Canada To Withdraw 40 Diplomats By Oct 10

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterIndia, World 0

India is learnt to have told Canada to withdraw around 40 diplomats from the country by October 10 amid worsening ties between the two nations, according to reports. The reports have said that New Delhi has conveyed to Canada that if the diplomats are not withdrawn by the deadline, they will lose their diplomatic immunity.

There are more than 60 Canadian diplomats posted in India.

Last month, after Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau had alleged in Parliament that Indian intelligence agents may have been involved in the murder of Sikh pro-Khalistan hardliner Hardeep Singh Nijjar, the diplomatic relations have hit an all time low between the two nations. Following Trudeau’s allegations, both the countries had expelled a diplomat each. India had also termed Canada’s allegations as “politically driven”.

External Affairs Ministry spokesperson Arindam Bagchi had said: “Yes, we’ve informed the government of Canada that there should be parity in strength in our mutual diplomatic presence. Their number is very much higher than ours in Canada… I assume there will be a reduction from the Canadian side.”

Covid Vaccine Inventors To Receive Nobel Prize

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterHealth 0

Three years after the first mRNA-based vaccines became available, to prevent COVID-19, the Nobel Prize in Physiology and Medicine was awarded to two scientists who made those vaccines possible. Katalin Kariko and Dr. Drew Weissman were recognized for their work modifying the genetic material mRNA to make it more useful in treatments like vaccines.

When they met at the University of Pennsylvania in the 1990s, Kariko had been a longtime champion of mRNA technology, but struggled to convince the rest of the scientific community of its promise since RNA was notoriously unstable and had not produced any meaningful treatments. Weissman was working on developing an HIV vaccine, and thought an mRNA approach might be worth a try. The rest is now Nobel history.

Here are some of the highlights of their journey:

mRNA theoretically held a lot of promise in being able to treat genetic and infectious diseases, but also tended to aggravate the immune system, creating a dangerous inflammatory reaction.
Kariko and Weissman spent decades figuring out that changing the mRNA code slightly would make it less prone to stimulating this aggressive inflammatory response.
Their discovery made the COVID-19 vaccines possible, and is now being

The winners

Hungarian scientist Katalin Kariko and her US colleague Drew Weissman, who met for the first time while waiting in the queue for a photocopier before making mRNA molecule discoveries, paving the way for Covid-19 vaccines, won the 2023 Nobel Prize for Medicine on Monday.

The discovery

The discoveries by the two Nobel Prize scientists were critical for developing effective mRNA vaccines against Covid-19 during the pandemic that began in early 2020.
Through their groundbreaking findings, which have fundamentally changed our understanding of how mRNA interacts with our immune system, they contributed to the unprecedented rate of vaccine development during one of the greatest threats to human health in modern times.

The research

Kariko, 68, and Weissman, 64, longstanding colleagues at the University of Pennsylvania in the US, have already won a slew of awards for their research.
In recognising the duo this year, the Nobel committee broke with its usual practice of honouring decades-old research, aimed at ensuring it has stood the test of time.
While the prizewinning research dates back to 2005, the first vaccines to use the mRNA technology came out just three years ago and is now being used to develop other treatments for diseases and illnesses such as cancer, influenza and heart failure.

Prize money

The pair will receive their prize, consisting of a diploma, a gold medal and a $1 million cheque, from King Carl XVI Gustaf at a formal ceremony in Stockholm on December 10, the anniversary of the 1896 death of scientist Alfred Nobel who instituted the prizes in his last will and testament.

Last year’s winner

Last year’s medicine prize went to Swede Svante Paabo for sequencing the genome of the Neanderthal and other past winners include Alexander Fleming, who shared the 1945 prize for the discovery of penicillin.

Charitable Giving Trends in the United States

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterFinance/Economy, USA 0

Charitable giving is a deeply ingrained tradition in the United States, reflecting a blend of entrepreneurial spirit, social consciousness, and religious values. The Philanthropy Roundtable reports that over 80% of all donations to charities and nonprofit organizations in the US come from individuals, and Americans outpace their European counterparts in giving by a factor of seven. Canadians, often known for their generosity, lag behind, contributing about half as much.

The philanthropic landscape in the US can be attributed to three unique elements:

1.Entrepreneurial Spirit: The American dream is synonymous with achieving success and giving back. Many individuals and corporations consider it a duty to help those less fortunate once they’ve achieved their goals.

2.Social Consciousness: From national organizations like the ACLU to local food banks and disaster relief funds, Americans have a rich tradition of assisting their neighbors in times of need.

3.Religion: The United States remains one of the most religious countries globally, with regular giving to churches, synagogues, mosques, temples, and other religious institutions forming an integral part of many Americans’ lives.

Now, let’s delve into the details of charitable giving in the US.

Percentage of American Households Engaging in Charitable Giving

The Philanthropy Roundtable reports that 60% of American households engage in charitable giving, reflecting the nation’s commitment to helping those in need.

Trends in Charitable Giving

Even amidst the global COVID-19 pandemic in 2020, charitable giving in the US continued to follow an upward trajectory. Charity Navigator, a watchdog for charities and nonprofits, notes that since 1977, Americans have increased their giving every year, with a few exceptions in 1987, 2008, and 2009. In this sense, 2020 simply continued the trend of giving more than the previous year.

Religious Giving

Determining which religious group is the most charitable is a complex task due to the diversity of America’s religious makeup. However, recent studies shed some light:

– Jews and Muslims donate more to public society benefit organizations involved in civil rights and social inequalities compared to their Christian and non-Christian counterparts.

– Among Christian groups, Mormons emerge as the most generous, followed by Evangelicals, Protestants, and American Catholics, particularly in the areas of family, children, and human services and causes.

– Jews stand out for their donations to non-Jewish organizations, showcasing the varied giving habits across different beliefs and traditions.

Average Charitable Contributions

The average annual charity donation for Americans in 2020 stood at $737 according to Giving USA. However, this figure can be misleading due to disparities:

– High net worth families donated an average of $29,269.

– For the general population, the average donation was only $2,514.

– The average online donation amounted to $177.

– Non-profit websites received an average of $1.13 from each visitor.

– Many Americans also contribute in-kind donations, such as goods to organizations like Goodwill, the Salvation Army, and local charities, as well as food pantries, which are often not monetarily quantified.

Thus, the average charitable contribution varies significantly based on income, donation method, and recipient.

Charitable Giving by Month

December is the peak month for charitable giving, maintaining its status as the preferred time for generosity in both 2019 and 2020. However, there are interesting nuances:

– In 2020, during the height of the pandemic, charitable giving experienced significant declines in March, April, and May, as reported by Nonprofit Source.

– Charities with recurring monthly giving programs receive an average of $52 each month per donor, showing the effectiveness of this approach.

– Donors who set up recurring monthly donations give 42% more than one-time givers, according to Nonprofit Source.

The Psychology of Asking for $19 a Month

Charities often request donations of $19 a month for two key reasons:

1.Psychology: Studies on consumer behavior suggest that prices ending in numbers like 4, 7, and 9 are perceived as more affordable and appealing. Thus, $19 appears more manageable than $20 to potential donors.

2.IRS Requirements: Charities and nonprofits must provide receipts for annual donations totaling $250 or more. Requesting $19 monthly ensures that the yearly total ($228) falls below this threshold, saving time and costs associated with sending receipts.

Charitable Giving Demographics

Understanding the demographics of charitable donors provides valuable insights:

Age Group: The average age of US donors is 64, predominantly representing the Baby Boomer generation.

Geographical Distribution: Utah stands out as the most charitable state in the US, with over half of the top ten states for total giving located in the South. This correlates with the generosity of Mormons and Evangelical Christians, who are among the country’s most significant donors.

Motivations for Charitable Giving

Research has identified seven key reasons why people give to charities:

1.Happiness: Giving triggers the release of dopamine, the “feel-good” chemical in the brain, leading to increased happiness.

2.Empowerment: Donors feel empowered when they witness their contributions directly benefiting their chosen causes.

3.Personal Connection: Many donors have personal or emotional ties to specific charitable causes.

4.Trustworthiness: Donors prefer charities and nonprofits with a track record of tangible impact.

5.Community: Being part of a larger community and making a difference motivates donors across various sectors, from animal welfare to the arts.

6.Awareness: Charities that effectively capture donors’ attention through advertising, social media, or community events tend to receive more support.

7.Tax Benefits: Tax deductions for charitable donations motivate a significant portion of donors, including those with modest incomes.

Charitable Giving by Income Group

A closer look at charitable giving by income brackets reveals some unexpected trends:

Those earning less than $50,000 annually donate a higher percentage of their income to charity.
Conversely, those with incomes ranging from $100,000 to $500,000 give the least in terms of total charitable donations relative to their gross income.

Charitable Giving Across Generations

Let’s delve into the fascinating world of charitable giving across different age groups, from the tech-savvy Millennials to the seasoned members of the Silent Generation.

Millennials: The Tech-Savvy Donors

Millennials, often associated with digital innovation, contribute an average of $481 to charitable causes annually, with a remarkable 84% engaging in philanthropy. They have a strong penchant for online giving, frequently opting for recurring donations, with over 40% setting up monthly deductions from their credit or debit cards. Furthermore, Millennials are avid users of mobile devices, employing phones, tablets, and laptops to research charities, make donations, and advocate for various causes.

The causes that resonate most with Millennials are children’s charities, health and medical nonprofits, local places of worship, and human rights and international affairs groups.

Generation X: Balancing Giving and Volunteering

Generation X, with an average donation of $732 per individual per year, boasts a 59% participation rate in charitable giving. While their donations may be fewer in number compared to Millennials, Gen Xers are more inclined to initiate fundraising campaigns and actively volunteer for charitable endeavors. Email outreach stands out as the most influential method for engaging this generation in philanthropy.

Gen Xers’ charitable preferences align with local social and human services organizations, animal-related causes, children’s charities, and local places of worship.

Baby Boomers: Generosity Knows No Bounds

Baby Boomers exhibit remarkable generosity, averaging $1,212 in annual donations per person. An impressive 72% of the Baby Boomer generation contributes to charitable causes, representing a significant 43% of all yearly donations. Many of these Boomers, who were once 1960s activists, continue to support causes related to social justice, world peace, and environmental issues.

Their charitable support primarily gravitates toward local social services nonprofits, animal organizations, children’s charities, human rights and international affairs, and local places of worship.

The Silent Generation: Quiet Yet Impactful Giving

The Silent Generation, born between 1927 and 1946, donates an average of $1,367 annually per person, with a remarkable 88% of them participating in charitable giving. Despite comprising only 11% of the US population, they contribute a significant 26% of all charitable donations. Their giving preferences lean toward organizations that reach out via direct mail and causes featured in the news.

Silent Generation donations predominantly support veterans’ causes, local social services, emergency and disaster relief efforts, and local places of worship.

Generational Giving Trends in 2020

In 2020, amidst the challenges posed by the pandemic, only two sub-sectors of nonprofit organizations witnessed notable growth in donations. Local human and social services organizations experienced a 12% surge in giving, while faith-based giving increased by 3%. Conversely, medical researchers and arts and culture subsectors faced declines in donations.

Medical research may have been affected due to the government’s extensive investments in COVID-19 research, potentially overshadowing other medical causes. Additionally, the dominance of COVID-19 news coverage may have diverted donors’ attention away from other health-related issues. Arts, culture, and humanities groups struggled to raise funds due to the limitations imposed by pandemic-related restrictions.

Religious and Church Charitable Giving

Religious giving holds a significant place in the philanthropic landscape, with all four major generational groups contributing to local places of worship.

Most Charitable Giving by Religion

Jewish individuals top the list, contributing an average of $2,526 annually, followed by Protestants at $1,749, Muslims at $1,178, and Catholics at $1,142. Jewish and Muslim donors often direct their contributions to social and human rights organizations, while Christian giving preferences vary by denomination. Nevertheless, 32% of all donations in the US find their way to local places of worship or faith-based nonprofits.

Average Family Contributions to Local Places of Worship

On average, Americans donate $17 weekly to their local places of worship, but surprisingly, 37% of weekly attendees do not contribute at all. Only 5% of congregants are consistent givers. The average weekly church donation per person has experienced a slight decline, dropping nearly 1% since the Great Depression. During the 1930s, Christians contributed 3.3% of their total income to churches, whereas today’s faithful allocate 2.5%.

An intriguing observation is that 75% of non-religious, non-affiliated Americans engage in charitable giving, with many directing their contributions toward faith-based organizations.

Religious Organizations’ Annual Revenue: A Closer Look

Religious organizations are a significant recipient of monetary donations, with approximately one-third of all annual donations flowing in their direction. In 2020, this amounted to a substantial $128.17 billion, as revealed by an extensive survey of IRS tax returns.

While religious giving has maintained its stability at around the 30% mark for several years, recent trends suggest potential shifts on the horizon. Religious affiliation and regular attendance have been on a decline, with only 36% of American adults claiming to participate in weekly worship.

Volunteer Fundraising Insights: Statistics, Facts, and Trends

We’ve already established that Baby Boomers tend to be the most active volunteers, but there are other intriguing aspects to consider when it comes to volunteering.

The Volunteer Landscape

In the United States, a remarkable 77.34 million adults, equivalent to 30% of the adult population, engaged in volunteering in 2020. These dedicated individuals collectively contributed over 1.6 billion hours of their time, reflecting the spirit of community service.

Volunteer Time Investment

On average, American volunteers devoted 3.5 hours per week to their chosen causes, resulting in an estimated total value of unpaid labor and services amounting to a staggering $255 billion, as reported by Americorps.

Shifting Volunteer Demographics

Notably, there have been discernible shifts in the demographics of volunteers. In 2020, the typical volunteer was more likely to be:

– Married

– Female

– Aged 35-44

– White

– Possessing higher or secondary education

– A parent with children under 18

However, this trend may not persist, given the influence of the pandemic. The pandemic necessitated adjustments, particularly for working mothers who switched to remote work to accommodate their children’s needs when schools closed. This cohort may have chosen to contribute their available “non-lockdown” time to fulfill community needs and simply to escape their homes. Additionally, older generations of volunteers expressed reduced willingness to volunteer due to COVID-19 health concerns.

Volunteer Fundraising Demographics: Generational Giving Patterns

While Baby Boomers traditionally lead in overall volunteering, in 2020, the younger Gen X and older Millennial mothers emerged as the most active volunteers.

Corporate Giving: A Look into Corporate Generosity

Now, let’s explore corporate philanthropy and what businesses contributed in the previous year.

Average Corporate Contributions

Corporate donations to nonprofit organizations amounted to $24.8 billion in 2020, reflecting a 6% decline, according to Giving USA’s report. Corporate giving closely aligns with pre-tax profits, in contrast to individual giving, which exhibits a stronger correlation with stock market performance. Last year, the stock market thrived while many corporations faced profit reductions due to the pandemic’s economic impact.

Leading Corporate Donors in America

In 2020, Pfizer emerged as the most charitable corporation in the United States, according to the Chronicle of Philanthropy. Completing the list of the top five most generous organizations are:

Pfizer
Gilead Sciences
Merck and Company
Walmart
Google

Corporate Contributions to Religious Organizations

Kroger stands out as Double the Donation Organization’s leading corporation in support of churches and other religious institutions. They generously contribute millions in both monetary funds and products to aid hunger relief, homeless support, and various programs managed by local religious entities.

School Fundraising Statistics: Impact of the Pandemic

In 2020, fundraising for K-12 schools experienced a notable 4.6% decline, as reported by Giving USA. Typically, schools generate approximately $5000 per school each year through fundraising activities. The closure of schools due to the pandemic likely contributed to this decrease in fundraising revenues.

Online Giving Trends: A Digital Perspective on Philanthropy

Online charitable giving experienced substantial growth in 2020, which can largely be attributed to the pandemic’s influence.

Online Charitable Giving Growth

In 2020, every sector witnessed a minimum of a 15% increase in charitable giving compared to previous years, with the overall charitable giving growth rate surging by 20%.

Insights into Giving Tuesday

The popularity of Giving Tuesday has continued to rise since its inception in 2012, with $380 million raised in the most recent year.

Origins of Giving Tuesday

Giving Tuesday was initiated in 2012 by the United Nations Foundation in New York City. It falls on the first Tuesday following the Thanksgiving holiday.

Online Crowdfunding Insights

Online crowdfunding has become an essential tool for nonprofits, with notable campaigns achieving substantial success.

Notable Crowdfunding Campaigns

Two nonprofit crowdfunding campaigns that achieved significant success were conducted by Save the Children and the American Red Cross, raising $20 million and $4.7 million, respectively.

Key Factors Influencing Crowdfunding Success

Success in crowdfunding campaigns largely depends on several factors, including:

– Extensive sharing on social media, with success rates increasing with the number of social media contacts. For instance, having 10 friends share increases success by 9%, while 100 friends lead to a 20% boost.

– Comprehensive campaign descriptions ranging from 300 to 500 words.

– Regular updates to engage and inform supporters; campaigns with updates every 5 days garner three times more donations.

– The inclusion of videos in campaign appeals, resulting in a 150% increase in donations compared to campaigns without video content.

Global Nonprofit Landscape

The world boasts 1.54 million nonprofits registered with the IRS, as documented by the National Center for Charitable Statistics. This expansive array of organizations offers numerous causes to support.

In Conclusion

Even in a year characterized by unprecedented uncertainty and upheaval like 2020, the spirit of giving has endured and, remarkably, flourished. Americans continued to give, and their generosity seemed to grow even amidst adversity, social unrest, and political divisions.

This enduring generosity reflects a remarkable facet of American society.

Trump’s WH Chief Of Staff John Kelly Confirms Disturbing Stories About Trump

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterUSA 0

John Kelly, the former White House chief of staff under Donald Trump, has delivered a scathing critique of the ex-president in an exclusive statement to CNN. Kelly chose to set the record straight by confirming, on the record, several troubling accounts of remarks made by Trump behind closed doors, targeting U.S. service members and veterans. Kelly recounted a series of objectionable comments that he personally witnessed Trump make.

When asked to weigh in on his former boss, Kelly responded, “What can I add that has not already been said?” He proceeded to highlight Trump’s derogatory attitudes towards those who serve in the military and veterans. Kelly recalled Trump referring to them as “suckers” and insinuating that there was nothing in it for them. Trump’s reluctance to be seen with military amputees was another point of concern for Kelly. Additionally, Kelly emphasized Trump’s open contempt for Gold Star families during the 2016 campaign and his derogatory comments about fallen heroes.

Kelly continued to outline his grievances, noting Trump’s lack of honesty on various issues, including the protection of unborn life, women’s rights, minority rights, evangelical Christians, Jews, and the working class. Kelly expressed his belief that Trump had a fundamental misunderstanding of American values and principles. He accused Trump of showing admiration for autocrats and murderous dictators while displaying contempt for democratic institutions, the Constitution, and the rule of law.

In conclusion, Kelly remarked, “There is nothing more that can be said,” before adding, “God help us.”

Kelly’s statement serves as confirmation, on the record, of several details from a 2020 article in The Atlantic by editor-in-chief Jeffrey Goldberg. This includes an incident where Trump, standing at Arlington National Cemetery’s Section 60 on Memorial Day 2017, questioned, “What was in it for them?” regarding the soldiers killed in Afghanistan and Iraq.

The Atlantic article also delved into Trump’s inability to comprehend the respect given to former prisoners of war and those shot down in combat. Trump’s public dismissal of Senator John McCain’s war hero status and his private labeling of McCain and former President George H. W. Bush as “losers” are among the details confirmed by Kelly.

CNN reached out to the Trump campaign for comment, revealing that a former administration official had confirmed details from The Atlantic’s 2020 story without naming Kelly. The Trump campaign responded by attacking the character and credibility of retired Joint Chiefs of Staff Chairman General Mark Milley, who was not involved in the story. A Trump campaign spokesperson later dismissed Kelly’s statement as “debunked stories.”

Kelly’s statement also sheds light on a story from the book “The Divider: Trump in the White House, 2017-2021,” by Susan Glasser and Peter Baker. In this account, Trump expressed his desire to exclude wounded veterans from a military parade planned in his honor. Trump’s reasoning was that their presence did not “look good for me.” Kelly emphasized that wounded veterans are heroes, and their exclusion contradicted societal values.

This revelation aligns with a recent article by Jeffrey Goldberg in The Atlantic, profiling retired Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff General Mark Milley. The article recounted Trump’s discomfort upon seeing severely wounded Army Captain Luis Avila singing “God Bless America” at an event. Trump’s reaction was, “Why do you bring people like that here? No one wants to see that, the wounded.”

Kelly’s statement also alludes to a comment made by Trump in response to the same article. This article, published in the final days of Trump’s presidency in 2020, detailed how General Milley received intelligence suggesting that the Chinese military was concerned that Trump might order a military strike against them. Acting with authorization from Trump administration officials, Milley reassured his Chinese counterparts that such an attack was not imminent.

In 2021, the revelation of this phone call was first made public in the book “Peril” by Bob Woodward and Robert Costa. However, Trump recently commented on his social media platform, characterizing the call as “an act so egregious that, in times gone by, the punishment would have been DEATH.”

When asked about the suggestion that he deserves execution, Milley declined to provide a direct response but emphasized his commitment to upholding the Constitution in an interview with Norah O’Donnell on “60 Minutes.”

Kelly’s statement to CNN follows an interview with former Trump White House aide Cassidy Hutchinson, who was promoting her new book, “Enough.” During the interview, Hutchinson issued a warning to the public, stating that “Donald Trump is the most grave threat we will face to our democracy in our lifetime, and potentially in American history.”

Interestingly, Hutchinson’s book, “Enough,” includes a scene in which she and then-White House communications director Alyssa Farah Griffin push back against Goldberg’s 2020 story. Griffin had issued a statement to The Atlantic after the story was published, denying its accuracy.

In response to inquiries over the weekend, Griffin remarked, “Despite publicly praising the military and claiming to be the most pro-military president, there’s a demonstrable record of Trump bashing the most decorated service members in our country, from Gen. Mattis to Kelly to Milley, to criticizing the wounded or deceased like John McCain. Donald Trump will fundamentally never understand service the way those who have actually served in uniform will, and it’s one of the countless reasons he’s unfit to be commander in chief.”

It is noteworthy that no other presidential candidate in history has faced such significant criticism from former members of his inner circle. Mark Esper, Trump’s former secretary of defense, conveyed his view to CNN in November 2022, stating, “I think he’s unfit for office. … He puts himself before country. His actions are all about him and not about the country. And then, of course, I believe he has integrity and character issues as well.”

Similarly, Trump’s former attorney general, Bill Barr, shared his perspective with CBS in June, characterizing Trump as “a consummate narcissist” who consistently engages in reckless behavior. Barr emphasized that Trump prioritizes his own interests and ego above all else, including the country’s interests, rendering him unfit for leadership.

Dalmia Bharat Group Adopts Delhi’s Historic Red Fort

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterBusiness, Culture 0

In a groundbreaking move, Dalmia Bharat Group has achieved the distinction of becoming the first corporate entity in India to adopt a historic monument classified under the Green category of the Monument Mitras program. The Dalmia Bharat Group has undertaken the adoption of the iconic Red Fort, a 17th-century marvel located in Delhi, committing a staggering sum of INR 250 million (INR 25 crores) for a duration spanning five years. This remarkable achievement saw them outshine competitors like IndiGo Airlines and the GMR Group, securing one of the most prestigious contracts available through the Indian government’s ‘Adopt A Heritage’ initiative.

The adoption of the Red Fort in Delhi was made possible through the ‘Adopt a Heritage’ project, a visionary concept developed in collaboration with the Ministry of Tourism, Ministry of Culture, and the Archaeological Survey of India. This project was officially launched on September 27, 2017, coinciding with World Tourism Day, by President Ram Nath Kovind. It was conceived to provide corporate entities, public sector organizations, or individuals with the opportunity to become Monument Mitras, essentially friends of heritage sites. Through these adoptions, the Central Government seeks to facilitate the development of monuments, heritage sites, and tourist destinations across India.

Controversy Surrounding the Red Fort Adoption

The adoption of the Red Fort by the Dalmia Bharat Group has sparked vigorous debates among historians, writers, academicians, and cultural enthusiasts. These discussions revolve around the ethical implications of the project, with some critics questioning how the government could seemingly “pawn off” a significant portion of India’s historical legacy as if it were their “family heirlooms.” On the other hand, proponents argue that the monuments have merely been “adopted” and not “purchased,” emphasizing that this approach could ultimately reduce the government’s overseas loans by diverting funds from the maintenance of India’s heritage sites.

Prominent voices from both sides of the debate have shared their opinions:

“There’s a huge difference between Dalmia adopting, say, a haveli in Old Dilli and adopting the Red Fort itself. Tier 1 monuments are a nation’s crown jewels. They should not be played around with. It’s even more worrying that corporates cannot be held responsible for any damage.”

— William Dalrymple

“Main issue is interest, knowledge, and expertise. If a non-governmental entity has a proven track record in this area like the Aga Khan Trust, there is less of an issue. What is Dalmia’s track record of maintaining heritage monuments?”

— Patralekha Chatterjee

“If you hire someone to clean your house doesn’t mean you are selling your house to them. No, Red Fort is not being sold. It’s an innovative way to save the government some money and preserve a monument.” — Chetan Bhagat

Red Fort and Gandikota Fort: The Adoption Agreement

According to the Memorandum of Understanding, Dalmia Bharat Group is not only adopting the Red Fort but also the Gandikota Fort in Kadapa, Andhra Pradesh. This dual adoption arrangement represents a significant commitment to preserving India’s historical treasures. In the past, similar agreements were reached for the adoption of the Mt. Stok Kangri trek route in Ladakh, Jammu and Kashmir, as well as the Gangotri Temple Area & Trail in Gaumukh, Uttarakhand. These agreements were signed by the Adventure Tour Operators Association of India and the State of Jammu & Kashmir. In total, approximately 90 monuments have been earmarked for adoption, categorized as Green, Blue, and Orange based on their importance and popularity among tourists.

The Green category includes not only the Red Fort but also the Taj Mahal in Agra, Qutub Minar in Mehrauli, and the Konark Temple in Odisha. In the Blue category, you will find Jantar Mantar and Purana Quila, both located in Delhi, while the Orange category encompasses monuments like Tipu Palace in Bengaluru and the Sanchi Stupa in Madhya Pradesh. Entities interested in becoming Mitras can choose to adopt from the Blue or Orange category, or a combination of the three categories. However, they are not permitted to solely adopt monuments or heritage sites from the Green category.

Corporate Adoption of India’s Monumental Heritage

The Dalmia Bharat Group’s adoption of the Red Fort sets a significant precedent, but it is not an isolated instance. Letters of Intent have been awarded to several other prominent entities for the adoption of various monuments. Among them, the Sun Temple in Konark, Odisha, Udayagiri & Khandagiri Sites in Bhubaneshwar, Orissa, Gol Gumbaz in Bijapur, Karnataka, and Kotla Feroz Shah in Delhi have been chosen for adoption by the Dalmia Bharat Group.

Furthermore, a diverse array of industries, including hospitality, travel, and banking, have also received Letters of Intent for the adoption of other monuments. Some of the entities involved in this monumental initiative include Yes Bank, SBI Foundation, TK International Limited, Yatra Online Pvt Limited, ITC Hotels, and NBCC. These Letters of Intent have been issued in different phases to facilitate the adoption of over 90 heritage sites, contributing to the preservation and promotion of India’s rich historical legacy.

Congress Dodges Government Shutdown With Last-Minute, Short-Term Deal

October 5, 2023October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterUSA 0

In a dramatic twist of events, both the House and Senate successfully passed a measure on Saturday, ensuring that government funding remains in place until mid-November. This timely bipartisan effort materialized after months of fruitless negotiations within a divided Congress, leading many in Washington to brace themselves for an imminent government shutdown.

Had a bill not been passed by midnight, it would have marked the fourth government shutdown in the past decade. This would have dire consequences, affecting hundreds of thousands of federal workers and government contractors who would have been left without pay until a resolution was reached. However, as Saturday afternoon progressed, it became evident that both sides were diligently working towards a compromise to avert this crisis. Republican House Speaker Kevin McCarthy, despite facing resistance from the far-right faction of his party, made a surprising move by introducing a clean stopgap bill. He understood that the bill could only pass with substantial support from Democratic members of the House.

In McCarthy’s words, “It’s alright if Republicans and Democrats join together to do what is right. If somebody wants to make a motion against me, bring it. There has to be an adult in the room.” This measure extended government funding for approximately 45 days and included a $16 billion allocation for disaster relief. Notably, it lacked funding for Ukraine, which had faced opposition from many far-right Republicans. Furthermore, it did not incorporate border security provisions, which had been a priority for many House Republicans. Lawmakers pledged to address both of these issues through separate initiatives.

The swift and suspenseful developments on Capitol Hill on Saturday showcased the precarious position of the functioning federal government. Shortly after passing the House, the Senate also approved the measure with a vote of 88 to 9, forwarding the bill to President Joe Biden, who is expected to sign it before the midnight deadline.

This strategic move appeared to be McCarthy’s last-ditch effort to demonstrate that Republicans were committed to keeping the government operational after their initial attempts to pass their own stopgap bill had failed on Friday. However, it also exposed McCarthy to political risks, as he grapples with ongoing threats from the far-right wing of his party, who have vowed to remove him from the speakership if he collaborates with Democrats on funding. In essence, McCarthy decided to take a gamble on his political future in order to ensure the uninterrupted operation of federal agencies.

With House Republicans facing the challenge of governing with a slim five-seat majority, McCarthy’s leadership is most directly threatened by Florida Rep. Matt Gaetz and at least four other conservative hardliners. Gaetz remarked, “I’ve said that whether or not Kevin McCarthy faces a motion to vacate is entirely within his control because all he had to do was comply with the agreement that he made with us in January. Putting this bill on the floor and passing it with Democrats would be such an obvious, blatant, and clear violation of that. We would have to deal with it.”

Before the vote, House Republican leadership expressed a sense of inevitability, asserting that they had explored all other options. Dissident conservatives had previously derailed an earlier plan, leaving them with little choice but to pass a bill extending funding at the current annual rate of $1.6 trillion through November 17th. This closely aligned with the Senate’s approach, except for the absence of emergency funds worth $6 billion for Ukraine.

The decision to temporarily exclude Ukraine aid represents a significant setback for the White House and President Volodymyr Zelensky. Zelensky had met with President Biden just a week earlier and had urgently requested new weapons systems, including F-16 fighter jets and longer-range ATACMS missiles. The White House had requested $20.6 billion from Congress to support Ukraine in its ongoing conflict with Russia. A House Democrat revealed that Senate Democrats would initiate efforts to secure supplementary funding for Ukraine as early as the following week.

Rep. Mike Quigley of Illinois, the sole House Democrat to vote against the short-term measure, cited the absence of Ukraine funding as his reason, stating, “Putin is celebrating. We’ve got 45 days to fix it.” House Democratic leadership emphasized that Ukraine funding remained a top priority, asserting that they expected McCarthy to advance a bill supporting Ukraine for an up-or-down vote when the House reconvened.

McCarthy’s decision to advance the legislation on Saturday marked a significant departure for the Speaker, who had spent months attempting to appease a dissident faction within his party. Despite offering spending bills with substantial cuts and additional restrictions on migrants, he had failed to secure the necessary support from within his caucus. McCarthy expressed his frustration earlier on Saturday, remarking, “I have tried for eight months…I couldn’t get 218 Republicans.”

Rep. Steve Scalise, a Louisiana Republican and the majority leader, declared that his party would recommence the appropriations process on Monday. They would continue advocating for border security restrictions and spending cuts until the November 17th deadline. Scalise emphasized, “Believe me, this is not the end. This is the beginning of our continued fight to secure our border, to get government spending under control, and to get our economy back on track.”

The drama on Saturday extended to the Democratic side when Rep. Jamaal Bowman of New York inadvertently triggered a fire alarm in one of the Capitol office buildings. This prompted a building-wide evacuation at a critical moment when House GOP leadership was scrambling to pass the bill and Democrats were requesting more time to comprehend its contents. Bowman later clarified that it was a mistake, and he was hurrying to secure votes. However, Republican leadership has called for an ethics investigation into the incident, alleging that it was an attempt to delay the vote. Republican Rep. Nicole Malliotakis, also from New York, drafted a resolution to expel Bowman from Congress over the incident.

The passage of this legislation on Saturday concluded a nerve-wracking week in Washington, during which federal agencies prepared for a government shutdown that many believed was imminent. Essential workers, including the armed forces, air traffic controllers, and airport security personnel, faced the grim prospect of working without pay until the standoff was resolved.

While Congress successfully avoided an immediate shutdown, they have essentially deferred their problems to mid-November, when the latest legislation is set to expire. Congress has yet to make significant progress on the 12 annual appropriations bills that fund several federal agencies, raising the possibility that a shutdown could still occur, potentially during the Thanksgiving holiday period.

After 3 Years, Student Loan Payments Are Back

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterEducation 0

After a pause of more than three years due to the economic upheaval caused by the coronavirus pandemic, student loan payments officially resume this Sunday. The Biden administration has made the decision to reactivate all student loan accounts, affecting over 28 million borrowers. Despite ongoing resistance from advocates and concerns about a potential government shutdown, this move has been met with mixed reactions.

Natalia Abrams, President and Founder of the Student Debt Crisis Center, expressed her dismay, saying, “It’s a sad day for student loan borrowers and for the country that student loans have to come back on, especially with the threat of a looming government shutdown, potentially on the same day. It’s just wild.”

A survey conducted by Life and My Finances in July revealed that half of borrowers claimed they did not earn enough to afford their student loan payments, and at the time, only 22 percent had a plan in place for repayment. Some borrowers have resorted to a “student debt strike,” refusing to make payments as a form of protest against the system.

President Biden, who had made relief for student loan borrowers a central promise of his 2020 campaign, has introduced an “on-ramp” repayment plan. Under this plan, borrowers can miss their monthly payments for the next year with fewer consequences than before. The Department of Education will not label borrowers as delinquent, garnish their wages, or send them to debt collectors if they miss payments. However, interest will continue to accrue on their loans, potentially affecting their credit scores, even though missed payments will not be reported to credit card companies.

Jacob Channel, Senior Economist and Student Loan Repayment Expert at Lending Tree, explained, “There could be situations where potentially because you’re not making your payments, the value of your loan is increasing because it’s collecting interest, so you will owe more money. The credit bureau takes that into account, and maybe your credit score gets dinged a little bit.”

Before the pandemic-induced pause, it was already evident that student loans were causing financial strain for millions of Americans, influencing significant life decisions. Nearly half of student loan borrowers in 2019 postponed homeownership due to their educational debt, according to real estate platform Clever.

Natalia Abrams highlighted the broader impact, stating, “In typical pre-COVID times, when people are paying their student loans, they’re not buying their children’s medication, they’re not able to save for a house or retirement. We know from polling borrowers for so many years that they were using their COVID pandemic money to pay for basic needs, and so the worry is that now they won’t be able to.”

The Biden administration has taken measures to alleviate the burden on borrowers before the repayment restart. This includes forgiving $117 billion in student loans for more than 3.4 million borrowers, primarily stemming from the borrower defense program, which forgives the debt of individuals defrauded by their schools.

President Biden had initially attempted to forgive at least $10,000 in student loans for all 45 million borrowers, but the Supreme Court rejected this plan in June. Nonetheless, the administration introduced a new income-driven repayment (IDR) program known as the Saving on Valuable Education (SAVE) plan, implemented in two phases.

The first phase, set to commence this year, increases the income exemption from 150 percent to 225 percent above the federal poverty guidelines. This means that an individual borrower earning up to $32,800 annually would have monthly payments of $0 on their student loans. A family of four with an income below $67,500 would also have monthly payments of $0.

Another significant change this year is the cessation of interest growth on unpaid balances for borrowers. In the following year, additional changes will be introduced, including halving monthly payments from 10 percent of discretionary income to 5 percent.

Natalia Abrams noted the significance of the SAVE plan for certain borrowers, saying, “The SAVE plan is a lifeline if you’re able to get on a $0 payment, and we have worked with some borrowers, especially older borrowers on Social Security, to get on that plan.” However, she also pointed out that the plan may not be beneficial for those whose income increased during the pandemic, as they could face higher payment requirements if they were previously on a different IDR plan.

As the resumption of student loan payments looms, a divide among politicians and policymakers has taken center stage. With 45 million borrowers, only 28 million are set to restart repayments in October, while others remain in various states of account suspension, including those still in school, in default, or awaiting debt discharge.

Republicans have welcomed the impending repayment restart, contending that delays and Biden administration promises have left borrowers in an unfavorable position. Adam Kissel, a visiting fellow at the Heritage Foundation’s Center for Education Policy, emphasized the need to address the root issue, stating, “This conversation distracts us from the core problem, which is making student loan money too easy, which causes tuition to rise and does not address what’s needed, which is that colleges need tough love to end their addiction to tuition.”

The Republican perspective has long centered on the argument that federal student debt relief is inequitable to those who never attended college or managed to pay off their student loans independently. They have put forward their proposals aimed at increasing transparency in the cost of college education.

“Republicans have brought forth a solution that holds colleges accountable for rising costs and empowers students and families to make the best decisions for their college careers and beyond. But if Congress fails to act, students will continue to drown in debt without a path to success,” emphasized Sen. Bill Cassidy (R-La.), ranking member of the Health, Education, Labor, and Pensions Committee.

The revival of student loan payments also coincides with Congress’s ongoing struggles to keep the government operational. Even before the shutdown debate emerged, it was clear that student loan servicers were grappling with customer service challenges due to insufficient funding, potentially affecting wait times for borrowers seeking assistance.

However, according to the White House, a government shutdown, particularly if prolonged, could exacerbate the situation. Karine Jean-Pierre, Biden’s press secretary, noted, “So, you know, if this happens, if Republicans in Congress, you know, go down this road of shutting down the government, we anticipate that key activities at Federal Student Aid will continue for a couple of weeks.” She added that “an extreme Republican shutdown, if this occurs, could be disruptive.”

The resumption of repayments also arrives just a year before the 2024 presidential election, a politically sensitive time to displease student loan advocates. Progressive Democrats are expected to exert more pressure on President Biden to provide greater student debt relief than he has been willing to consider thus far.

Even prior to a Supreme Court ruling, prominent Democrats like Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer (N.Y.) and Sen. Elizabeth Warren (Mass.) had been advocating for $50,000 in student loan relief for all borrowers. Warren, in particular, had asserted, “It’s the right number, it’s where a lot of people intersect that we could transform an entire generation.”

In response, the Department of Education is actively pursuing an alternative path to provide some relief. They intend to utilize the negotiated rulemaking process under the Higher Education Act. While the department has unveiled its initial policy considerations for the new plan, these seem to be considerably more targeted than the broad relief previously promised.

The administration aims to offer targeted relief for specific groups of borrowers. However, these considerations are not set in stone, and the first meeting regarding the future proposal is scheduled for October 10th and 11th. Finalizing any plan is expected to extend well into 2024, with potential legal challenges likely to further delay any relief.

The imminent resumption of student loan repayments has reignited political debates, with Republicans emphasizing accountability in higher education costs and Democrats, particularly progressives, pushing for more extensive debt relief. Amidst these political divisions, the Department of Education is exploring alternative avenues for targeted relief, but any significant changes are still on the horizon and subject to potential legal battles.

Johnson & Johnson Not To Enforce Patents On TB Drug

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterHealth 0

U.S.-based pharmaceutical company Johnson & Johnson (J&J) has made a significant announcement, declaring that it will not exercise patent rights for Sirturo, its brand name for bedaquiline, in 134 low- and middle-income nations. This decision comes in response to global pressure urging the company to refrain from pursuing additional patents for its groundbreaking tuberculosis drug. Notably, the Indian Patent Office rejected J&J’s application for a secondary patent related to the fumarate salt of bedaquiline.

Bedaquiline represents a groundbreaking development in tuberculosis (TB) treatment, being the first drug for TB to receive global approval in more than four decades. It stands out for its reduced toxicity and enhanced effectiveness compared to conventional TB treatments.

The commitment to not enforcing bedaquiline patents in specific regions is seen as a significant step toward ensuring broader access to affordable generic versions of the drug for individuals in low- and middle-income countries, particularly those suffering from drug-resistant TB. The announcement has been met with praise from the Access Campaign, a part of Médecins Sans Frontières (MSF), an international medical humanitarian organization.

The Access Campaign applauds this development, attributing it to the persistent efforts of TB activists, civil society, and countries prioritizing public health above corporate interests. They also highlight that after the rejection of J&J’s attempt to extend its monopoly in India, national TB treatment programs in Ukraine and Belarus have also requested the company to relinquish its secondary patents within their borders.

Furthermore, the South African Competition Commission’s recent investigation is noted as having exerted considerable pressure on J&J, likely contributing to the company’s decision.

Looking ahead, the Access Campaign now urges Japanese pharmaceutical giant Otsuka to follow suit and publicly commit to not enforcing secondary patents in low- and middle-income countries for another critical TB drug, Delamanid. Notably, Otsuka’s primary patent for Delamanid is set to expire shortly in India and several other nations. Delamanid plays a vital role in combination with bedaquiline, particularly in the treatment of pediatric TB cases.

In response to these developments, at least three Indian pharmaceutical companies, namely Lupin, Natco, and Macleods, have expressed their preparations to introduce generic versions of bedaquiline. This move is expected to further enhance the availability of affordable TB treatment options.

The Man Who Thinks He Can Live Forever

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterLifestyle, Science 0

In a quaint neighborhood located in Venice, California, there exists a row of unassuming, similar residences inhabited by ordinary people going about their finite lives, engaging in activities like sharing pizza with friends, celebrating birthdays by blowing out candles on cakes, and indulging in late-night television binges. However, in the midst of this typical scene, halfway down the street, resides Bryan Johnson, a 46-year-old tech entrepreneur of substantial wealth, who has dedicated the past three years to an extraordinary pursuit: the quest for immortality.

Johnson, a centimillionaire, has invested over $4 million in the development of a life-extension system known as Blueprint. This system entails relinquishing all decisions regarding his physical well-being to a team of medical experts who employ data-driven methods to devise a strict health regimen aimed at reducing what Johnson terms his “biological age.” This regimen entails the daily consumption of an astounding 111 pills, the use of a cap emitting red light onto his scalp, the collection of his own stool samples, and the attachment of a miniature jet pack to his penis during sleep to monitor nocturnal erections—a regimen that categorizes any action hastening the aging process, such as enjoying a cookie or sleeping fewer than eight hours, as an “act of violence.”

Bryan Johnson is not alone in his pursuit of defeating the ravages of time among middle-aged, ultra-wealthy individuals. Figures like Jeff Bezos and Peter Thiel have previously invested in Unity Biotechnology, a company dedicated to developing therapeutics targeting age-related diseases. Elite athletes also resort to various therapies to maintain youthful bodies, from hyperbaric chambers to cryotherapy, along with specialized “recovery sleepwear.” However, Johnson’s mission transcends conventional means of preserving health and vitality; it is about surrendering his entire being to an anti-aging algorithm, with the firm belief that death is a choice he refuses to make.

Outsourcing the management of his body, in Johnson’s view, necessitates triumphing over what he terms his “rascal mind”—the part of human nature inclined toward post-dinner ice cream, 1 a.m. amorous encounters, or late-night beer with friends. The ultimate objective is to rejuvenate his 46-year-old organs to mirror the vitality and function of 18-year-old counterparts. Johnson asserts that the data amassed by his medical team suggests that Blueprint has already bestowed upon him the bones of a 30-year-old and the heart of a 37-year-old. This experiment has led him to assert that “a competent system is better at managing me than a human can,” marking a profound breakthrough that, in his perspective, redefines the essence of human existence. His rigorous dietary and exercise regimen, he contends, holds a place in history alongside the Italian Renaissance and the invention of calculus; while Michelangelo had the Sistine Chapel, Johnson extols his special green juice.

However, when I arrived at Johnson’s residence one Monday in August, my intention was not solely to ascertain the effectiveness of his intricate anti-aging strategies. Given my family’s history of cancer and my personal penchant for pepperoni pizza, I harbored doubts about my own prospects for longevity. Instead, I dedicated three days to observing Johnson’s lifestyle, aiming to understand what life governed by an algorithm would entail and whether this “next evolution of being human” would retain any semblance of humanity. If living akin to Johnson promised eternal life—a considerable if!—would such an existence be desirable at all?

Kate Tolo, Johnson’s 27-year-old chief marketing officer and ardent follower, greeted me at the door. Originally from Australia, Tolo had committed to Blueprint just two months prior, becoming the first individual besides Johnson to test its effects on a female body. Tolo is known as “Blueprint XX.”

Upon entering Johnson’s residence, I was struck by its exquisite simplicity, devoid of clutter, with expansive floor-to-ceiling windows offering vistas of the pool and luxuriant green surroundings—an ambiance reminiscent of an Apple Store set amidst a jungle. Tolo presented me with a small bowl of specially prepared chocolate, meticulously processed to eliminate heavy metals and sourced exclusively from regions with a high polyphenol density. Regrettably, it tasted quite disagreeable. Additionally, she prepared a juice-like concoction containing chlorella powder with spermidine, an amino complex, creatine, collagen peptides, cocoa flavanols, and ceylon cinnamon. Tolo and Johnson affectionately referred to it as the “Green Giant,” yet its appearance leaned more toward obsidian, resembling the residue washed off a duck following an oil spill. She deftly mixed it, avoiding any spillage on her pristine white jumpsuit, and informed me that its transit through the digestive system could vary among individuals. I hesitantly took a sip, finding it akin to Gatorade but gritty.

Johnson entered the room, attired in a green T-shirt and minuscule white shorts. His physique resembled that of an 18-year-old, though his visage bore signs of extensive cosmetic procedures undertaken in pursuit of a perpetually youthful appearance. His complexion radiated a pale, luminescent glow, partly attributed to numerous laser treatments and the absence of body hair. Johnson clarified that the hair on his head was not dyed, but he employed a “gray-hair-reversal concoction” infused with “an herbal extract” to impart a dark brown hue to his hair. Gesturing toward my glass of the Green Giant and then to the nearby bathroom, he inquired if Tolo had issued any warnings. I feigned another sip.

The following day, Johnson meticulously elucidated his morning routine, offering a step-by-step account. Although he had risen at 4:53 a.m., he had deferred most activities until my 7 a.m. arrival to facilitate observation. His bedroom appeared almost austere, devoid of photographs, books, television, or any items one might typically find in a bedroom—no glass of water, phone charger, chair laden with discarded clothing, neglected dry cleaning, towels, mirrors, or any other accoutrements. “I only sleep in here,” he stated. “No work, no reading.” The sole furnishings in the room, aside from his bed, comprised a laser face shield employed for collagen enhancement and wrinkle reduction, and the device attached to his penis during sleep to gauge nocturnal erections. “I experience an average of two hours and 12 minutes of nightly erections of a certain quality,” he disclosed. “To emulate an 18-year-old, it should be three hours and 30 minutes.” Johnson emphasized that nighttime erections serve as a “biological age marker for sexual function” with implications for cardiovascular fitness. The erection monitoring device resembled a petite AirPods case featuring a turquoise strap, resembling a purse for a unique purpose. (It is imperative to clarify that no visual observation of male genitalia occurred during the research for this article.)

When Johnson awakens and detaches the device, he steps onto a scale utilizing “electrical impedance” to gauge his weight, body mass index, hydration level, body fat, and a metric called “pulse wave velocity,” the specifics of which he elucidates but I struggle to fully comprehend. “I’m within the top 1% for ideal muscle fat,” he asserts. Following this, he engages a light-therapy lamp (emulating sunlight) for two to three minutes to reset his circadian rhythm. Monitoring changes in his body, he measures his inner-ear temperature. He initiates his day with two ferritin pills to boost his iron levels, accompanied by vitamin C. Afterward, he proceeds to cleanse his face, apply an anti-wrinkle cream, and dons a laser light mask for five minutes, featuring red and blue lights designed to stimulate collagen production and manage blemishes. By this time, it’s typically around 6 a.m., and Johnson descends to commence his day.

The Blueprint supplement regimen is meticulously laid out on Johnson’s kitchen counter, meticulously organized from left to right. It begins with eye drops intended for pre-cataract care. He then employs a small vibrating device against the side of his nose, purportedly stimulating a nerve that aids in tear production. Johnson prepares his “Green Giant” concoction, a blend he consumes alongside additional pills while sipping a dark-green sludge. “It’s what my body demands,” he remarks. Is there ever a pang of longing for coffee, even a hint? “I adore coffee; it’s such a delight,” he acknowledges. “It’s an addictive escalator for me.”

At this juncture, he embarks on specialized exercises to bolster his grip strength. Subsequently, he proceeds to his home gym, adorned with floor-to-ceiling wallpaper featuring a forest photograph. He partakes in a one-hour routine, even though Johnson is capable of leg-pressing 800 pounds, his daily workout doesn’t differ significantly from that of an exceedingly enthusiastic individual at the gym: a regimen involving weights, planks, and stretches. He adheres to this regimen seven days a week, supplementing it with a high-intensity workout three days a week. On certain occasions during these high-intensity workouts, he wears a plastic mask to gauge his VO2 max, the maximum oxygen consumption rate during physical exertion. Johnson asserts that his VO2 Max places him in the top 1.5% bracket compared to 18-year-olds.

Following his workout, Johnson consumes a meal comprising steamed vegetables and lentils, blended to a consistency resembling that of a sea lion’s skin. He and Tolo eschew conventional meal labels like “breakfast,” “lunch,” or “dinner,” opting instead for “first meal,” “second meal,” and so forth. This is his “first meal.” He extends an offer of “nutty pudding,” a concoction composed of macadamia nut milk, ground macadamia and walnuts, chia seeds, flaxseed, Brazil nuts, sunflower lecithin, Ceylon cinnamon, and pomegranate juice. It possesses the hue of a pencil eraser and offers a somewhat dusty taste, reminiscent of vegan yogurt if you have a palate for it.

Johnson contends that all of these practices are driven by a broader purpose beyond sculpting his physique and preserving a youthful appearance. “Most individuals assume that death is inevitable. We are essentially endeavoring to extend the time available to us before our demise,” he asserts. He further maintains that, until now, there has not been a historical era when Homo sapiens could assert with sincerity that death might not be an unavoidable fate.

However, experts hold a sharply contrasting viewpoint. “Death is not a choice; it is ingrained in our genetic makeup,” asserts Dr. Pinchas Cohen, the dean of the Leonard Davis School of Gerontology at the University of Southern California. Cohen underscores that while extending human life expectancy is conceivable — over the course of the 20th century, life expectancy surged from around 50 to over 80 years — achieving immortality is an implausible aspiration. “There is absolutely no substantiated evidence to support it,” Cohen contends, “and no existing technology even hints at such a possibility.”

Dr. Eric Verdin, CEO of the Buck Institute for Research on Aging, concurs, adding, “If you desire immortality, you should turn to a church.” He expresses skepticism not only about Johnson’s claims regarding attaining immortality but also about his assertions regarding age reversal. “He professes to be transparent in his approach, but as a scientist, it’s exceedingly challenging to comprehend the methods he employs to assess his age,” Verdin comments. He notes that the Buck Institute attempted to collaborate with Johnson on research but received no response. Johnson’s disinclination to engage in collaborative efforts with independent scientists deepened Dr. Verdin’s skepticism. “I believe that if he wishes to convince the scientific community that his methods are credible, he should be open to scrutiny and challenges from fellow researchers,” Verdin insists. (Johnson, on the other hand, claims not to recall ignoring Verdin’s invitation and asserts that he and Verdin have recently exchanged amicable emails.)

Some scientists believe that limited age-reversal is within the realm of possibility. In a provocative and hotly debated endeavor, researchers at Harvard Medical School claim to have rejuvenated older mice and are now in the process of investigating whether the aging process can be reversed in human skin and eye cells. However, their experiments adhere to established scientific protocols. In contrast, Brian Johnson, a visionary entrepreneur, has chosen to be a human guinea pig by embracing a multitude of age-related treatments simultaneously, aiming to discern their effectiveness.

Medical professionals not only question Blueprint’s potential to achieve immortality but also express concerns about the health implications of Johnson’s regimen. Dr. Nir Barzilai, the director of the Institute for Aging Research at the Albert Einstein College of Medicine in New York City, met Johnson at a recent retreat for the Academy for Health & Lifespan Research and was disconcerted by his appearance. Dr. Barzilai noted that Johnson looked unwell, with a pallid complexion and a distinct change in his facial features. He also raised alarms about Johnson’s low body fat, an essential component for bodily functions. Dr. Barzilai emphasized the potential dangers of Johnson’s approach, where numerous supplements and treatments are combined, suggesting that these treatments could interact adversely. He pointed out that conventional medical research typically focuses on the effects of one drug at a time, rather than studying the cumulative effects of over a hundred pills concurrently. Dr. Barzilai firmly stated that Blueprint is not an experiment accepted by the scientific or medical community.

Johnson has not made his personal medical team available for interviews, nor has he provided detailed information about his team. Nevertheless, he intends to share Blueprint with the public. Johnson makes all his biological measurements, ranging from resting heart rate to plaque index to images of his intestines, available online. His YouTube videos detailing his exercise routine and therapeutic experiments have garnered millions of views, and approximately 180,000 people subscribed to his newsletter in the first five months. Blueprint’s inaugural commercial product, a cholesterol-reducing olive oil, is available on his website and features a black box adorned with a red-lit image of Johnson, accompanied by the slogan “Build your autonomous self.” Johnson himself consumes this olive oil, constituting fifteen percent of his daily diet, and it has quickly sold out.

As Johnson, his associate Tolo, and I prepare to enjoy our “first meal” on his expansive rust-colored couch, Johnson directs my attention to a bookshelf filled with biographies of historical figures like Ben Franklin, Harry Truman, Winston Churchill, and Napoleon. He emphasizes his affinity for the 25th century more than the 21st century, asserting that he is more concerned with how future generations will perceive him.

Johnson believes that artificial intelligence (AI) represents the most significant development in the galaxy’s history. He contends that in response to the impending AI revolution, allowing algorithms to manage the human body is the ultimate form of human-AI “alignment.” Johnson argues that as AI optimizes various aspects of human life, from marketing to legal research to retail, it is logical for algorithms to also oversee human physiology. He views this as an evolutionary adaptation to an AI-dominated future.

I inquire about the intangible aspects of human existence, the emotions and experiences that define us beyond mere biological functions. Johnson’s perspective is starkly different. He asserts that everything, from love to sex to attending a baseball game, can be reduced to biochemical states in the body. He believes that humanity is heading into a future where control over these aspects will diminish, leading to a divorce from traditional human customs, including philosophy, ethics, morals, and happiness.

I attempt a different angle, questioning the implications of living forever. I ask Johnson to imagine outliving everyone he knows, including his children and grandchildren. He compares this scenario to the feelings of separation experienced during “senior night” in high school, where individuals bid farewell to friends with the understanding that they may never meet again. Johnson suggests that life is a series of transitions, and each stage prompts the question of whether it’s worth continuing.

Tolo, who has been quietly enjoying her nutty pudding on a separate corner of the couch, has not contemplated this aspect. She expresses hope that as many people as possible can embark on the journey of immortality.

In the pursuit of immortality and a future deeply intertwined with AI, Brian Johnson’s Blueprint experiment challenges conventional wisdom, stirring both fascination and skepticism within the scientific and medical communities. While Johnson’s unorthodox approach raises numerous questions, it undeniably provokes contemplation about the boundaries of human existence and the potential for radical transformations in our understanding of life itself.

Johnson voices his perspective once more, stating, “I think your question reflects Homo sapiens for the 21st century. The underlying assumption is, they have roughly 70 years of life. That’s their starting frame: I’m going to die soon, and I can’t do anything about it. So I’m optimizing in this window of time… If you change the frame, and death is not inevitable, none of the previous practiced thought patterns work.”

My 21st-century Homo sapien mind remained skeptical. Johnson seemed to imply that for humans to thrive in a future harmonized with AI, they might have to relinquish some of their innate humanity. It brought to mind “Tuck Everlasting,” the 1975 children’s book about an immortal family who, due to their inability to age, became disconnected from the world, forever isolated.

After leaving Johnson’s residence, I headed to the DoubleTree hotel in Marina Del Rey. At the front desk, as is customary at DoubleTrees, I was offered a chocolate chip cookie. My impulse was to indulge, but I recognized it as an act that would expedite my inevitable demise. So, I left it on the counter and took my Blueprint-approved dinner—steamed broccoli, cauliflower, and lentils, doused in $75 olive oil but utterly devoid of flavor—up to my room.

Johnson’s path to this perspective was far from straightforward. He grew up in a small Mormon community in Utah, where his grandfather owned a farm with horses. Johnson and his four siblings spent most of their time outdoors, assisting with the harvesting of alfalfa and corn. He served as a Mormon missionary in Ecuador, pursued education at Brigham Young University, and later attended business school at the University of Chicago. He married, became a father of three, and in 2007, he established Braintree, a payment-processing company. Five years later, Braintree acquired Venmo, and in 2013, the merged entity was sold to PayPal for approximately $800 million, leaving Johnson with over $300 million.

Despite his financial success, Johnson describes this period as agonizing. He plunged into a deep depression in 2004, which lasted for a decade. The challenges of building his company while raising three young children overwhelmed him. Neither medication nor therapy provided relief. He found himself 50 pounds overweight and deeply unhappy.

Within a year of selling his company, Johnson divorced and left the Mormon church. In 2014, he invested $100 million in creating the OS Fund, which focuses on companies operating in what he terms the “programmable physical world.” These are companies utilizing AI and machine learning to develop new technologies in therapeutics, diagnostics, and synthetic biology. In 2016, he established Kernel, a neurotechnology company that employs a specially designed helmet to measure brain activity. The company’s objective is to detect cognitive impairment at its earliest stages, with a current focus on identifying biomarkers for psychiatric conditions. It can also serve as a somewhat quirky hobby to measure the age of his own brain.

During my visit, we drive to Kernel’s offices, located approximately 20 minutes from Johnson’s home. Despite his mission to “not die,” he still drives himself around Los Angeles in an electric Audi, albeit at a notably sedate pace. Before pulling out of his driveway, he repeats his pre-driving mantra: “Driving is the most dangerous thing we do.” Johnson is aware that his unwavering commitment to living indefinitely could render an accidental death rather ironic. He muses, “What would be more beautiful irony than me getting hit by a bus and dying?”

In Kernel’s open-plan office, I am ushered into a small room where a technician equips my head with what resembles a ski helmet fitted with numerous circular probes. I am instructed to sit and watch a screensaver-style video featuring soft, crystalline shapes morphing into one another. Later that day, I receive my results via email, revealing that despite being 34 years old, my brain’s age is 30.5.

On the way back home, Johnson repeats his pre-driving mantra as he cautiously navigates the streets of LA at around 16 miles per hour. As he elucidates once more why Blueprint represents “the most significant revolution in the history of Homo sapiens,” a black Chevy truck emerges from a Trader Joe’s parking lot. He swerves to avoid it, scarcely missing a beat before returning to his comparisons with explorers like Magellan and Lewis and Clark. Johnson clarifies, “I’m not a biohacker. I’m not an optimization enthusiast. I’m an explorer, concerned with the future of human existence.”

In the not-so-distant past, even individuals with the most futuristic aspirations were once ordinary humans. Tolo initiated contact with Johnson back in 2016 when she was immersed in the world of fashion in New York City. The dawn of the AI revolution was on the horizon, and she strongly believed that the future of our species necessitated a symbiotic relationship with AI. Her motivation stemmed from encountering a quote by Johnson in a tech newsletter, where he advocated for humans to “merge with AI.” It was at that point she resolved to work alongside him. After years of persistent efforts, an opportunity eventually materialized, leading Tolo to accept a lower job title and reduced pay to become Johnson’s assistant at Kernel. She reminisces about the countless hours spent in his office, engaging in discussions about the trajectory of humanity.

At the outset of her tenure with Johnson, Tolo was your typical twenty-something individual. She enjoyed alcoholic beverages, creamy lattes, fast food, and late-night dancing escapades with her friends. However, earlier this year, she and Johnson began deliberating whether she should embrace Blueprint, an endeavor to understand how this lifestyle would affect a female body. Before fully committing, Tolo requested a 30-day trial period, during which she adhered to a stringent regimen. This included a meticulously structured sleep schedule, Johnson’s precise dietary protocol, the ingestion of over 60 pills daily, and a rigorous exercise routine consisting of 13 minutes of intense activity and 39 minutes of moderate exercise daily. Tolo also closely monitored her ovulation and menstrual cycle.

Reflecting on her trial period, Tolo recalls attending brunches with friends while bringing her Blueprint-compliant food. She experienced a tinge of melancholy as her friends savored delectable dishes while she adhered to her prescribed regimen. Ultimately, she decided to fully commit to Blueprint, convinced that the health benefits outweighed the lifestyle adjustments. Tolo’s friends adapted to her Blueprint lifestyle, and she shifted her social engagements to earlier hours to safeguard her sleep pattern. They grew accustomed to her habit of bringing her own vegetable concoctions to restaurants. This decision was more than just a commitment; it was a definitive choice. Tolo expressed, “It would also be the final decision in a way. It’s like, I’m deciding to no longer decide again.”

As Blueprint XX, Tolo has relinquished numerous aspects of her life that she had come to cherish. She and Johnson view themselves as contemporary versions of Adam and Eve, contemplating even an Adam-and-Eve themed photoshoot to convey the magnitude of the revolution they advocate for the entire human race. Although Tolo is positioned as vital to humanity’s future, she served and plated all the meals during the visit and appeared to handle most of the household chores.

Currently single, Johnson spends the majority of his time with his 18-year-old son, Talmage. While Talmage adheres to the Blueprint diet, rest, and exercise routines, he opts out of the anti-aging therapies. He briefly donated blood plasma to his father as part of an experiment to assess its impact on aging but discontinued after the results proved inconclusive. Talmage, on the verge of embarking on his freshman year of college, shares many of his father’s attitudes towards lifestyle and life extension. He remarks, “The idea of having pizza is more painful than pleasurable for me.”

Johnson acknowledges that his lifestyle makes dating a challenging prospect, citing “10 reasons why [women] will literally hate me.” These reasons include early dinner times, a lack of sunny vacations, a strict bedtime of 8:30 pm, aversion to small talk, solitary sleeping habits, and prioritizing matters above relationships.

Throughout the visit with Johnson, the interviewer contemplated the concept of “the emergent self,” a notion esteemed by Johnson. It is a self guided “more by computational guidance and less by human want.” However, the innate human trait of desire cannot be discounted. The experience of wanting is profoundly human. Observing Johnson’s commitment to his unconventional lifestyle, questions arose: What did he truly want? Did he miss indulging in birthday cake, staying up late dancing, or savoring hot dogs and beer during baseball games? Johnson yearned for eternal life, but what is life without desires?

There existed numerous desires, each potentially leading to life’s eventual end. The desire to meet a friend for cocktails in Santa Monica, to luxuriate in a hotel bed while watching TV, or to engage in late-night text conversations with friends. The longing to FaceTime with a daughter, one who had led to a joyful weight gain during pregnancy due to buttery pasta and cheese pizza indulgence. The craving for eggs and bacon for breakfast. A fundamental realization surfaced: the richness of life is intertwined with desires, and the pursuit of these desires, despite potential consequences, is an inherent aspect of being human. Life is too brief to cease wanting.

Catholic Church to Hold Synod on Synodality: A Global Gathering of Bishops and Laypeople for Dialogue

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterReligion 0

The Vatican is set to host a significant ecclesiastical event from October 4th to 29th, bringing together Catholic clergy and laypeople from around the world. This assembly, known as a synod, serves as a platform for discussions on the concept of synodality, with a particular focus on the themes of communion, participation, and mission within the Church.

While some might perceive this event as merely a gathering to discuss gatherings, the term “synodality” has taken on a broader meaning under the leadership of Pope Francis, reflecting his vision for dialogue and decision-making within the Catholic Church.

Addressing concerns about the perceived complexity and insularity of the event, Pope Francis acknowledged, “I am well aware that speaking of a ‘Synod on Synodality’ may seem something abstruse, self-referential, excessively technical, and of little interest to the general public.”

This synod will bring together a diverse group of 464 participants, including Catholic clergy, laypeople, and women, to engage in discussions on pressing issues confronting the Church, ranging from sexual abuse and LGBTQ inclusion to the ordination of women. Pope Francis emphasized the significance of this gathering, stating, “It is something truly important for the church.”

Understanding the Synod on Synodality

The Synod on Synodality is the culmination of a two-year process that commenced in September 2021 when the Vatican released a preparatory document and guidelines for preparing for the synod. Catholic communities worldwide then convened in their parishes to deliberate on the questions posed by the synod. The outcomes of these local conversations were subsequently relayed to their respective bishops’ conferences.

After thorough discussions and debates among bishops, their conclusions were forwarded to the Vatican. In September 2022, a group of approximately 30 experts, theologians, and pastoral workers convened in Frascati, near Rome, to craft a guiding document for the next phase, titled “Enlarge the Space of your Tent.” This document was dispatched to Continental Assemblies, comprising groups of bishops divided by continents. Additionally, Eastern churches and Catholic advocacy groups offered their perspectives on the synodal topics.

The outcomes of these continental discussions were once again communicated to the Vatican. The synod office then produced another document, “Instrumentum Laboris 2,” which will shape the discussions at the forthcoming synod.

Key Dates and Events

The synod’s official activities will commence with a consistory on September 30th, during which 21 new cardinals will be appointed. This will be followed by an ecumenical vigil in St. Peter’s Square. Subsequently, synod participants will embark on a spiritual retreat in the town of Sacrofano, where they will have the opportunity to interact and converse with one another until the eve of the synod on October 3rd.

On October 4th, Pope Francis will preside over the inauguration Mass for the synod. In an announcement made in April, the Vatican revealed that the synod will be extended, with participants reconvening for a second session in the fall of 2024.

Throughout the month-long synod, various significant gatherings and events are scheduled, including Masses, pilgrimages, retreats, and a prayer session for migrants and refugees on October 19th. On October 25th, attendees will gather in the Vatican gardens to recite the rosary.

Location of the Synod

In a departure from tradition, the synod will be hosted at the larger Pope Paul VI Hall, which can accommodate over 6,000 individuals. This choice reflects the growing number of participants attending the synod.

Notably, representatives from Eastern churches and high-ranking members of the Roman Curia will also be in attendance. Pope Francis personally selected 120 delegates. To foster a synodal atmosphere and encourage what the “Instrumentum Laboris” describes as “conversations in the spirit,” there will be spiritual assistants, 28 theologians, and 34 facilitators. While the spiritual assistants will participate in the retreat alongside synod attendees, the facilitators and theologians will remain in Rome to prepare for the summit. These theologians and facilitators will be encouraged to document their reflections and observations during the synod proceedings.

Remarkably, two bishops from China will participate, having received approval from Beijing authorities and the Vatican’s endorsement. This marks the second time that Chinese bishops have been permitted to attend a synod, with the first instance occurring during the synod on young people in 2018. It’s worth noting that the Vatican and China lack formal diplomatic relations, although they recently renewed an agreement regarding the appointment of bishops.

Participants in the synod were selected by their respective bishops’ conferences, with guidance from the Vatican, which recommended the inclusion of laypeople and, notably, women. However, it’s important to note that there are participants, such as U.S. Cardinal Raymond Burke, who dissent from the synod itself, with Burke having referred to it as a “Pandora’s box.” Additionally, the synod will host several German attendees who support the Synodal Way, a consultative process involving bishops and lay Catholics in Germany that unfolded between 2019 and 2023 and proposed progressive positions on issues related to sexuality and the inclusion of women.

The upcoming synod, a significant event in the Catholic Church’s calendar, aims to revolutionize the way synodality is put into practice. Traditionally, synods involved lengthy speeches by a panel of speakers, often criticized for their predetermined outcomes. Pope Francis has hinted at this issue in past synods led by his predecessors.

In this unique synod, participants will present their views briefly, followed by a moment of silent reflection and prayer. The event is structured into five modules: Synodality, Communion, Participation, Mission, and a final assembly for voting. Following the general assembly’s public speeches and testimonies, attendees will be divided into language groups such as English, Italian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese.

These working groups, known as “circoli minori,” will delve into the topics in detail, commencing their discussions with a prayer for guidance from the Holy Spirit. Theologians and facilitators will only participate in plenary sessions, not within the working groups. Summaries of the discussions generated by the smaller groups will be forwarded to the Secretariat of the Synod office, led by Cardinal Mario Grech. This office will compile all the information and provide a digital copy to the theologians who attended the synod. These theologians will be responsible for crafting a final synthesis, which will be submitted for a vote during the plenary assembly.

Rev. Orm Rush, a professor at Australian Catholic University and a member of the theological commission on the synod, likened the process to the unfolding of a mystery novel. Interestingly, the Vatican has opted to keep the conversations at the synod confidential. While the opening session will be livestreamed to the public, the subsequent plenary sessions and discussions within the circoli minori will be conducted behind closed doors. Journalists covering the synod will rely on occasional briefings from the Vatican’s communication department.

This decision, according to Rush, is not intended to exclude journalists but rather to create an environment where participants can engage without the distractions of external influences and animosity. The aim is to foster a spirit of constructive dialogue.

The Significance of the Synod

The organizers of the synod acknowledge that predicting the outcomes of the discussions is impossible, as they assert that the process will be guided by the Holy Spirit. However, the path leading to the event offers insights into the expectations of participants and observers.

At the parish level, synodal discussions highlighted the need for reflection on the role of women in the church, the inclusion of gay and lesbian Catholics, and the possibility of a married priesthood. These concerns resonate not only in Western churches but also among faithful in parishes worldwide, who grapple with aligning these issues with their beliefs.

Synod organizers have affirmed that these concerns will be central to the discussions, with the “Instrumentum Laboris” containing questions addressing them. The synod also provides an opportunity to reconsider decision-making processes within the church’s hierarchy, emphasizing the importance of bishops collaborating with parish councils, assuming responsibility for their dioceses, and ensuring accountability in cases of sexual abuse.

Although the Vatican has yet to confirm the production of an official synod document, it is likely that participants will vote on such a document emerging from their conversations. This document will probably be sent back to the local church level for further discussion and potential amendments before the 2024 summit.

It’s important to note that changes in doctrine and morality are not on the table, according to Vatican officials. However, reshaping decision-making processes and power structures within the historically hierarchical institution could pave the way for future changes in these areas.

The 2024 Best World Universities With Oxford At The Top

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterEducation 0

The Times Higher Education (THE) has unveiled its 20th edition of the World’s Best Universities rankings. Notably, the prestigious University of Oxford from the United Kingdom has secured the top spot for an astonishing eighth consecutive year. Stanford University, representing the United States, has clinched the second position, asserting itself as the highest-ranked American institution. Meanwhile, the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) proudly occupies the third place.

In this extensive 2024 edition of the World University Rankings, a staggering 1,904 universities hailing from 108 different countries and regions have been meticulously evaluated. The assessment takes into account a comprehensive array of 18 performance indicators that scrutinize research-intensive universities, assessing their prowess across crucial domains such as teaching, research, knowledge transfer, and internationalization.

The top 10 positions in this list continue to be heavily dominated by American institutions. The rankings in order are as follows: University of Oxford, Stanford University, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Harvard University, University of Cambridge (UK), Princeton University, California Institute of Technology, Imperial College London, University of California, Berkeley, and Yale University.

The United States stands prominently in the top 20, boasting 13 institutions, and in the top 200, where a staggering 56 American universities have secured their places. In fact, the U.S. remarkably claims the highest representation with a total of 169 universities featured in the rankings, surpassing all other nations. In a noteworthy shift, Asia has emerged as the most prominently represented continent, overtaking Europe since the 2021 rankings. Notably, Africa and South America have also shown significant presence, with each region contributing more than 100 universities to the rankings.

The United Kingdom has demonstrated its academic prowess as well, with three universities securing positions in the top 10. In addition to Oxford’s top-ranking position, the University of Cambridge stands at fifth place, while Imperial College London claims the eighth spot. As a collective, the UK is home to a total of 104 ranked universities, making it the third-highest represented country. Impressively, 11 British universities find their place within the top 100, and 25 are listed in the top 200.

However, while the United States and the United Kingdom continue to lead the pack in the global rankings, THE reports that their positions are facing challenges, with diminishing numbers of universities in the top 200. Since 2021, both countries have seen a decline of four and three institutions, respectively, in this segment.

In Europe, Switzerland’s ETH Zurich emerges as the highest-ranked institution outside the UK, securing the 11th position. Germany also makes a strong showing with 49 ranked universities, and the Technical University of Munich shares the 30th position. Germany boasts eight universities within the top 100 and an impressive 21 in the top 200. Spain’s top-ranking institution is the University of Barcelona, which has made significant progress by moving up 30 places to secure a joint 152nd position.

This year, the rankings welcome four new European entrants: Kosovo, Bosnia and Herzegovina, North Macedonia, and Armenia. Turkey’s highest-ranked universities include Koç University, Middle East Technical University, and Sabancı University, all falling within the band ranging from 351 to 400. Europe, as a whole, is the second-most represented continent, following Asia, with a total of 664 ranked universities.

China’s ascent in global academia is unmistakable. The country has two universities positioned in the top 20, seven in the top 100, and an impressive 13 in the top 200. This stands in stark contrast to the 2018 edition of the rankings, where China only had two universities in the top 100. The number of Chinese institutions securing positions in the top 400 has doubled since 2021, rising from 15 to 30. Tsinghua University is the standout performer among Chinese institutions, securing the 12th position. China’s overall representation includes 86 ranked universities, positioning it as the fifth-highest represented country globally.

Asia reigns supreme as the most represented continent, boasting an impressive total of 737 universities featured in the rankings. Singapore’s National University secures the 19th position, while Nanyang Technological University (NTU) follows closely at 32nd place. Japan takes second place in terms of the number of ranked universities, with a total of 119. The University of Tokyo remains Japan’s highest-ranked institution, holding the 29th position.

India has achieved a significant milestone, with a record-breaking 91 universities featured in the rankings. The Indian Institute of Science represents the country’s highest-ranking institution, positioned in the 201–250 band. Neighboring Pakistan also enjoys a notable presence with 39 ranked universities, with Quaid-i-Azam University leading the way in the 401–500 band.

In the Middle East and North Africa, Saudi Arabia, the United Arab Emirates, and Israel have made their mark with universities securing positions within the top 250. Egypt’s Egypt-Japan University of Science and Technology (E-JUST) has significantly improved its ranking, moving up 30 places from 182 to the joint 152nd position.

The African continent has witnessed remarkable growth, with a 16% year-on-year increase in participation. The rankings now feature 113 institutions from Africa, marking the largest increase among all continents. The University of Cape Town stands tall as the highest-ranking African university, securing the 167th position.

The Latin America and Caribbean region have witnessed a record-breaking presence, with 144 universities from 12 countries securing positions in the rankings. Brazil’s University of São Paulo continues to lead the region, falling within the 201–250 band. The top three in the region is completed by Brazil’s University of Campinas (351–400) and Chile’s Pontificia Universidad Católica de Chile (401–500). Both Colombia and Chile have seen a substantial number of new entrants, with six newly-ranked universities in Colombia, five in Chile, and two in Brazil. Among the new entrants, Colombia’s University of la Costa stands out, securing a position in the 801–1,000 band.

Mexico’s two highest-ranked universities, Monterrey Institute of Technology and National Autonomous University of Mexico, have both moved up a band, securing positions in the 601–800 and 801–1,000 bands, respectively.

In a noteworthy development, this year’s rankings introduce 165 universities that are ranked for the first time. Of these, 89 hail from Asia, 38 from Europe, 19 from Africa, 14 from South America, and five from North America. At the country level, India leads with 20 newly-ranked universities, followed by Turkey with 14, Pakistan with 11, and Algeria and Iran with nine each. Among these newly-ranked institutions, Daegu Gyeongbuk Institute of Science and Technology (DGIST) in South Korea emerges as the top performer, securing a position in the 351–400 band.

THE’s World University Rankings have evolved significantly over time, starting with 200 universities and now encompassing an impressive 2,000 institutions. This extensive coverage makes it the most comprehensive and globally inclusive ranking system.

For those interested in the updated methodology for the 20th edition of the World University Rankings, the details are available for review.

These are the top 12 institutions in the ranking:

1- University of Oxford, U.K.

2- Stanford University, U.S.

3- Massachusetts Institute of Technolog, U.S.

4- Harvard University, U.S.

5- University of Cambridge, U.K.

6- Princeton University, U.S.

7- California Institute of Technolog, U.S.

8- Imperial College London, U.K.

9- University of California, Berkeley, U.S.

10- Yale University, U.S.

11- ETH Zurich, Switzerland

12- Tsinghua Universit, China

Indian Students Receive Record Number of US Visas for Third Consecutive Year

October 5, 2023October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterEducation, Immigration 0

Indian students have once again set a record by obtaining over 90,000 US student visas during the summer months of June, July, and August, marking the third consecutive year of record-breaking numbers. The US Embassy in India revealed that nearly one in four student visas issued globally this summer was granted to Indian students. These figures underscore India’s position as the second-largest source of international students for the United States, following China. The strained relations between India and Canada are expected to further boost the influx of Indian students to countries like the US, UK, and Australia

Indians Account for Over 10% of Global Visa Applicants

Indians have emerged as a dominant force in the realm of US visa applications, constituting more than 10% of all visa applicants worldwide. This surge in interest reflects the enduring allure of the United States for Indian travelers.

20% of All Student Visa Applicants

Notably, Indian students have displayed a remarkable affinity for American education, with 20% of all student visa applicants hailing from India. This statistic underscores the reputation of US universities as a preferred destination for higher education among Indian scholars.

65% of H&L-Category (Employment) Visa Applicants

In the professional arena, Indians are making a significant mark, constituting a whopping 65% of all H&L-category (employment) visa applicants. This reflects the strong economic ties and opportunities that the United States offers to Indian professionals.

Surpassing Pre-Covid Levels

The US Mission in India has not only met but exceeded its pre-pandemic benchmarks, with visa application numbers soaring by 20% compared to 2019. This resurgence in interest signifies the gradual return of normalcy in international travel post-Covid.

Personal Touch from US Ambassador

US Ambassador to India, Eric Garcetti, personally presented the one millionth visa to a delighted couple. Their journey to the United States to attend their son’s graduation at MIT symbolizes the dreams and aspirations that many Indian families have of American education and opportunities.

Looking Ahead to 2024

As the year progresses, the mission continues to process visa applications at an accelerated rate, indicating sustained enthusiasm among Indians for visiting the United States. This bodes well for fostering cultural exchange, educational pursuits, and economic partnerships between the two nations.

A Lasting Impression

Ambassador Garcetti, affectionately referring to the couple as “Mr. and Mrs. One Million,” engaged with them, sharing insights and recommendations for their upcoming trip. This personal touch exemplifies the warmth and hospitality extended by the US Embassy to Indian visa applicants.

Previous Year’s Success

Last year, over 1.2 million Indians visited the United States, reaffirming the enduring bond between the two nations and the ever-growing interest of Indians in exploring the vast opportunities that the United States has to offer.

Caring for the Old: On the United Nations Population Fund’s India Ageing Report 2023

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterIndia, Lifestyle 0

A substantial portion of the global population is aging, and India is no exception to this trend. According to the India Ageing Report 2023 by the United Nations Population Fund, there is a stark reality on the horizon. The population aged 60 and above is projected to double from 10.5% or 14.9 crore individuals (as of July 1, 2022) to 20.8% or 34.7 crore by the year 2050. This means that one in every five people will be a senior citizen, with far-reaching implications for healthcare, the economy, and society as a whole.

In regions like Kerala and West Bengal, a growing elderly population is experiencing solitude as their children migrate in search of better opportunities. While advancements in healthcare have contributed to increased life expectancy, and declining fertility rates are observed in various countries, including India, there are formidable challenges in providing for a burgeoning elderly population. Within this overarching demographic shift, there are numerous other noteworthy statistics. Notably, elderly women outnumber their male counterparts. A 60-year-old person in India can anticipate living another 18.3 years, with women having a slightly longer life expectancy of 19 years compared to men at 17.5 years. In India, where female labor force participation stands at a meager 24%, it is imperative to ensure economic and social security for women to prevent their increased vulnerability in old age.

Furthermore, there are substantial variations between states. In 2021, most southern states reported a higher proportion of elderly citizens compared to the national average, and this gap is expected to widen by 2036. In contrast, states with higher fertility rates, such as Bihar and Uttar Pradesh, are also projected to witness an increase in the elderly population’s share by 2036, but it will remain below the national average. Overall, more than two-fifths of the elderly population belong to the poorest wealth quintile, ranging from 5% in Punjab to a staggering 47% in Chhattisgarh. Additionally, 18.7% of the elderly have no source of income, which exacerbates their economic vulnerability. A significant portion of the elderly population resides in rural areas and often faces economic hardships. Addressing these challenges necessitates a comprehensive societal approach that encompasses physical and mental health, basic necessities like food and shelter, income security, and social care. Geriatric care should be tailored to their distinct healthcare requirements.

While there are several government schemes aimed at assisting the elderly, many remain unaware of them or find the application process overly complex. The National Policy on Older Persons from 1999 and the Maintenance and Welfare of Parents and Senior Citizens Act of 2007 establish guidelines for the care of the elderly. However, to ensure that senior citizens can lead dignified lives, both public and private policies must create a more supportive environment.

India is witnessing a significant demographic shift with a rapidly aging population. This transformation has profound implications for various aspects of society, including healthcare, the economy, and social well-being. To address the challenges posed by this demographic transition, it is imperative to implement a holistic approach that encompasses healthcare, economic security, and social support. Furthermore, raising awareness about existing government schemes and simplifying access to them is essential to ensure that the elderly receive the assistance and care they deserve in their later years.

Kia And Hyundai Recall More Than 3 Million Vehicles Due To The Risk Of Fire

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterTechnology 0

Hyundai and Kia are initiating a recall of over 3 million vehicles and advising owners to park them outside due to the risk of engine compartment fires. The companies are urging drivers to keep their vehicles away from homes and structures until they can take them to a dealership for a free repair.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) issued a warning, stating that fires can occur both when the vehicle is parked and turned off or while it’s in motion. The NHTSA identified specific issues in certain Hyundai and Kia models that could lead to these fires.

For Hyundai, the concern is centered around the anti-lock brake system in 13 different models, which may leak fluid and trigger an electrical short circuit that could result in a fire. In the case of Kia, the fire risk is linked to the hydraulic electronic control unit in 10 separate models.

The Hyundai recall includes approximately 1.6 million vehicles, including the following models:

– 2012-2015 Accent

– 2012-2015 Azera

– 2011-2015 Elantra

– 2013-2015 Elantra Coupe

– 2014-2015 Equus

– 2011-2015 Genesis Coupe

– 2013-2015 Santa Fe

– 2013 Santa Fe Sport

– 2011-2015 Sonata HEV

– 2010-2013 Tucson

– 2015 Tucson Fuel Cell

– 2012-2015 Veloster

– 2010-2012 Veracruz

Additionally, Kia is recalling approximately 1.7 million vehicles, including the following models:

– 2014-2016 Cadenza

– 2011-2013 Forte/Forte Koup

– 2015-2017 K900

– 2010-2015 Optima

– 2011-2013 Optima Hybrid

– 2011-2017 Rio

– 2010 Rondo

– 2011-2014 Sorento

– 2011-2013 Soul

– 2010-2013 Sportage

To check if your vehicle is affected, you can visit NHTSA.gov/recalls and enter your 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN).

As of now, there have been 21 fires associated with the Hyundai recall and 22 “thermal incidents,” including visible smoke, burning, and melting. In the case of Kia, there have been four fires and six thermal incidents. Fortunately, there have been no reported crashes, injuries, or fatalities linked to these recalls, according to the NHTSA.

In the period from 2010 to December 2022, both Kia and Hyundai issued recalls for more than 7 million vehicles, with over 3,100 Kias and Hyundais catching fire. This resulted in 103 injuries and one death, according to the nonprofit Consumer Reports.

It’s worth noting that while Hyundai and Kia are distinct brands, Hyundai Motor Company holds a 33.88% majority stake in Kia Motors, and they often share parts from the same suppliers. Consumer Reports suggests that a shared four-cylinder engine could be a possible culprit behind these recalls and fire incidents.

Why India’s Warnings About Sikh Separatism Don’t Get Much Traction In The West

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterOpinion 0

The current crisis between India and Canada has brought to light a significant divergence in their perspectives on Sikh separatism. This divide was laid bare when Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau suggested that India might have had a hand in the assassination of Hardeep Singh Nijjar, a Sikh separatist leader in British Columbia, back in June. New Delhi responded by emphasizing a long-standing grievance: that Canada harbors dangerous anti-India extremists whom Ottawa refuses to rein in. This is a contentious claim, and Ottawa has never officially endorsed it.

In India’s view, individuals like Nijjar epitomize these anti-India elements. Nijjar is known for his support of the Khalistan movement, which seeks to establish a separate Sikh homeland in India’s Punjab state. Indian officials accuse him of leading the Khalistan Tiger Force (KTF), a banned violent group, and formally designated him as a terrorist in 2020. Recent leaked Indian intelligence reports have alleged that Nijjar financed terrorism in India and organized arms training camps in Canada.

India’s response to this situation included issuing a new travel advisory cautioning Indians to “exercise utmost caution” in Canada and suspending visa services for Canadians. The intention behind this move is to convey that with anti-India elements allegedly operating freely in Canada, Indians are at risk. In response, Canada issued its own travel advisory advising Canadian citizens in India to “stay vigilant and exercise caution.” Additionally, Indian External Affairs Ministry spokesman Arindam Bagchi referred to Canada as a “growing reputation as a safe haven for terrorists, for extremists, and for organized crime.”

When it comes to counterterrorism, India typically aligns its positions, especially on Islamist militancy, with those of Washington and other Western capitals. However, Sikh extremism presents a different story.

Mourners carry the casket of Sikh community leader and temple president Hardeep Singh Nijjar during Antim Darshan, the first part of a day-long funeral service for him, in Surrey, British Columbia, Sunday, June 25, 2023. Canada expelled a top Indian diplomat Monday, Sept. 18, as it investigates what Prime Minister Justin Trudeau called credible allegations that India’s government may have had links to the Sikh activist’s assassination. (Darryl Dyck/The Canadian Press via AP)

In the aftermath of 9/11, counterterrorism was a central focus of U.S.-India cooperation, especially following the 2008 Mumbai attacks attributed to Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT), a Pakistan-sponsored terrorist group. These attacks resulted in the deaths of 166 people, including six Americans. Both U.S. and Indian officials identified LeT as the perpetrator and, subsequently, Washington increased its covert presence in Pakistan to gather intelligence on LeT.

While the U.S. and India generally see eye to eye on the threats posed by groups like LeT, al-Qaida, Jaish-e-Mohammad, and the Islamic State, Western officials have not explicitly condemned violent Sikh separatism. U.S. officials and lawmakers did denounce two incidents involving pro-Khalistan protesters at the Indian Consulate in San Francisco this year. However, Washington hasn’t officially designated any violent Khalistan groups as terrorist organizations, although it did designate the Baluchistan Liberation Army in Pakistan as such in 2019.

Several factors may explain why India’s warnings about Sikh separatism haven’t garnered stronger support from Western governments. Firstly, unlike Islamist terrorism, the Khalistan movement rarely poses a direct threat to the West. Its violence primarily targets India, though there have been instances of threats against Indian diplomats in the West, and in 1985, Sikh terrorists bombed an Air India jet departing from Montreal, killing all on board, most of whom were Canadians.

Moreover, Sikh separatist violence has diminished in recent years, reducing its visibility in Western headlines. Many in the West, especially outside Canada, may be unaware of the seriousness of this threat in the past. During the 1980s and 1990s, a Khalistan insurgency raged in India, and U.S. officials expressed significant concern at the time. A declassified CIA memo from 1987 referred to Sikh extremism as a “long-term terrorism threat.” In 1984, radical Khalistan supporters seized a Sikh temple in Amritsar, India, leading to a violent government crackdown and the assassination of Prime Minister Indira Gandhi by two of her Sikh bodyguards. This triggered reprisal attacks on Sikhs, resulting in significant religious violence, one of the worst since the 1947 Partition of British-ruled India.

However, these historical events are not as well-remembered in the West, contributing to reduced threat perceptions. Democracy also plays a role in Western restraint. While India believes that many dangerous Sikh separatists are based in Western countries such as Canada, Great Britain, Australia, and the U.S., these nations uphold democratic principles that allow nonviolent Sikh activists to gather and demonstrate. They are cautious about implementing policies that might conflate a small number of violent Sikh separatists with a larger community of nonviolent Sikh individuals, some of whom advocate peacefully for a separate Sikh state.

In the coming days, India is likely to press Washington on the growing Khalistan threat originating from Western soil and the need for the U.S. and its Five Eyes allies to take more decisive action against it. This will be a sensitive discussion, not only due to New Delhi’s perception of Western inaction but also due to growing concerns among Sikhs in the U.S., intensified by FBI warnings, about potential threats to their safety. Furthermore, historical grievances come into play. Some prominent Indians, including Indira Gandhi and former senior intelligence officer B. Raman, have alleged that the U.S. covertly supported Sikh separatists in the 1970s and 1980s when Washington was allied with Islamabad, a likely sponsor of the Khalistan movement. While there is no concrete evidence to support this claim, it underscores the lingering mistrust in U.S.-India relations, despite their deepening partnership, particularly in the context of countering Chinese power. The differing U.S. and Indian positions on Khalistan today serve as a reminder that historical baggage can persist even in otherwise strong relationships.

New York Is Rebounding for the Rich. Nearly Everyone Else Is Struggling

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterBusiness, Finance/Economy 0

As New York City approaches a gradual recovery from the economic setbacks caused by the pandemic, Manhattan, the city’s financial hub, has reached a sobering milestone. It now boasts the most substantial income inequality of any large county in the United States.

In a city already renowned for its stark contrasts between opulent living and severe poverty, this widening income gap is particularly striking. According to 2022 census data, recently released this month and analyzed by demographic data firm Social Explorer, the top 20 percent of Manhattan residents had an average household income of $545,549. This is over 53 times the average income of the bottom 20 percent, who earned an average of $10,259.

Andrew Beveridge, President of Social Explorer, commented on this staggering inequality, noting, “It’s amazingly unequal.” He likened it to disparities seen in many developing countries. This income gap is the widest in the United States since 2006, when such data was first reported. Notably, the Bronx and Brooklyn also rank among the top 10 counties in the nation concerning income inequality.

This latest data reinforces the uneven nature of New York City’s recovery from the pandemic. While wages have risen across the city, the benefits have primarily accrued to the affluent. Jobs have returned, but many of these are low-paying positions. While unemployment has decreased, it remains significantly higher among Black and Hispanic residents. This dichotomy underscores a growing divide: the city is rebounding, but many of its residents are not.

James Parrott, Director of Economic and Fiscal Policy at the Center for New York City Affairs at the New School, stated, “We’re still much worse off than we were in 2019.”

The Department of Housing and Urban Development reports that nearly 20 percent of public housing residents in New York City earn less than $10,000.

Middle-income New Yorkers are also feeling the pinch. Roger Gunning, a 50-year-old sanitation worker and resident of public housing in the South Bronx, shared his struggles, saying, “I make $22 an hour, and I still can’t survive on my own in New York.” He noted that some of his co-workers are forced to live in temporary shelters.

Dr. Parrott explained that middle-income New Yorkers have been hit hard by stagnant wage growth in service jobs and the slow recovery of key industries, particularly retail, which experienced a more severe contraction in New York compared to most other parts of the country.

When adjusting for inflation, the median household income in New York City dropped to less than $75,000 between 2019 and 2022, marking nearly a 7 percent decrease. This decline is four times the national rate and represents the most significant income drop among major U.S. cities. For comparison, San Antonio experienced just over a 5 percent drop, with median household income falling below $59,000. Phoenix, on the other hand, saw a significant improvement with an almost 8 percent increase in median household income, reaching nearly $76,000.

Chino Zeno, a 21-year-old construction worker earning $23 per hour installing solar panels, expressed his frustration with the impact of inflation on his finances. To cover rising costs of food and gas and help with expenses at his family’s apartment in East New York, Brooklyn, he also works as a freelance photographer. Despite a recent pay increase, which followed his transition from a part-time warehouse job earning $16 per hour in 2021, he still finds it necessary to hold down a second job.

Zeno summed up the challenge many New Yorkers face, stating, “One hundred is the new $20 bill. It’s hard for people right now.”

The already affluent have benefited the most from rising wages, according to labor data analyzed by the Center for New York City Affairs. Low-paid workers, like restaurant servers and child care professionals, who made an average of $40,000 last year, saw their salary increase by just $186 every year from 2019 to 2022, when adjusted for inflation. But highly paid earners, who made an average of $217,000 in fields like technology and finance, received an average pay bump of $5,100 in each of those years, or 27 times more, in extra income, than low-wage earners.

A recent analysis of labor data by the Center for New York City Affairs reveals a stark contrast in wage growth between the already well-off and low-paid workers. While highly paid earners in fields such as technology and finance, who averaged $217,000 annually, enjoyed an average pay increase of $5,100 each year from 2019 to 2022, their low-wage counterparts, including restaurant servers and child care professionals with an average income of $40,000, saw a meager salary rise of just $186 annually when adjusted for inflation.

The city has made significant strides. In August, the labor force participation rate was at a record high, and the unemployment rate was 5.3 percent, down from a pandemic peak of over 21 percent in May 2020. But New York has yet to fully recoup the jobs lost since the pandemic, while much of the nation already has, in part because the virus struck the city sooner and businesses, including those tied to hospitality and tourism, remained closed longer, Dr. Parrott said. Other popular entry-level jobs like couriers and home health aides have seen their wages lose ground to inflation.

Despite notable progress in New York City, including a record-high labor force participation rate and a decreased unemployment rate of 5.3 percent in August, down from its pandemic peak of over 21 percent in May 2020, the city has not completely recovered the jobs lost during the pandemic. This lag in recovery is attributed in part to the city being hit by the virus earlier than other areas and the extended closures of businesses tied to the hospitality and tourism sectors. Additionally, wages for popular entry-level jobs like couriers and home health aides have failed to keep pace with inflation.

Charles Lutvak, a spokesman for the mayor’s office, credited the job growth to initiatives like the expansion of youth employment and apprenticeship programs. “But we have more work to do, and we won’t stop until every New Yorker has access to a quality, family-sustaining job,” he said in a statement.

Charles Lutvak, spokesperson for the mayor’s office, attributed the city’s job growth to various initiatives, including the expansion of youth employment and apprenticeship programs. He emphasized their commitment to continue working toward ensuring that all New Yorkers have access to quality, family-sustaining employment opportunities.

Wage growth has been stunted for many New Yorkers in part because the minimum wage, set at $15 an hour, has not increased since 2019, Dr. Parrott said. Among the 10 largest American cities, five have raised their minimum pay in that period by an average of 25 percent, and four of them have higher minimum wages than New York City.

Wage growth in New York City has been hampered, in part, by the stagnant minimum wage, which has remained at $15 per hour since 2019, according to Dr. Parrott. In contrast, five of the ten largest American cities have increased their minimum wages by an average of 25 percent during the same period, with four of them now surpassing New York City’s minimum wage.

Many labor groups are pushing for a $21-an-hour minimum wage, which itself could fall short of the cost of living, because the city does not scale pay to inflation, said Gregory Morris, the chief executive of the New York City Employment and Training Coalition, an association of work force development groups. Next year, New York State will raise the minimum to $16 an hour in the greater New York City area and $15 statewide. In 2027, the minimum wage will be pegged to inflation.

Several labor organizations are advocating for a $21-per-hour minimum wage, although this amount may still not adequately cover the cost of living, as the city does not adjust wages for inflation, according to Gregory Morris, CEO of the New York City Employment and Training Coalition, a consortium of workforce development organizations. In the upcoming year, New York State plans to increase the minimum wage to $16 per hour in the greater New York City area and $15 statewide, with provisions to peg it to inflation in 2027.

“This is a working people’s city, as the mayor points out, but I think the question now is, which working people?” Morris asked.

Gregory Morris posed a crucial question, noting that New York City has long been characterized as a city of working people. However, he raised concerns about which segments of the working population are truly benefitting from the city’s economic growth.

For Khadijah Bethea, 42, a single mother raising three children on the Lower East Side of Manhattan, finding work is not the problem. It’s the hours.

Khadijah Bethea, a 42-year-old single mother raising three children in Manhattan’s Lower East Side, doesn’t struggle to find work; rather, her challenge lies in the demanding hours associated with her employment.

After losing her job as a security guard at a bank in 2020, she started working as a server for catering events around the city — up to 70 hours a week, seven days a week.

Following her job loss as a bank security guard in 2020, Khadijah Bethea transitioned to working as a server at various catering events across the city. Her new role required her to put in long hours, often up to 70 hours per week, working every day.

At over $25 an hour, the jobs were worthwhile, but all-consuming, she said. “I caught a bad anxiety attack one day. You worry about not spending enough time with your children, so I said, ‘I need to find something else to do.’”

While the pay for her server role exceeded $25 per hour, Khadijah found the job to be all-consuming and stressful. She experienced a severe anxiety attack, leading her to reflect on the importance of spending time with her children and prompting her to seek alternative employment.

Ms. Bethea enrolled earlier this year in a 14-week career training program run by Henry Street Settlement and Stacks + Joules, two nonprofit organizations. The free program helps lower-income job seekers find work in heating and ventilation system management for large buildings.

Earlier this year, Khadijah Bethea enrolled in a 14-week career training program offered by two nonprofit organizations, Henry Street Settlement and Stacks + Joules. This program, which is free of charge, assists individuals with lower incomes in securing employment related to heating and ventilation system management for large buildings.

She graduated in May and is now enrolled in another training program that pays $20 an hour — less than she made waiting tables — but has the opportunity for career growth and the possibility of working remotely some days. For now, she still works about four catering gigs a week.

Khadijah successfully completed the program in May and has since joined another training program that offers a wage of $20 per hour. Although this is less than what she earned as a server, the position presents opportunities for career advancement and the potential to work remotely on certain days. Currently, she continues to work approximately four catering jobs each week.

A significant dilemma for job seekers is that taking the time to learn new skills can be costly, especially in an expensive city like New York, said Anisee Alves-Willis, a program director for YouthBuild, a six-month employment program through St. Nicks Alliance, a nonprofit community services group.

One significant challenge faced by job seekers is the expense associated with acquiring new skills, particularly in a costly city like New York. Anisee Alves-Willis, a program director for YouthBuild, a six-month employment program offered by the nonprofit community services group St. Nicks Alliance, highlighted this dilemma.

The time commitment is a luxury many low- and middle-income workers can’t afford, even when stipends are included.

Even when stipends are provided, the time commitment required for skill development can be a luxury that many low- and middle-income workers cannot afford.

Angelita Mendez, 35, a beautician who moved to Washington Heights in Manhattan from the Dominican Republic in 2021, began taking free English lessons last year with a nonprofit service provider.

Angelita Mendez, a 35-year-old beautician who relocated from the Dominican Republic to Washington Heights in Manhattan in 2021, initiated free English lessons with a nonprofit service provider in the previous year.

She only made it about halfway through the course before bills started to pile up — the $1,600 a month rent she splits with her mother, the $1,100 a month she pays to lease a booth in a salon and the rising cost of groceries for her two children. She makes about $600 a week, or around $31,000 a year.

Angelita Mendez was unable to complete the English course as financial pressures began mounting. She shares a monthly rent of $1,600 with her mother, incurs a monthly expense of $1,100 for leasing a booth in a salon, and faces increasing grocery costs for her two children. Her weekly income amounts to roughly $600, equivalent to an annual income of around $31,000.

“I don’t have the time to do it, honestly,” she said in Spanish, but hopes to one day return to the class, become proficient in English and use her skills to study cosmetology.

Expressing her circumstances in Spanish, Angelita Mendez revealed that she currently lacks the time to continue her English lessons. Nevertheless, she aspires to return to the course at some point, attain proficiency in English, and leverage her language skills to pursue studies in cosmetology.

Where would her newfound skills take her?

Probably New Jersey, she said — where it’s cheaper.

Angelita Mendez anticipates that her newly acquired skills could lead her to opportunities in New Jersey, where the cost of living is more affordable.

The analysis of labor data in New York City reveals significant disparities in wage growth, with higher-income earners experiencing substantial pay increases while low-wage workers struggle to keep up with inflation. Although the city has made progress in terms of employment rates, the recovery of lost jobs from the pandemic remains a challenge, particularly for certain industries. Calls for a higher minimum wage and concerns about the affordability of skill development programs highlight the difficulties faced by many low- and middle-income workers in the city. Despite these challenges, individuals like Khadijah Bethea and Angelita Mendez are taking steps to improve their career prospects and financial stability, emphasizing the importance of accessible training programs and affordable living conditions in the city.

Modi Government Seeks Detailed Report On Anti-Christian Violence

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

The Indian government’s Minority Commission has called upon a Christian organization to provide a comprehensive report regarding the violence against Christians, following the group’s appeal for Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s involvement five months ago.

On September 21, during a meeting in New Delhi, the National Commission for Minorities requested the United Christian Forum (UCF), an ecumenical entity, to submit this report within one month. Commission chairman, Sardar Iqbal Singh Lalpura, conveyed that they intend to conduct their own examination based on the UCF’s report and will subsequently present a comprehensive report to Prime Minister Modi. Christian leader A. C. Michael, who led the delegation, confirmed this development.

The UCF initiated this request for Prime Minister Modi’s intervention to address the escalating violence against Christians following Modi’s visit to the Sacred Heart Cathedral in New Delhi on Easter Sunday, April 9.

The UCF, responsible for documenting incidents of violence against Christians in India, asserts that attacks have surged, particularly after 11 of India’s 28 states introduced extensive anti-conversion laws. Most of these states are governed by Modi’s pro-Hindu Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP). According to Michael, these anti-conversion laws contradict the essence of Article 25, which guarantees religious freedom for Indians. He added that these laws are often misused by fringe pro-Hindu groups to target Christians.

The forum contends that governmental indifference contributes to the rise in anti-Christian violence. They reported 525 incidents of violence across 23 Indian states up until August this year, compared to 505 incidents for the entire previous year.

The delegation included John Dayal, the spokesperson of the All India Catholic Union, as well as UCF executive members Tehmina Arora and Siju Thomas.

Michael remarked positively on the meeting with Lalpura, expressing encouragement. Lalpura assured the Christian leaders that the commission would address the growing persecution of Christians and urged them to dispatch fact-finding teams to areas affected by violence.

Uttar Pradesh, India’s most populous state, ranks highest in incidents of violence against Christians, followed by Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand in central India. Uttar Pradesh is governed by the BJP, which also wields significant influence in the two central Indian states.

In Uttar Pradesh, Christians constitute a mere 0.18 percent of the state’s 200 million population, with the majority being Hindus. Generally, Christian presence is less than one percent in central and northern Indian states.

Christians in Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand primarily belong to tribal communities, and Hindu groups aligned with the BJP have launched a nationwide campaign called “Ghar Vapasi” (returning home) to convert them to Hinduism.

Michael stated that their forthcoming report would encompass comprehensive details of every recorded anti-Christian incident. It will also address the anti-conversion laws, violent assaults on Christians, and issues related to reservation status, all of which are pressing concerns for the Christian community in India.

Christian leaders have expressed that their community feels marginalized. For instance, the National Minorities Commission currently lacks a Christian member, although it includes representatives from Buddhist and Sikh backgrounds. Indian Christians outnumber adherents of these religions.

Lalpura pledged to expedite the appointment of a Christian member, according to Michael. In their letter to Prime Minister Modi, the UCF called for the inclusion of Dalits (formerly known as untouchables) and tribal Christians in India’s affirmative action policies. Such policies reserve quotas in government jobs, educational institutions, and legislative bodies to integrate these marginalized groups into society. Despite recommendations from various committees, successive governments have denied reservation status to Christians, arguing that Christianity does not have a caste system, and therefore, there cannot be Dalits among Christians.

Air India Acquires 3 Brand New Aircrafts

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterTravel 0

Air India CEO Campbell Wilson on Friday said that the airline had, this week, acquired three brand new aircraft including first Airbus A350, and two Boeing 737MAX.

In letter, Wilson said that the aircraft acquired are part of the mammoth 470-aircraft order announced just a few months ago. “As well as Air India being the first Indian carrier to acquire the A350, this transaction makes us the first scheduled carrier to use the Gujarat International Finance Tec-City (GIFT City), and the aircraft the first widebody to have been leased through India’s first International Financial Services Centre (IFSC).

“The A350 is now undergoing some interior and technical modification and will receive a new coat of paint with the new Air India livery, so will only enter Indian skies in December. However, the B737MAXs will arrive much sooner… in fact, the first one is winging it’s way to India as I write!” Wilson said. The CEO also said that they inaugurated a new Emergency Command Centre (ECC) at their headquarters in Gurugram this week, replacing two erstwhile Air India facilities that were well past their prime.

“This new, state-of-the-art facility would be where, in the event of a crisis affecting Air India or our alliance partners, our actions would decided, coordinated and overseen. While we all hope that we never have to actively use this facility, the ECC gives us a world-class base equipped with the latest technology so that we can respond with the best possible support,” he said.”

We will also be refreshing and strengthening our Go Team with ground handling, flight safety members and technical representation, and adding to our Family Assistance Team to ensure we can provide humanitarian support wherever needed. Currently, we have 750 ‘Angels of Air India’ volunteers who will soon undergo training in emergency management, and we are always keen for more,” he added. “Speaking of technology, I’d also like to acknowledge the D&T and Customer Experience teams for the successful transition of all customer service channels to our own technology stack.

This includes telephony, computer-telephony-interface, interactive voice response, customer relationship management, customer data platform and artificial-intelligence-driven agent-assist technologies, which allows us to have a unified view of all customer support needs,” he said in the letter.

“Modernising and in housing this tech stack, and better interfacing it with other key systems, gives Air India better control, independence and ability to materially improve our customers’ experience with us, and to accelerate the development and deployment of new capabilities,” he added.

US Government And 17 States Sue Amazon In Landmark Monopoly Case

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterBusiness 0

The US government and 17 states are taking legal action against Amazon in a significant monopoly case that highlights years of allegations surrounding the e-commerce giant’s misuse of its economic dominance and its impact on fair competition.

This groundbreaking lawsuit has been jointly filed by the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) and 17 state attorneys general. It represents the most aggressive move to date against Amazon, a company that originally started as an online bookstore but has since grown into a global e-commerce behemoth, often referred to as the “everything store.” Amazon has expanded its operations to include the sale of a wide range of consumer products, established a far-reaching logistics network, and ventured into other technological domains, including cloud computing.

The 172-page complaint alleges that Amazon engages in unfair practices that prioritize its own platform and services at the expense of third-party sellers who rely on the company’s e-commerce marketplace for distribution. One example highlighted by the FTC is Amazon’s requirement for sellers on its platform to use Amazon’s in-house logistics services to qualify for benefits like “Prime” eligibility. Additionally, the complaint contends that Amazon unfairly compels sellers to list their products on Amazon at the lowest prices available anywhere online, rather than allowing them to offer their products at competitive prices on other platforms.

These practices have already been the subject of a separate lawsuit filed against Amazon by the Attorney General of California last year. Due to Amazon’s dominant position in e-commerce, sellers often feel compelled to accept Amazon’s terms, which, according to the FTC, results in higher prices for consumers and a less favorable shopping experience. The FTC also alleges that Amazon prioritizes its own products in search results over those of third-party sellers.

FTC Chair Lina Khan emphasized that Amazon is aggressively focused on preventing others from achieving the same level of customer reach it has. She stated, “This complaint reflects the cutting edge and best thinking on how competition occurs in digital markets and, similarly, the tactics that Amazon has used to suffocate rivals, deprive them of oxygen, and really leave a stunted landscape in its wake.”

Seventeen states are participating in this legal action: Connecticut, Delaware, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, New Jersey, New Hampshire, New Mexico, Nevada, New York, Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, and Wisconsin.

The complaint has been filed in the US District Court for the Western District of Washington, and it seeks a court order to halt Amazon’s alleged anticompetitive behavior. While the FTC has not ruled out the possibility of breaking up Amazon, the focus at this stage is primarily on determining liability. The complaint, however, does suggest that any court order could potentially include “structural relief,” referring to the possibility of breaking up Amazon.

Furthermore, the FTC has not ruled out the idea of holding individual Amazon executives personally responsible if there is sufficient evidence of their involvement in the alleged anticompetitive conduct.

This lawsuit against Amazon follows similar actions taken against other tech giants like Google and Meta, marking a growing trend of government scrutiny and antitrust allegations against major tech companies. The legal proceedings are expected to be protracted, but they underscore the increasing global scrutiny and concerns regarding the market power of Big Tech companies.

In response to the FTC’s allegations, David Zapolsky, Amazon’s Senior Vice President of Global Public Policy and General Counsel, defended the company’s practices, stating that Amazon has contributed to competition, innovation, and product variety in the retail industry. He argued that Amazon has facilitated lower prices, faster delivery, and opportunities for small businesses to sell their products.

Zapolsky also warned that if the FTC’s lawsuit succeeds, it could lead to higher prices for consumers, slower delivery times, and increased costs for Amazon’s operations, which might result in higher Amazon Prime subscription fees and less convenience for customers.

Over the years, Amazon has faced criticism from various quarters, including US lawmakers, European regulators, third-party sellers, consumer advocacy groups, and others. These critics have accused the company of a range of issues, including mistreatment of its workers and the imposition of anticompetitive terms on third-party sellers.

The FTC’s lawsuit, however, is more focused and takes aim at Amazon’s conduct in two specific markets: the “online superstore” market, where Amazon’s actions are alleged to harm consumers, and the “online marketplace services” market serving independent sellers. The complaint also highlights Amazon’s self-promotion of its own products in search results, which it believes is linked to the anticompetitive behavior under scrutiny.

This lawsuit represents a significant moment in FTC Chair Lina Khan’s career, as she has been at the forefront of efforts to scrutinize and regulate Amazon and other tech giants for antitrust violations. Khan’s leadership at the FTC has led to a more aggressive enforcement stance, particularly in the tech industry.

The lawsuit against Amazon by the FTC and 17 states is a pivotal development in the ongoing debate over the market power of tech giants. It underscores the government’s increasing focus on antitrust issues in the digital marketplace and raises significant questions about the future of Amazon and other major technology companies.

Secret World War II Tunnels To Open To Public

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterCulture 0

Plans have emerged for what is poised to become London’s most remarkable underground tourist attraction ever: the $268 million makeover of a mile-long network of World War II tunnels into a glamorous immersive experience.

Previously shrouded in secrecy and once shielded by the UK’s Official Secrets Act, these former espionage tunnels are slated for transformation by a team that includes the architects responsible for Singapore’s Gardens by the Bay and London’s Battersea Power Station. This transformation is contingent on securing planning approval later this autumn.

Situated approximately 40 meters beneath Chancery Lane tube station in High Holborn, the Kingsway Exchange Tunnels were constructed during the 1940s to provide refuge for Londoners during the Blitz bombing campaign of World War II. Since then, they remained off-limits to the general public, serving subsequent wartime roles such as housing Britain’s covert Special Operations Executive, an offshoot of MI6 and the real-world inspiration for James Bond’s Q Branch.

Subsequently, these tunnels were expanded to become the Kingsway Telephone Exchange, functioning as an internal communications hub during the Cold War in the 1950s. Notably, it played host to the “hotline” directly linking the leaders of the United States and the USSR. The exchange operated an extensive network of 5,000 trunk cables and was staffed by a bustling community of 200 workers responsible for managing phone lines.

In the 1980s, British Telecom assumed control of the site, establishing the world’s deepest licensed bar, exclusively catering to government personnel. This bar featured a game room replete with snooker tables and an opulent tropical fish tank, epitomizing the luxury of the 1980s.

By the close of that decade, the technology underpinning the telephone center had become outdated, leading to its decommissioning. However, fund manager Angus Murray, who serves as CEO of The London Tunnels, is now endeavoring to breathe life into the tunnel’s history by utilizing high-resolution immersive screens, interactive structures, scent-emitting technology, and an array of pinpoint speakers to captivate visitors.

Murray articulated, “The history of the tunnels, their scale, and their location between London’s Holborn and the historic Square Mile could establish these tunnels as one of London’s most sought-after tourist destinations.”

The proposed investment comprises £140 million ($170.5 million) for restoration work, coupled with an additional £80 million ($97 million) allocated for immersive enhancements. With the participation of architects Wilkinson-Eyre, this project has assembled a stellar team for a highly ambitious endeavor that far surpasses any other offerings in the city. Presently, London’s most established permanent underground tourist attraction is the Churchill War Rooms, situated just 12 feet below ground level, occupying a fraction of the 8,000-square-meter expanse of the Kingsway Exchange Tunnels.

Periodically, London Underground organizes Hidden London tours, allowing exploration of the city’s abandoned tube stations and tunnels. These tours consistently garner immense popularity, with tickets being snatched up as soon as they become available.

Nonetheless, eager subterranean adventurers may need to exercise patience. The London Tunnels project, should it proceed, is not anticipated to welcome its first awe-struck visitors until 2027. Yet, judging by its ambitious scope, it appears to be well worth the wait.

King Khan Opens Up A Bold New Space For Bollywood

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterCinema 0

The industry prefers a winning formula to creative exploration, particularly in big-budget films populated by rocking stars with fancy fees. Will that change from hereon with the success of ‘Jawan’? We have on offer a new path for Bollywood, a path that can use its huge and unrivalled soft power to drive home some significant messages of the kind and in a way it has rarely attempted in a big-budget extravaganza.

By Jagdish Rattanani Shah Rukh Khan, also known as King Khan or SRK, is raking it in at the box office with ‘Jawan’. The movie opened last week and reportedly netted over Rs.350 crore by the weekend, said to be the biggest opening ever on record for a Bollywood movie. A career that some thought was in decline is back with a big bang. The SRK magic works this time with co-star Nayanthara, noted for her work across the southern Indian states, and Tamil cinema stars like Vijay Sethupati and the director Atlee Kumar, combining talent across the North and South into a package that appears to have been lapped up by the national audience. The producer company, Red Chillies Entertainment, describes the 2¾-hour-long movie in these words: “A high-octane action thriller which outlines the emotional journey of a man who is set to rectify the wrongs in society.”

Needless to say, a lot of it is typical Bollywood hyperbole. But the “wrongs in society” it highlights are very real, making ‘Jawan’ a bold venture with distinct political overtones that many would see as high risk in this particular political atmosphere, further heated by the upcoming elections. That the movie highlights the death of patients due to a lack of oxygen cylinders in a public hospital, the farmer suicides, bad deals for substandard equipment that fail our soldiers, the factories that pollute our water and air, or protection of select businessmen wheeler-dealers, is as real or as specific as it can get today.

In that, the movie goes beyond the general tirade against the ills of society, pictured usually in stereotypes of the rogue middleman, the corrupt politician, or the woes of everyday people as they struggle to get their due. ‘Jawan’ still has a lot of common nouns, of course, but proper nouns are in the air. In that sense, SRK and team have unhesitatingly opened real issues meshed within unreal drama, using escapist masala to serve burning political questions that many can see, many more can sense but few from Bollywood will dare ask in today’s political climate.

Puts people on notice

It used to be the theory long ago that Bollywood works because vacuous song-and-dance was the one release from the misery of everyday living for millions. This changed over the decades, from the early romance stories and the rich-poor commentary to the angry-young-man, bolder romances, and then post-liberalisation with the arrival of low-cost productions that experimented with new themes. The changing times brought more modern-day issues to the big screen, like live-in relationships, LGBTQ+ rights and alliances, caste conflicts, “encounter” killings, the rural-urban divide, autism, loneliness, mental health. Many of the films over the years have had political messages and, in that sense, Bollywood was always political but in an indirect sort of way. It played mostly in safe territory – not many looked the establishment in the eye and spoke up with gusto.

This is a place known after all for song and dance, where the watchwords are entertainment and glamour. The industry prefers a winning formula to creative exploration, particularly in big-budget films populated by rocking stars with fancy fees. Will that change from hereon with the success of ‘Jawan’? We have on offer a new path for Bollywood, a path that can use its huge and unrivalled soft power to drive home some significant messages of the kind and in a way it has rarely attempted in a big-budget extravaganza. In that sense, the movie puts everyone on notice and opens new imaginations and possibilities of what Bollywood can do when it wades into hot political spaces.

Clear political messaging

One highlight of the movie is a speech that shows SRK asking citizens to pick who they will vote for after raising the right question: What will you, dear candidate, do for us, in the next five years? If someone in the family takes ill, what will you do for their treatment? What will you do to get me a job?

The message is to demand performance and delivery of service in areas of health, education, jobs, and not fall for distraction in the name of religion, race or caste. But these are exactly the questions and issues that are not in focus in the India of today, and posing them in a successful masala format gets them further to the masses than any medium possibly can. The delivery comes against a backdrop of electronic voting machines, framing the messages in the very live context of the 2024 elections.

None of this is a sophisticated delivery, or a critical examination of the complex political issues of our times. It is a baseline delivery but its significance is that it was delivered, and its success is in its wide reach, its slick package and its big questions. In that, it quite ironically matches the unsophisticated approach of those who have twisted the national agenda, changed the political discourse and now those who have come out with desperate calls to boycott the movie by drawing all kinds of connections – from the current controversy over remarks on Sanatana Dharma to Shah Rukh Khan’s recent visit to the Tirupati temple.

Expanded the space

The Hindi film industry is one place where the key currency is the quality of work and acceptance by the audience, never mind all that has been said in the name of the late Sushant Singh Rajput. Hindus, Muslims and all other faiths work here hard, and hand-in-hand, to take audiences into a dream world. It’s an efficient business machine that challenges you to prove yourself every day, however well you are connected.

The trick to making money and enjoying the ride is to challenge yourself, not challenge the political establishment. SRK’s ‘Jawan’ has just expanded that space to speak up. The effort deserves to be protected and nurtured and allowed to grow. The success of the movie is therefore good news, but it remains to be seen what will follow and how Bollywood can or will embrace this new road.

(The writer is a journalist and faculty member at SPJIMR, Mumbai. Views are personal. By special arrangement with The Billion Press) Read more at: https://www.southasiamonitor.org/medley/king-khan-opens-bold-new-space-bollywood

Unlocking America’s Potential: How Immigration Fuels Economic Growth and Our Competitive Advantage

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterImmigration 0

Extracts from Cato Institute’s Associate Director of Immigration Studies David J. Bier’s testimony at Sept. 13, 2023, hearing of Committee on the Budget United States Senate, Washington, D.C.)

David J. Bier is Associate Director of Immigration Research at Cato Institute. Photo: cato.org

Our view is simple: people are the ultimate resource. New people are not threats to suppress but assets to celebrate. We need people to transform natural resources into human resources, and in a free country, people seek to do just that. Immigrants are no different. Immigrants are workers, inventors, investors, and entrepreneurs.

Immigrants increase the supply of labor, which increases the supply of goods and services that people need; their consumption, entrepreneurship, and investment also increases the demand for labor, creating better‐paying jobs for Americans elsewhere in the economy. Fundamentally, immigrants aren’t competitors. They are collaborators. Unfortunately, America’s immigration system fails to recognize this fact, leading to catastrophic consequences.

Immigrants can save the United States from population decline.

The most critical challenge facing the United States today is its declining population growth rate. The U.S. population is growing slower than at any point in its history. Moreover, in 2022, international migration accounted for 80 percent of the meager 0.4 percent population growth.¹ Without immigration, the U.S. population will start to decline by the 2030s. Already in 2022, about half of all the counties in the United States saw declining populations.

People are necessary to maintain buildings, roads, schools, hospitals, and businesses because population decline erodes property values and forces business and school closures. This population death spiral has afflicted both urban and rural counties. Rural America saw a decrease in population for the first time in U.S. history in the last decade.³ Population aging or decline will reduce tax revenue per capita in nearly every state by 2030.

The country has already seen how population decline will manifest in the future. Major cities saw significant outmigration in the 1960s and 1970s before they stabilized and rebounded in the 1990s and 2000s, largely thanks to new immigrants. The outmigration led to housing vacancies and job losses, which contributed to increased crime, and the in‐migration went hand in hand with lower crime and more business creation. Immigration has already created or preserved $3.7 trillion in housing wealth for U.S. households.⁶ Immigrants do this primarily by preventing declines in housing values in the lowest‐cost areas in a city. Every 1,000 new immigrants to a county create economic opportunities for 270 additional U.S. residents, helping draw areas out of decline.

Immigrants can save America from labor force decline.

With slower population growth, labor force growth in the United States has also declined for decades, falling by 65 percent from the 1960s—when the immigrant share of the U.S.population bottomed out—to the most recent decade. It fell faster among those without a college degree. From 1995 to 2022, immigrants and their children accounted for 70 percent of labor force growth, and over the last two years, immigrants accounted for 100 percent of the increase in the working‐age population. Without immigrants, the working‐age population will fall by about 6 million in the next two decades. The total U.S. population would decline without any immigration by 2040.¹⁰

The costs of this decline are huge. The ratio of workers to retirees has plummeted since the 1960s, and the Social Security Trustees now estimate that Social Security will be short nearly 35 million workers to fund the system in the 2030s. It will have to cut benefits by at least 23 percent in 2034, if not earlier. The situation will not improve after that with benefit cuts reaching 30 percent and the shortfall in workers hitting 80 million by 2080.

The present value cost of this worker shortage to U.S. retirees is about $24 trillion. Of course, the underlying dynamics of Social Security need reforms regardless, but this shortfall highlights the magnitude of America’s workforce issues. The Federal Reserve Board of Governors expects that the decline in population growth will cause economic growth to decline throughout OECD member countries, including the United States, increasing the burden of the U.S. debt.

Immigrants improve the U.S. fiscal situation. According to a Cato Institute update of a National Academy of Sciences report, immigrants generate, in inflation‐adjusted terms, nearly $1 trillion in state, local, and federal taxes, which is almost $300 billion more than they receive in government benefits, including cash assistance, entitlements, and public education.

In the long‐term, the present value of all the taxes generated minus all the benefits received for an immigrant arriving at age 25 is positive for all education levels, including high school dropouts (Table below). This positive result occurs partly because immigrant workers cause companies to invest more in capital, which results in those companies paying far more in taxes than they would without those workers.

The Congressional Budget Office (CBO) found in 2013 that comprehensive immigration reform would have “a net savings of about $175 billion over the 2014–2023 period” and “would decrease federal budget deficits by about $700 billion (or 0.2 percent of total output) over the 2024–2033 period.” The CBO stated that there would be about another $300 billion in savings from the indirect economic effects of more workers. Unfortunately, this scoring was a rare exception to CBO’s normal practice of not considering the increases in employment that occur when immigrants enter the labor force, leading to such anomalies as finding that immigrant PhDs will impose net costs on the federal government.

Tax revenues grow when more is produced, and lower production is the biggest cost of all from an overly restrictive immigration system. Workers allow businesses to increase production, supplying the needs of U.S. consumers. Children and the elderly tend to increase inflation, while workers tend to lower it. This is because children and retirees produce no consumer products but still buy them, while workers lower prices by increasing the production of consumer goods and services. As the U.S. labor force shrinks, this problem will become more acute, driving up costs for seniors and everyone else.

Immigrants can fill current labor shortages.

Throughout the current labor shortage, especially in 2021 and 2022, U.S. consumers were acutely aware of the interaction between workforce shortages and higher inflation every time they faced delays and higher prices at restaurants, retailers, and online. Currently, U.S. nonfarm employers have about 9 million open jobs, and over the last two and a half years, this number has averaged about 10 million. Every single month after January 2021 had more job openings than any month before it, back to the start of the job openings data series in the year 2000. Filling these jobs would have increased U.S. gross domestic product by about $2 trillion. This additional production of goods and services that consumers want is the reason that new workers reduce inflation, not because they lower wages. Of course, any individual worker benefits if they alone receive a monopoly over an area of business, but monopolies hurt everyone else, and when applied to the entire economy, this type of economic policy harms everyone, including those who receive “protection.”

Immigrants fill labor market niches across the skill spectrum.

The short‐ and long‐term labor shortfall is not primarily about a skills gap. Labor demand has increased and will increase across the skills spectrum. Everything from construction laborers to web developers has seen unprecedented increases in open jobs. Every single industry averaged more job openings in 2023 than in 2019—which was already at near‐record highs.

Construction has averaged 354,000 job openings per month in 2023 while manufacturing has averaged 650,000. A major project—funded partly by U.S. taxpayers—to build a new TSMC microchip manufacturing facility in Arizona is already being delayed because of a shortage of experienced workers in the construction trades. Leisure and hospitality averaged 1.4 million. Trade, transportation, and utilities had over 1.6 million. Education and health services were nearly 2 million.

In the long‐term, the Bureau of Labor Statistics predicts that most jobs created this decade will not require a college degree, and that nearly 70 percent of jobs in the economy will not require a college degree in 2030. Besides lifting the production of goods and services that U.S. consumers need, immigrant workers in these positions create new opportunities for U.S. workers in other less manually intensive jobs—typically ones that require English language abilities. Immigrants complement Americans. They don’t replace them. This is one reason why U.S. worker employment has almost always moved in the same direction as immigrant employment.

With 1 million new jobs, home health aides are projected to see the largest increase in employment of any single occupational category. These aides are critical to provide care for seniors, and they allow many older workers to keep working while caring for an ailing spouse. But without the workers to fill them, the growth in aides may not happen. America has even seen declines in employment in critical areas of elder care, despite record demand. Shockingly, for instance, the number of employees in skilled nursing care facilities has declined from 1.7 million to 1.4 million from 2011 to 2023.

Many nursing homes are closing because they cannot properly staff their operations—particularly in rural areas. In Minnesota alone, 45 facilities have closed. Another 60 have closed in Texas. There were 22 closures in Iowa in the last year alone. In Rhode Island, according to the American Health Care Association, nursing homes have lost 21 percent of their staff since 2019.²⁹ Five have already closed, and most are at risk of closing.

At open facilities, huge numbers of beds remain empty, with the vacancies nationwide reaching 32 percent. An analysis of nursing homes by researchers from Harvard, MIT, and Rochester showed that, “increased immigration significantly raises the staffing levels of nursing homes in the U.S., particularly in full‐time positions,” which results in better patient outcomes. The National Council of the State Boards of Nursing has found that 800,000 nurses plan to leave the labor force by 2027.

One reason why Americans are having fewer children is the cost of childcare. The cost of childcare directly reduces the growth in the future labor force and indirectly reduces the growth in the labor force by driving mothers to drop out of the labor force. A majority of mothers with young children are not looking for jobs solely because of childcare or family responsibilities. A staffing crisis has caused massive wait lists for care in states across the country. In Pennsylvania, 7,000 open positions have led to 32,500 kids waiting for care. It’s worse in Michigan, where nearly 54,000 kids are waiting.

Researchers Delia Furtado and Heinrich Hock have found that low‐skilled immigrants have “substantially reduced” the costs of having a child. Patricia Cortés and José Tessada similarly find, “low‐skilled immigration increases average hours of market work and the probability of working long hours of women at the top quartile of the wage distribution.” Allowing higher‐income women to work has important knock‐on fiscal and economic benefits because they have above‐average productivity.

New home construction—a critical component in family formation—has also suffered from too few workers. Construction employment has reached record highs, while construction unemployment is at near‐record lows. Construction industry wages are now higher than the average wage for workers generally.

The United States is also facing critical shortages of skilled workers. For physicians per capita, America ranks far behind Germany, Sweden, Australia, and Switzerland, and it has half the number of physicians per capita as Austria—effectively a difference of nearly 1 million physicians.

In rural areas, the shortages are dire. A study in the journal Health Affairs has shown that rural patients are far more likely to die because they lack the number of specialists to treat them effectively. This situation would be even worse if not for immigrants, who account for a quarter of all U.S. physicians.⁴⁴ Skilled science, technology, engineering, and math workers are also in short supply. There are about half a million open computer and mathematics jobs in the United States right now, and the unemployment rate for these jobs is at 2 percent. McKinsey estimates that chip manufacturers will be short 390,000 engineers and skilled technicians by 2030, leading to more production being set up offshore. In 2020, the Defense Department issued a report saying that the shortfall of computer workers “directly threatens U.S. national self‐determination in commerce and geopolitics.”

Since 2019, the Department of Labor has certified over 250,000 computer and mathematics jobs as unfillable by any U.S. worker, which is the first step of the employment‐based green card process. But most of these workers have entered the green card backlog, and the U.S. immigration system is so poorly designed that engineers from Venezuela have been entering at the U.S. border.

Immigrants can supercharge entrepreneurship and innovation.

As the U.S. population has aged, the entrepreneurship rate has declined. There has been a 40 percent decline in the rate of new business starts since the 1970s, and the rate of self‐employed entrepreneurs has likewise halved. Immigrants can counteract these drags on the economy. Immigrants are 80 percent more likely to start businesses than the U.S.-born population. Over 35 percent of new businesses have at least one immigrant founder, and they or their children founded 45 percent of Fortune 500 companies. Immigrants have founded the majority of businesses valued at more than $1 billion.

Immigrants also make up a disproportionate 28 percent of brick‐and‐mortar “main street” businesses nationwide. In many major metropolitan areas, immigrants account for about half of all main street businesses. Immigrants own astounding shares of small businesses in New York City: 90 percent of dry cleaning and laundry services, 84 of grocery stores, 75 percent of child daycares, and 69 percent of restaurants.⁵⁵

Immigrants are key to productivity growth and innovation. Immigrants have founded 65 percent of the leading U.S. artificial intelligence companies. Over 70 percent of $1 billion U.S. companies employ an immigrant in a key leadership position, such as CEO or chief technology officer. Immigrant‐founded companies are also much more likely to have patents. From 1950 to 2000, immigrants with science and engineering degrees had patent rates double the average rate. The best estimate indicates that about 40 percent of total factor productivity growth—growth not from increases in labor or capital—came from immigrant workers in science, technology, engineering, and math degrees.

U.S. law thwarts legal immigration.

Immigrants are more likely to work than U.S.-born workers overall and at every education level—a difference that grows significantly among the least skilled—and nearly 97 percent of immigrants who looked for jobs in 2022 found them. Immigrant adults without high school degrees are about 20 percentage points more likely to work than comparable U.S.-born adults. The issue is not that immigrants lack the desire to help America. Rather, the issue is that America’s immigration system prevents too many potential immigrants from being able to do so. To briefly review the main permanent immigration options available for immigrants abroad:

The Refugee Program: The population of displaced people reached 100 million last year, and the United States accepted barely 25,000 through its refugee program—0.1 percent.⁶²
Family‐sponsored: The capped family‐sponsored system has a backlog of over 8.3 million, and 1.6 million immigrants currently waiting will be dead before they can receive a green card.
Employer-sponsored: Employer‐sponsored green cards are capped at 140,000 annually and have a backlog of over 1.8 million. The country‐based caps mean that wait times for Indian workers with a master’s degree will be longer than the average lifespan. Employer‐sponsored green cards are close to impossible to obtain for those without very high wage offers and a work visa, and the main work visa—the H‑1B—is capped at 25 percent of demand. For those coming temporarily, the H‑2B seasonal worker program for nonagricultural jobs is the only path for most U.S. seasonal low‐skilled jobs, and it has an annual cap of 66,000. Although Congress temporarily doubled this cap year, that level was only about half the level required to meet the number of positions requested.
Diversity Lottery: The diversity green card lottery is available to immigrants only if they are notfrom legal immigrants’ main origin countries and have a high school degree or experience in a skilled job, and it offers entrants just a 0.2 percent chance of receiving a green card.

Note that there is no option for entrepreneurs. This high‐level review does not represent the complexity and restrictiveness of the system. The figure below details the legal requirements to immigrate to the United States in a flow chart. Many aspiring Americans are excluded with each section until nearly everyone loses their chance to immigrate. In 2023, about 34 million people entered a legal process to try to obtain a green card, and barely more than 1 million will receive legal permanent residence.

This massive disparity between green cards issued and green cards requested is a consequence of decades of unnecessarily low green card caps, leading millions to have no viable way to enter the U.S. legally. From 1848 to 1914, the annual number of people receiving green cards hit one percent of the U.S. population 22 times. It has never happened since the Immigration Act of 1924, and only once has it even hit half that rate, when Congress waived the caps on behalf of 3 million illegal immigrants in the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986. One percent of the U.S. population today would be nearly 3.4 million people. The number of green card recipients in 2022 was just 1 million.⁷⁰

Immigration policy is also restrictive compared to our peer nations. The United States went from accounting for the majority of the increase in the world immigrant population in the 1990s to accounting for just 7.5 percent of it from 2015 to 2020. This happened both because more immigrants went to other countries and because fewer immigrants went to the United States.

Less than 15 percent of the U.S. population was born outside the United States. This ranks 56th highest in the world. It ranks in the bottom third of wealthy countries in the world, and the gaps are massive. To catch up to Canada (21.4 percent), nearly 30 million immigrants would have to arrive this year. To reach the immigrant share in Australia (30.3 percent), the number grows to 76.4 million. To hit Hong Kong’s percentage (39.2 percent), it would have to exceed 140 million. These totals are unfathomable, but they illustrate how much flexibility the United States has when it comes to changing its immigration policy and remaining well within the norms for the wealthy world.

…Conclusion

The most important economic challenge facing the United States right now is the decline in population and labor force growth. Fewer workers mean less production, higher prices, and lower tax revenues. Immigrants stand ready to address this challenge. Congress should focus on increasing legal immigration and assuring that workers already in the country can fully and legally contribute to this country.

ZEE5 Global announces ‘Gadar 2’ starring Sunny Deol and Ameesha Patel

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Global, 4th October 2023: ZEE5 Global, the world’s largest streaming platform for South Asian content, announces the world digital premiere of the biggest Hindi blockbuster of the year, ‘Gadar 2’ today. After a successful theatrical run collecting 63M USD in India and still counting, Gadar 2 is set for another successful innings on ZEE5 Global on 6^th October. Produced by Zee Studios and directed by Anil Sharma, the superhit sequel to the 2001 hit ‘Gadar’ will see Sunny Deol, Ameesha Patel and Utkarsh Sharma reprise their roles as Tara Singh, Sakeena and Charanjeet “Jeete” Singh respectively.

‘Gadar 2’ is set for its World Digital Premiere on ZEE5 Global from 6^th October 2023!

Viewers can catch ZEE5 Global’s unmissable slate and stock up on their yearlong entertainment by subscribing to the Annual pack and grabbing the limited-time special offer price.

Users can download the ZEE5 Global app from Google Play Store / iOS App Store. It is available on Roku devices, Apple TVs, Android TVs, Amazon Fire TV and Samsung Smart TVs and on www.ZEE5.com

Tasveer Film Festival Presents 18th Edition Lineup, Bridging Cultures And Breaking Barriers Through Film

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterEntertainment 0

Tasveer South Asian Film Festival (TSAFF) is gearing up for its 18th edition from October 12 to 22, 2023, across multiple venues in Seattle, WA. This year, TSAFF achieves a momentous milestone as the first and only South Asian film festival whose winning films will qualify for submission to the esteemed Oscars. The significance of a South Asian film festival qualifying for the Oscars illustrates the importance of representation and inclusivity in media as it challenges historically limited narratives and promotes cross-cultural understanding.

With the theme of “Breaking Cinematic Barriers,” this year’s lineup unveils an impressive collection of 83 selected films spanning diverse genres and captivating themes. The carefully curated selection includes 23 features, 60 shorts, 20 documentaries, and 63 narratives; 25 World Premieres, 36 North America Premiere, with 33 Female identified directors. These films, presented in 26 languages, promise an unparalleled global cinematic journey reflecting the rich tapestry of South Asian stories.

Tasveer co-founder Rita Meher expressed her pride in the festival: “As the only Oscar-qualifying South Asian festival, we are committed to presenting a program of unparalleled depth and significance. Our festival winners can directly compete in the Academy Awards run, allowing authentic South Asian narratives to shine on the grandest stage, unfiltered and unmediated.”

The 18th Annual Tasveer Festival kicks off with in-person screenings from October 12th to 15th at premier venues, including the Paccar IMAX Theater at Pacific Science Center. The festival will continue in a virtual format on TasveerTV from October 16th to 22nd, offering audiences the flexibility to engage with the content from the comfort of their homes.

Film + Event Highlights:

Opening Night Film: The opening night will feature the gripping drama of “Munnel (Sand in Tamil)” from Sri Lanka. The film skillfully weaves together themes of love, loss, faith, and desperation that immerse us in the post-war landscape of Sri Lanka, where Rudran, an ex-Tamil militant, returns home in search of his vanished lover, Vaani. The film won a jury award at the 2023 International Film Festival Rotterdam (IFFR).

Centerpiece: “Pasang: In the Shadow of Everest” presents an inspiring tale from Nepal, chronicling the remarkable journey of mountaineer Pasang Lhamu Sherpa as she challenges racism, gender bias, and political opposition to become the first Nepali woman to conquer Mount Everest.

Washington State/Climate Change Film: “Between Earth and Sky” delves into the life of ecologist Nalini Nadkarni as she explores the effects of disturbance and recovery of rainforest canopies, with a special local focus on the Olympic National Park in Washington state.

LGBTQIA+ Focus: “Blue Sunshine” is a groundbreaking film by and about a Transgender woman, based on the real-life events of Samyuktha Vijayan, who wrote, directed, produced, and acted in it.

Tasveer Youth Collective Focus: “Alone Alone Alone on a Wide Wide Sea” is a creation, in collaboration with Tasveer, from NYU Tisch School of the Arts.

Documentary Focus: “Tortoise Under the Earth” presents an Indigenous Tribal Rights docu-feature, co-presented in collaboration with the University of Washington South Asia Center.

Local Focus: “Alien” poignantly portrays the struggles of Indian immigrants on H1B visas, exposing the dichotomy between America’s dependence on foreign talent and its treatment of these individuals.

Bangladeshi Film: “Pett Kata Shaw” breathes life into ancient South Asian folktales through a supernatural anthology, embracing the burgeoning popularity of the horror genre in contemporary Bengali films.

Closing Night Film: “Catfish,” World Premiere, explores themes of prohibiting queer love, longing, and loneliness in the digital age as a lonely office worker from Pakistan engages in a desperate online attempt at companionship.

Special Partnership: South Asian House proudly hosts a Happy Hour at Tasveer to celebrate the screening of three films produced and executive produced by co-founders Rohi Mirza Pandya (14 YEARS & EID MUBARAK) and Jitin Hingorani (CALL ME DANCER), featuring lead protagonist and dancer Manish Chauhan on Saturday, October 14, 2023 at PACCAR IMAX Theater. The Happy Hour will take place right after the CALL ME DANCER screening and will take place at The Masonry 20 Roy St, Seattle, WA 98109 from 5 to 7pm. More info at www.southasianhouse.com

2023 World Culture Festival: Preliminary Lineup Announced

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterCulture 0

The District of Columbia Mayor Muriel Bowser joined global humanitarian and peacemaker Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar, founder of the Art of Living, to announce the preliminary lineup for the 2023 World Culture Festival, to be held September 29 through October 1, 2023, on the historic National Mall in the U.S. capital.

The Honorable Mayor Muriel Bowser:”We are delighted to host the fourth-annual World Culture Festival. Washington, D.C. is the perfect city to bring people together from around the globe. We are a city that celebrates diversity and inclusivity, a global city, a welcoming city, and a city that loves visitors. We know that Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar’s message that ‘diversity is the beauty of creation’ aligns with our D.C. values. So, we invite people to plan their visits, and we’ll see you in the fall!”

The World Culture Festival, which has attracted millions in its previous iterations in Asia and Europe, will come to the United States for the first time ever for an epic celebration of global diversity, unity and peace:

#YOUnitedWeCelebrate: Gurudev and Mayor Bowser invited the public to join in on the world’s largest celebration of diversity and belongingness.
Bridging the Divide: Amidst increasing political and societal polarization, world leaders will come together to affirm a collective intention for unity and peace.
Social Connection: As the world grapples with epidemic loneliness, isolation, and mental health burden, the Festival’s attendees will experience the power of social connection.

Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar: “We need to bridge the gap. There is a lot of polarization in the world. The World Culture Festival is an occasion for people to come together and celebrate each other’s differences. It is the need of the hour, to bring people together in celebration and to spread the message of peace and to say that we are one human family.”

PRELIMINARY LINEUP:

Over 50 world leaders,including current and former heads of state, members of national parliaments and international governmental organizations, have already committed to attending the Festival, including:
E. Secretary General Ban Ki-moon, 8th Secretary General of the United Nations
E. Chan Santokhi, President of Suriname
E. Pravind Jugnauth, Prime Minister of Mauritius
E. Vicente Fox, Former President of Mexico
E. Federico Franco, Former President of Paraguay
E. Venkaiah Naidu, Former Vice President of India
E. Alojz Peterle, Former Prime Minister of Slovenia
E. Rosalía Arteaga Serrano, Former President of Ecuador
E. Kjell Magne-Bondevik, Former Prime Minister of Norway
Hildebrando Tapia, Former Member of Andean Parliament

Thousands of unique performers and artists will take part in the jam-packed entertainment lineup. All performers are based in the United States, representing the cultures and heritage of over 35 countries and counting. Performance groups include:

1,000+ Chinese Cultural Performers
1,000-Person Gospel Choir
500 Indian Classical Dancers
500-Person Global Dance Mashup
200 Hip-Hop Dancers
200 Ukrainian Dancers
200 Latin-American Dancers
100 Afghan Performers
100 Native American Performers

A global Faith Advisory councilis being convened in support of the World Culture Festival. The council, composed of leaders from faiths of the world, will share messages about common values of peace, harmony and partnership to nurture greater unity and togetherness. More details to come.

There will be a diverse international food festivalassociated with the event that is expected to attract thousands to sample international cuisines made by chefs from around the capital region. Over 50 ethnic food trucks are expected to be in a designated area along the National Mall.

There will be multiple pop-up cultural events throughout the District of Columbialeading up to the festival, including at least one in each of D.C.’s eight community wards. These pop-ups will be a chance for D.C. residents and visitors to preview and experience the celebration of culture and unity before the historic event from Sept. 29 to Oct. 1. Details and dates for all upcoming pop-ups will be announced soon.

The first D.C. pop-up is Saturday, May 20 at the picturesque Meridian Hill Park. The free pop-up is open to the public and will have music, dance, yoga and meditation. The afternoon’s highlight will be a live meditation conducted by Art of Living founder Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar. For more information, please visit tiny.cc/wcfpopup.

WCF’S EXPANSIVE SCOPE AND SCALE:

The World Culture Festival is expected to attract more than 150,000 visitors. This festival is expected to have an economic impact of over $30M in revenue.

The previous WCF in New Delhi, India, created a 45% increase in the GDP of the union territory of Delhi and contributed $300 million dollars to the economy of the union territory of Delhi.

As of mid-May, 45,000 people have already registered to attend the World Culture Festival, with 80 percent of registrants coming from the United States and 20 percent from abroad.

Of the US registrants, 27 percent come from the greater D.C. area, while the rest are from all corners of the country.

Thousands of hotel rooms have already been booked ahead of the Festival. As of mid-May, 2,180 hotel rooms have been booked at the various neighboring hotels in the area.

Festival grounds will span the entire National Mall and will be similar in size to presidential inaugurations. It is being designed to be the largest event in D.C. this year, based on the permit given by the U.S. National Park Service.

Hargrove is working as the event designer, bringing Gurudev’s vision to life across the National Mall. The Festival is a D.C. endeavor that has been in the works for the better part of a year.

There will be an expansive performer/speaker stage – with vast audience seating (over 12,000 seats) to watch the events unfold – in addition to a large portion of the Mall dedicated to various World Culture Festival Activations. The dance floor is expected to be over 32,000 sq ft and will provide over a football field’s worth of performance space.

RECEPTION COMMITTEE/ORGANIZING COMMITTEE MEMBERS

The Reception Committee is composed of high-level government officials lending their experience and expertise to the Festival. Full list of names are below.

Video testimonials from Hon. Danny Davis, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL); Hon. Andy Kim, Member of House of Representatives (D-NJ); Hon. Raja Krishnamoorthi, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL); Virginia State Senator Chap Petersen(D-Fairfax City); Hon. Michelle Steel, Member of House of Representatives (R-CA); Hon. Mike Quigley, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL) can be found here.

Reception Committee Members:

E. Ban Ki-moon, the eighth Secretary-General of the United Nations and Chair of the Reception Committee
E. Pravind Jugnauth, Prime Minister, Mauritius
E. Ratu Wiliame Katonivere, President, Fiji
E. Chan Santokhi, President, Suriname
E. Jacques Santer, Former President, European Commission and Former Prime Minister, Luxembourg
E. Erik Solheim, Former UN Under-Secretary-General and Executive Director of the UN Environmental Programme (UNEP) and Former Minister of International Development & Environment, Norway
E. Venkaiah Naidu, Former Vice President, India
E. Kjell Magne Bondevik, Former Prime Minister, Norway Founder and Executive Chair, The Oslo Center
E. Helen Clark, Former Prime Minister, New Zealand
E. Nambaryn Enkhbayar, Former President, Mongolia
E. Mark Eyskens, Former Prime Minister, Belgium
E. Vicente Fox, Former President, Mexico
E. Federico Franco, Former President, Paraguay
E. Mohamed Moncef Marzouki, Former President, Tunisia
E. Olusegun Obasanjo, Former President, Nigeria
E. Alojz Peterle, Former Prime Minister, Slovenia
E. Rosalia Arteaga Serrano, Former President, Ecuador and Executive Director, Fidal Foundation
E. Jigmi Yoser Thinkley, Former Prime Minister, Bhutan
E. Akie Abe, Former First Lady, Japan
H. Sheikh Mohammed bin Hamad bin Mohammed Al Sharqi, Crown Prince of Fujairah, United Arab Emirates
Ryszard Czarnecki, Former Vice President of the European Parliament, Poland
Prof. Herman De Croo, Minister of State, Honorary Speaker of the House, Honorary Mayor of Brakel, Belgium
Armin Laschet, Member of German Parliament and Vice President, Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Europe and Former Minister-President, North Rhine-Westphalia, Germany
Sumitra Mahajan, Former Speaker of the Lok Sabha, India
Nancy Pelosi, Former Speaker of the House of Representatives, United States of America
Right Honorable Sir Robert James Buckland KBE KC MP, Former Lord Chancellor and Wales Secretary, United Kingdom
Ted Baillieu, Former Premier of Victoria, Australia
Bruno Bruins, Former Minister for Medical Care, Netherlands
Raymond LaHood, Former U.S. Secretary of Transportation, United States of America
Hakubun Shimomura, Member of the House of Representatives and Former Minister of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology, Japan
Hildebrando Tapia, Former Vice President, Andean Parliament, Peru
Geoffrey Van Orden CBE, Former Leader of British Conservatives in the European Parliament, United Kingdom
Danny Davis, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL), United States of America
Mike Quigley, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL), United States of America
Bill Foster, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL), United States of America
Andy Barr, Member of House of Representatives (R-KY), United States of America
Richard Hudson, Member of House of Representatives (R-NC), United States of America
Marc Veasey, Member of House of Representatives (D-TX), United States of America
Ro Khanna, Member of House of Representatives (D-CA), United States of America
Raja Krishnamoorthi, Member of House of Representatives (D-IL), United States of America
Andy Kim, Member of House of Representatives (D-NJ), United States of America
Jake Auchincloss, Member of House of Representatives (D-MA), United States of America
Jerry Carl, Member of House of Representatives (R-AL), United States of America
Young Kim, Member of House of Representatives (R-CA), United States of America
Deborah Ross, Member of House of Representatives (D-NC), United States of America
Michelle Steel, Member of House of Representatives (R-CA), United States of America
Kevin Kiley, Member of House of Representatives (R-CA), United States of America
Laurel Lee, Member of House of Representatives (R-FL), United States of America
Rick McCormick, Member of House of Representatives (R-GA), United States of America
Shri Thanedar, Member of House of Representatives (D-MI), United States of America
Binod Chaudhary, Member of Parliament, Nepal and Chairman and President, The Chaudhary Group (CG)
Yvonne Feri, Member of Parliament, Switzerland
Dr. Nik Gugger, Member of the Parliament, Switzerland and Member of the European Parliament
His Highness Azzan Bin Qais Al Said, Vice Chairman, Oman National Olympic Committee, Oman

Organizing Committee Members:

The Organizing Committee contributes their leadership, experience, and counsel to build an unforgettable World Culture Festival IV.

Rob Trombold, President of Art of Living and Convener of World Culture Festival
Ann Luskey, Founder and Trustee, Charlotte’s Web Foundation
Binod Chaudhary, Member of Parliament of Nepal and Chairman and President of The Chaudhary Group (CG)
Chirag Patel, President and CEO, Amneal Pharmaceuticals
Courteney Monroe, President, National Geographic Global Television Networks
Francisco Sanchez, Former U.S. Under-Secretary of Commerce at the US Department of Commerce
Jo Leinen, Former Member of European Parliament
Luis Moreno Ocampo, Founding Prosecutor of International Court of Justice
Louis Gagnon, Founder and CEO of the Regenerative Group
Madhu Rao, Former CEO of Shangri-La Group
Manoj K. Jain, Founder and President of Mid-South Infectious Disease Associates
Mike Perlis, Vice Chairman of Forbes Media
E. Nirj Deva DL FRSA, President Envoy to Western Europe & Commonwealth of Nations for the Commonwealth Union and Former Vice President for International Development, European Parliament
Prem Jain, Co-Founder of Pensando Systems, now the Networking Solutions Group AMD Pensando
Randi Weingarten, President of the American Federation of Teachers
Ranvir Trehan, General Trustee, Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts
Reginald Van Lee, Partner and Chief Transformation Officer, Carlyle Group
Rodney Mims Cook Jr., President of the National Monuments Foundation
Ross Perot Jr., Chairman of the Perot Group
Sanjay Govil, Chairman, Infinite Computer Solutions
Sanjay Pradhan, CEO of Open Government Partnership
Sreenivas Reddy, MD, Vascular Interventional Radiologist
Tim Draper, Founder of Draper Associates, DFJ, and Draper Venture Network
Tim Ryan, Former Congressman D-OH13
Tonya Vidal Kinlow, Vice President of Community Engagement, Advocacy and Government Affairs at Children’s National Hospital and Chair of the Board of DC Chamber of Commerce
E. AMB. Vijay Nambiar, Former Chef-de-Cabinet of the United Nations & Special Ambassador to Myanmar
Vivek Paul, Adjunct Professor, Stanford University

TICKET INFORMATION

All World Culture Festival events are free and open to the public. All ages are encouraged to join. Registration and ticket information for the fall festival in Washington, D.C. can be found at www.worldculturefest.org. Please direct all inquiries to WCF2023@lindarothpr.com for further information.

PAST WORLD CULTURE FESTIVALS:

Bangalore (2006):2.5 million attendees, including 3,800 musicians and performers, 750 political and business leaders, alongside 1,000 spiritual and religious figures.

Berlin (2011): 70,000 attendees from 151 countries including 6,000 artists and dignitaries including ministers and members of parliament.

New Delhi (2016): 3.75 million attendees from 155 countries including 36,603 artists and 2,500 religious and spiritual leaders from Hindu, Buddhist, Jewish, Christian, Zoroastrian, Islamic, Jain, Native American, and Tribal faiths.

MEDIA ACCESS:

World Culture Festival 2023 welcomes press outlets from Washington, D.C. and around the world to cover the weekend’s festivities. We are happy to provide approved members of the media with exclusive access. Please check back soon as applications for media will be available this spring. Reach out to WCF2023@lindarothpr.com with any questions or for pre-event interview opportunities.

MEDIA RESOURCES:

World Culture Festival Compilation Video(Video Credit: Art of Living)
Brochure for World Culture Festival 2023
Past World Culture Festival Photos from 2016 and 2011(Photo Credit: Art of Living)
#WCF2023: Official Hashtag for World Culture Festival 2023

About Art of Living Foundation

Operating in 180 countries, The Art of Living Foundation (AOLF) is a nonprofit, educational and humanitarian organization founded in 1981 by the renowned humanitarian and spiritual leader Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar. All of AOLF’s programs are inspired by Gurudev’s philosophy of creating world peace through a stress-free and violence-free society. AOLF has touched over 800 million lives through numerous educational and self-development programs and tools that facilitate the elimination of stress and foster deep and profound inner peace, happiness and well-being for individuals.

About Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar

Gurudev Sri Sri Ravi Shankar is a global humanitarian, spiritual leader, and peace envoy. He has helped millions of people worldwide find peace and resilience in the face of adversity, learning not only how to excel in their own lives, but also how to become powerful agents for social change.

Gurudev has created trauma-relief and meditation programs for at-risk youth, war veterans, prisoners and survivors of disaster. He has also created numerous educational and self-development programs and tools that facilitate the elimination of stress and foster deep and profound inner peace, happiness and well-being for individuals.

Standing for the Gandhian principles of non-violence, Gurudev has mediated and progressed negotiations for peace in conflict-stricken areas such as Sri Lanka, Iraq, Venezuela, and Colombia, where he is credited for playing a central role in ending the violent 52-year conflict between FARC and the Colombian government. He has received 39 governmental awards, including the highest civilian awards from several nations. Twenty-four universities have awarded him with honorary doctorates for his peace-keeping and humanitarian efforts.

Global Wellness and Ayurvedic Products Company Sri Sri Tattva Announces In-Store and Website Launch in the United States

October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterHealth 0

(Newswire.com) –Sri Sri Tattva, a leading provider of premium health and wellness products, announced the in-store launch of its products in the United States. As part of a nationwide roll-out, the organic and natural Ayurvedic products are now available in stores in Dallas, Texas, including at all India Bazaar locations. The products are also now available online at SriSriTattva.com.

With a portfolio of over 350 products, all stores will carry a wide range of premium health products that include herbs, foods, drinks and cosmetics, including Sudanta, the fluoride-free toothpaste, Ojasvita, a herb-infused energy drink, and Chyawanprash. The India Bazaar West Plano location is hosting a launch party on September 28, open to the local communities.

“India has many ancient gifts to share with the world, from yoga to meditation, and now very prominently the science of Ayurveda is being recognized for its holistic healing. There is an increasing need for individuals to embrace a lifestyle that builds and strengthens immunity in order to enjoy a strong body, mind and spirit. Our products blend modern science with the ancient science and wisdom of Ayurveda to deliver pure and effective products,” says Ajay Tejasvi, President of Sri Sri Tattva. “We invite the local community to experience the goodness of all our Ayurvedic products.”

The Sri Sri Tattva Launch Party at India Bazaar West Plano will begin at 5 p.m. CST, September 28, and will offer free sample products, prizes and live musical performances. With a 360-degree approach to health, Sri Sri Tattva Ayurvedic practitioners (Vaidyas) will also be available for consultations to offer a complete health and wellness experience for the whole family.

About Sri Sri Tattva:

Sri Sri Tattva is a global health and wellness company with over 350 Ayurvedic, natural and organic products now available in 50+ countries. A portion of all proceeds goes to The Art of Living Foundation, whose wide-scale humanitarian initiatives have positively impacted the lives of over 375 million people globally.

What Is Next After Speaker Kevin McCarthy Is Ousted As Speaker?

October 5, 2023October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterUSA 0

The House of Representatives is entering uncharted territory after a far-right effort to remove fellow Republican Kevin McCarthy from the speakership succeeded thanks to support from Democrats.

A resolution — titled a motion to vacate — from Rep. Matt Gaetz, R-Fla., passed Tuesday with the support of eight Republicans and all the Democrats present and voting. The vote made McCarthy the first speaker in history to be removed from office, a bitter humiliation that came after less than nine months on the job.

The California Republican told his conference shortly after that he would not run for the job again. It is a stunning outcome in the House that shocked lawmakers of both parties and left them wondering what the future will bring.

Republican Rep. Patrick McHenry, now the acting speaker, declared the House in recess until both parties can decide on a path forward. There is no obvious successor to lead the House Republican majority now that McCarthy has opted not to run for the job again.

McHenry will be unable to bring legislation to the floor or take it off. He also does not have the power to issue subpoenas or sign off on any other official House business that would require the approval of the speaker.

WHAT HAPPENS NEXT?

The first order of business for McHenry would be to elect a new speaker.

As of now, it is unclear who House Republicans will nominate for the speakership. Some members left the chamber Tuesday determined to renominate McCarthy and vote for him for speaker until it passes. But now that he is out of the running, the path is clear for any Republican to jump in.

Some members, including Gaetz, have been broaching potential consensus candidates like Majority Leader Steve Scalise or Whip Tom Emmer who they see as bringing the conference together. Other names up for discussion include Rep. Kevin Hern, chair of the Republican Study Committee, and Rep. Jim Jordan, the chair of the House Judiciary Committee and a favorite of the right flank of the party.

Once Republicans decide who to nominate for speaker, the House would have to vote as many times as it takes for a candidate to receive the majority of those present and voting for speaker. It can quickly become an arduous exercise, as it did in January when it took McCarthy an unprecedented 15 rounds to win the gavel.

ANOTHER SPEAKER?

Once a speaker candidate has won a majority of the vote, the clerk will announce the results of the election.

During a normal speaker election, which takes place at the start of each Congress, a bipartisan committee, usually consisting of members from the home state of the chosen candidate, will then escort the speaker-elect to the chair on the dais where the oath of office is administered. The oath is identical to the one new members will take once a speaker is chosen.

It is unclear if that is the same process that will be followed in this instance. It is customary for the minority leader to join the successor at the speaker’s chair, where they will pass the gavel as a nod to the potential future working relationship between one party leader and another.

Indian American Kerala Cultural And Civic Center Announces Award Winners For 2023

October 5, 2023October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterCommunity 0

The Indian American Kerala Cultural and Civic Center will honor eight Indian Americans for their outstanding achievements in their field of specialization and for their service to the society at its 31st Annual Awards Banquet to be held on October 28, 2023. Government officials and leaders from the USA and India are expected to attend this prestigious event.

“The Kerala Center has been honoring outstanding achievers since 1992. Every year we invite nominations and the committee has to make a unanimous choice for a candidate in a category to receive the award and this year is no different from previous years in terms of their achievements,” said Dr. Thomas Abraham, Kerala Center’s Trustee Board Chairman and Award Committee Member.

“Kerala Center is very happy to honor American Malayalees who excel in their professions and who work for social progress — their examples should be an inspiration for others,” said Dr. Madhu Bhaskaran, Chairman of the Board and Award Committee. This year’s honorees include: Dr. Shyam Kottilil (Baltimore, MD) – Life Time Achievement Award; Sajeeb Koya (Pickering, Ontario, Canada) – Entrepreneurship; Dr. Anna George (Long Island, NY) – Nursing; Shelby Kutty (Baltimore, MD) – Medicine; Ajay Ghosh (Trumbull, CT) – Media and Journalism; Lata Menon (Mississauga, Ontario, Canada) – Legal Services; Jayant Kamicheril (Reading, PA) – Pravasi Malayalam Literature; and Gopala Pillai (Dallas, Texas) – Community Service.

The awardees will be honored at the Kerala Center’s 31st Annual Awards Banquet on Saturday, October 28, 2023 at 5:30 pm at the Kerala Center, 1824 Fairfax St., Elmont, New York. There will be variety entertainment programs and a fabulous dinner for the evening. Dr. Madhu Bhaskaran was the Award Committee Chairman and the other members were Dr. Thomas Abraham, Daisy P. Stephen and Varkey Abraham. Kerala Center President Alex K. Esthappan said that the Center has recognized over 170 American Malayalees in the last 31 years and it is great to see that they have continued to rise further in their careers and serve the society. All are invited to join this Annual Award Banquet honoring the awardees.

Please contact the Kerala Center to reserve your seats at: 516-358-2000 or at email: kc@keralacenterny.com. Please contact: Alex Esthappan, President at 516 503 9387, Thambi Thalappillil, Executive Director at 516 5519868, Raju Thomas, General Secretary at 516 434 0669.

Dr. Shyam Kottilil is a world renowned virologist and immunologist who has made pivotal contributions in the field of Hepatitis and HIV. He is currently the Interim Director of the Institute of Human Virology in Baltimore, MD, the first and foremost Virology Institute in the world. Dr. Kottilil has had an illustrious career with over 350 major publications, as well as awards and accolades from premier societies in Medicine, Infectious Diseases, Hepatology and the National Institutes of Health.

Sajeeb Koya, a North American Malayali, is the man behind the LED Façade lighting that lights up Burj Khalifa, the tallest building in the world. Sajeeb and his team are proud to be part of this project which owns 2 Guinness World Records. His company 3S International Inc., which has its headquarters at Pickering (Ontario, Canda), has executed numerous vibrant Architectural and Media Façade LED projects all over the world. People just see lights as utilitarian, whereas Sajeeb sees multitude of colors, shades, movements, and blends the beauty of light with technology.

Sajeeb Koya hailing from Trivandrum, is an Electrical Engineer graduated in 1987 from CET Trivandrum. He has held key positions with several Multi Nationals before starting his own business in Canada in 2001. He lives with his family at Pickering, Ontario, Canada. He is very active since childhood in the fields of photography, music and acting. He is currently involved in key positions with several community & charity organizations.

Dr. Shelby Kutty is a physician scientist and academic leader, serving as the Helen B. Taussig endowed professor and director of pediatric and congenital cardiology at the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine. He also chairs the analytic intelligence program at Johns Hopkins. One of the world’s preeminent experts on multimodality cardiovascular imaging with over 400 peer-reviewed publications, Dr. Kutty is passionate about patient outcomes and evidence-based assessment of new technologies.

Ajay Ghosh is the Chief Editor and Co-Publisher of The Universal News Network (www/theunn.com). He serves as the Media Coordinator for the American Association of Physicians of Indian Origin (AAPI) and ITServe Alliance. Ajay was the founding President of the Indo-American Press Club and is its Secretary, Board of Directors. Prior to coming to the United States, Ajay was the Chief Editor of The Voice Delhi and contributed articles to several national publications in India. In the United States, starting his journalistic career as a reporter in 1999 for India Post, he had worked as the New York Bureau Chief of Indian Reporter and World News, and worked as the New York Bureau Chief of India Tribune, a weekly newspaper published from Chicago. Ajay served as the Executive Editor of NRI Today and was the Bureau Chief of The Indian Express, North American Editions. Ajay has a Master’s Degree in Journalism from Marquette University, Milwaukee, WI and a Social Work Degree (MSW) from Delhi University.

An accomplished Barrister and Solicitor and active community member, Lata Menon has become a recognized name in the legal community in Ontario, as well as the Indian states of Maharashtra, Karnataka, and Kerala, where she practiced as a lawyer before immigrating to Canada. In addition to her professional activities as a lawyer, Lata devotes her time to the community at large and has become an active supporter and champion of women’s equality and rights. She is actively engaged in several social and community programs in her capacity as a Founder, Board Member, Secretary, Legal Advisor, and many other positions. As a professional, Lata has touched the lives of several of her clients who came to her in distress when faced with family discord, domestic violence, abuse, and family disputes, which she has influenced many of her clients to pull their lives together and persevere in the face of adversity. Lata’s achievements and success makes her a true leader, mentor, formidable force, influence, and inspiration to many.

Gopala Pillai has served as the President and Board Member of several organizations in CultureTexas and Detroit, and has been with the World Malayali Council from1995 as its Secretary, President and Chairman. Through these organizations he has been able to provide many services for the good of society. His life’s work reflects his unwavering commitment to both the local community in the USA and the betterment of the less privileged in Kerala, India. He has degrees in Economics, Journalism, and Computer Science, pursuing a successful career in Information Technology in the USA since 1975.

Sri Sri Ravi Shankar, Acharya Lokesh Muni Recognized by US Congress

October 5, 2023October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterCulture 0

Recognizing their contributions to world peace and harmony, the United States Congress has honored two Indian spiritual leaders, Sri Sri Ravi Shankar and Acharya Lokesh Muni.

A popular Indian Yoga guru, Sri Sri Ravi Shankar, founded the Art of Living Foundation, to improve the lives of people around the world through meditation and yoga. Acharya Lokesh Muni is a Jain spiritual leader and the founder of Ahimsa Vishwa Bharti, which aims to spread the message of peace, harmony, non-violence, and brotherhood in the world.

Highlighting Sri Sri Ravi Shankar’s work in the US House of Representatives, Indian American Congressman, Raja Krishnamoorthi said, “With his message of peace and commitment to education and humanitarianism, Gurudev has lived a life dedicated to the betterment of others.”

“Through his charity work and educational efforts, Gurudev has spread his belief that if individuals find inner peace, it can lead to real-world reductions in violence and conflict,” Krishnamoorthi said.

The Congressman also acknowledged Acharya Lokesh Muni’s dedication to promoting nonviolence, religious acceptance, and universal brotherhood, a cause for which he devoted the early years of his life.

“At a young age, Acharya Dr. Lokesh Muni committed himself to the study and teaching of Jainism, Buddhism, and Vedic philosophy,” Krishnamoorthi told the House. “He has dedicated himself to the promotion of peace and tolerance among different faith groups,” he added.

The Indian American leader further elaborated on Lokesh Muni’s efforts to quell communal and religious violence through the recently established World Peace Center in Gurugram, India and his organisation’s support in hosting several interfaith dialogues around the world.

Asian Americans Prioritize Presidential Candidates’ Policy Positions Over Their Racial Identity

October 5, 2023October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterUSA 0

Nearly all registered Asian American voters — 97 per cent — say a candidate’s policy positions are more important than their race or ethnicity when deciding whom to vote for, says a new survey.

At the same time, a 68 per cent majority of Asian registered voters say it is extremely or very important to have a national leader who can advance the concerns of the US Asian community, according to the Pew Research Center survey conducted from July 5, 2022 to January 27, 2023.

The findings assume relevance as the 2024 US presidential election approaches with two candidates of Indian ancestry, Nikki Haley and Vivek Ramaswamy, running for the Republican nomination.

The survey — conducted among 7,006 Asian adults living in the US — said Asian Americans continue to be underrepresented among elected officials in the country compared with their share of the country’s population.

As of the beginning of the 118th Congress, 16 House members and two senators claim Asian ancestry.

Asian registered voters tend to prefer the Democratic Party — 62 per cent are Democrats or lean Democratic, while 34 per cent are Republicans leaners.

Issues Asian American voters care most about

About four in 10 registered Asian American voters, or 41 per cent, say inflation is the most important issue facing their local community — by far the most common issue cited during this extended survey period, which ended in January.

Economic inequality (16 per cent) is the second-most mentioned issue, followed by violent crime (11 per cent) and racism (9 per cent).

These concerns follow reports of violence against Asian Americans during the Covid-19 pandemic.

Japanese registered voters (28 per cent) are more likely than Chinese (15 per cent) and Indian (13 per cent) voters to view economic inequality as the biggest issue facing their community.

Among Indian registered voters, 15 per cent say climate change is the most important issue facing their community. This is higher than the share saying the same among Filipino (7 per cent), Chinese (6 per cent), Japanese (6 per cent) and Vietnamese (5 per cent) voters.

Asian American voters’ views differ by political party

The survey noted that Asian Republican voters are more likely than their Democratic counterparts to view inflation as the most important issue facing the community they live in.

Even so, it is the most cited top issue for both groups.

Asian Democratic voters are more than twice as likely as Republicans to say economic inequality is the biggest issue facing their community.

Economic inequality is the second-most cited issue among Asian Democratic voters.

Among Asian Republican voters, violent crime is the second-most cited issue.

In addition, Asian registered voters born in the US are slightly more likely than immigrants to view economic inequality as the most important issue facing their community.

However, the importance of issues varies less by nativity than by party among Asian Americans. (IANS)

Anxiety grips 69% of Indian students in Canada due to diplomatic row

77 per cent of students who participated in the survey said their parents are “paranoid” or “worried” amid the Indo-Canadian diplomatic row.

Over 100+ Indian students studying across 20+ colleges and universities were surveyed for a recent report, the findings of which say 69 per cent of these students have experienced anxiety amid the ongoing Indo-Canadian diplomatic row.

The participating colleges included York University, Seneca College, Ryerson University, Centennial College, George Brown College, and Carleton University, among others. The survey was conducted by LooneyTooney, a platform assisting newcomers and potential immigrants in Canada to provide a data point to stakeholders like federal/provincial governments, colleges/universities, and locals to be able to take action to reassure the student community, as per a news release.

The survey found that 69 per cent of students experienced anxiety amid the ongoing tensions between the two countries, female students more than males. The anxiety levels were higher among students who have not spent much time in Canada than those who have been in the country longer.

The findings say 32 per cent of students are more worried about their physical safety than before while 77 per cent of students reported their parents are “paranoid” or “worried”. However, the survey also found that overall, students seem to be hoping that the ongoing situation is a temporary setback. 81 per cent of Indian students in Canada have their long-term plans of staying in Canada unchanged while only 9 per cent are considering leaving the country.

LooneyTooney founder Ashish Bhatia said, “Indian students in Canada are a vital bridge for people-to-people contact between the two countries. The students are worried about the short-term implications of the spat on their career and personal plans. Their well-being should be a paramount concern for various stakeholders who should take actions to mitigate the negative impact of current tensions.”

Indian students from the University of Toronto (UofT) participated in the survey as well. Recently, stated that it is fully committed to making the Indian community on its campus feel safe.

“U of T is proud to be home to more than 2,400 international students from India who enrich our classrooms and campus life, and many more students, faculty, staff, librarians, and alumni with ties to that country. We want to assure all impacted members of our community – and in particular international students – that you are welcome here and we are deeply committed to supporting your wellbeing,” read a part of the statement from Joseph Wong, vice-president, International.

In Hindu Heritage Month, Hindu Americans Seek To Educate The Public — And Themselves

October 5, 2023October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterReligion 0

(RNS) For Hindu Heritage Month this year, Hindus want to highlight their faith for external audiences, but also grow broader awareness amongst Hindus themselves.

When Hindu Heritage Month was held for the first time two years ago, its organizers hoped to educate their fellow Americans about the contributions Hindus have made in the world. Most could name yoga as a Hindu influence; some might bring up the holistic health practices of ayurveda. But since ancient times, Hindus have been pioneers in astronomy, architecture, mathematics and numerous other fields.

“We have so much to be proud about, and we’ve been very modest in keeping it to ourselves,” said Ramya Ramakrishnan, community outreach director for the Hindu American Foundation, one of the sponsors of the month’s activities. “This is the way to tell people: ‘Look at what our faith has accomplished.’”

Now, the organizers of this third Hindu Heritage Month hope their movement will educate not only the wider public, but Hindu Americans themselves, about their faith’s growing profile in the United States.

“Thirty-five years ago, we didn’t have these organizations and institutions,” said author Rajiv Malhotra at the kickoff event for this year’s program, held in Monroe Township, New Jersey. The leaders of those that existed “were scared,” he said, “and stayed within the temples, but not out there the way we are today.”

Vijay Satnarine, the director of education strategy for the Hindu American Foundation, said that there is work to be done within the Hindu community. Even today, many Hindus’ knowledge of their faith remains at a “high-school level,” he said, adding that Hindus in positions of power do not always bring the fullness of their culture or heritage to their professions.

For decades, some Hindu Americans have blamed the U.S. education system, which has given short shrift to Hinduism’s legacy in world thought. At the same time, critics say, American educators restrict their discussions of Hinduism and Hindu culture to polytheism, caste hierarchy and arranged marriages, misleading not only outsiders but practitioners themselves.

“This very constricted education has left us unable to talk about our own diversity,” said Satnarine.

But the emergence of India, the birthplace of Hinduism, as a nascent superpower has begun to change how the world thinks about the country and the faith. The inaugural event included the reading of a written statement from Prime Minister Narendra Modi of India. “The rise of Indians and Indian diaspora in diverse fields, from space to sports, trade to technology, has created an immense interest in India, its people and its culture,” it said.

The month’s organizers want people to know that Hindus and Indians are not synonymous. Instead, the month is meant to highlight the global Hindu community, which extends from Indonesia to Kenya to the Caribbean and is rooted in a shared value of universal oneness.

The Hindu American Foundation has been marking Hindu American Awareness Appreciation Month since 2013 to recognize the specific contributions of the Hindu American diaspora, such as temples built on American land or the first Hindu members of Congress.

But the increasing attention to Hinduism in the past few years prompted a small group of Hindus to found the current initiative two years ago, aiming to rewrite a narrative centered on the caste system, Hindu nationalism and idol worship.

“We need to bring our cultural values, our mantras, or beautiful bindis and tilaks and colors to the world and be known for all of the good things that Hinduism has to offer,” said Richa Gautam, a member of the HHM core committee.

Despite its beginnings in the depths of the pandemic, the effort has taken off. Last year, about 100 proclamations in cities and school boards across the nation were issued. Virginia became the first and only state to sign a bill making October Hindu Heritage Month in perpetuity. And in 2023, the states of Georgia, Wisconsin, Ohio, Pennsylvania and New Jersey proclaimed the month Hindu Heritage Month.

This year, the organizers are emphasizing Hindus’ involvement in American life, hoping to dispel the view of Hinduism as a mystical, inward-looking faith.

“Hindu Americans have been very good citizens, enriching the tapestry through our cultural heritage and our universal Sanatan values,” said Gautam. “If we build awareness, there won’t be that exotic element that exists for us.”

Part of that task is to counter academics, even those in departments of religious studies, who have approached the faith from a Western, often Protestant Christian, paradigm of what “religion” means, advocates say.

Educational efforts like the Hindu American Foundation’s “Dharma Ambassadors” training program, which allows for Hindus to promote a streamlined narrative of the faith, or the accredited Hindu University of America, which offers courses on everything from Hindu feminism to advanced Sanskrit, strive to combat just that.

“A lot of our students, even though they were born and brought up as Hindus, they still have a very basic, partial, even sometimes erroneous knowledge about Hindu traditions,” said Aravind Swami, the vice president of operations for HUA. “When our students have discussions with anyone in the Hindu community, they’re able to speak with a greater sense of confidence and purpose.”

Jai Bansal, vice president of education for the World Hindu Council of America and one of the main organizers of Hindu Heritage Month, said the most valuable aspect of the initiative is to make all Americans recognize the Hindu values, from nonviolence to karma, as part of their history and their everyday lives. That, he said, is a job for all Hindus.

“One of the fundamental beliefs in our dharma is that ignorance is the root cause of all problems,” said Bansal. “It’s up to community leaders to try and distill our dharma in a form that modern society can easily digest.”

Bansal believes Hindu Heritage Month is a way to rally the global Hindu community, diverse as it is, to that task.

“If we continue with it, just think of someday 1 billion Hindus around the world celebrating their common heritage together — what kind of a message that will send to the world at large,” he said. “I’m just hoping for that day, whether I see it myself, or the next generation sees it.”

Indo American Press Club announces Lifetime Achievement Awards.

October 5, 2023October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterMedia 0

IAPC is celebrating its Tenth Anniversary and the Ninth International Media Conference at Hilton Stamford Convention Center, Connecticut during Oct 7-9th, 2023.

The prestigious Lifetime Achievement Award Winners will be recognized during the gala closing event commencing at 6:00 P M on Sunday 8th, October 2023.

VINAY MAHAJAN (Entrepreneurial Excellence)

Vinay Mahajan, the current national President of ITServeAlliance Inc., an association of 2100 + SME US IT companies. Has been chosen to receive the Lifetime Achievement Award by the Indo-American Press Club.

An Engineering Graduate and MBA from premier institutes, Mahajan is a serial entrepreneur with over 40 years of industry experience in leadership, marketing, finance, and engineering, creating, and building multiple entities. Entrepreneurial expertise through 100+ communication/IVR/Call center software projects across India and Healthcare Practice Management Software in the United States.

Dr. H.R.SHAH (Media & Arts)

Padma Shri Dr. H.R. Shah, Chairman & CEO of TV Asia Group, the first Non- Resident Indian to operate and telecast a 24/7 TV Channel, TV ASIA, coast-to-coast throughout North America since 1993,

Dr. Shah immigrated to the United States on March 21, 1970. A successful businessperson and media leader, Dr. Shah has worked relentlessly and tirelessly, contributing generously of his time, energy, and resources as a pillar for the Indian American community. He has been a major philanthropic supporter and has strongly supported many worthy causes across the US and India.

For his exemplary work in the media and arts, the Indian Government bestowed him with the Padma Shri in 2017. He is also the recipient of the prestigious Ellis Island Medal of Honor.

IAPC proudly bestows Dr. H R Shah with the prestigious Lifetime Achievement Award.

MEERA GANDHI (Philanthropist)

Meera Gandhi has lived many roles in her life as a philanthropist, a mother, a businesswoman, a television show host, an author, and a spiritual yogi who believes that we are very much a part of the universal spirit. We all must live in the flow of the ether that guides and propels us through our life journey!

She is a recipient of the Ellis Island Medal of Honor (2015), Marc Anthony Maestro Cares Humanitarian Award (2016), Children Hope Humanitarian Award (2013) and many more. Meera Gandhi established The Giving Back Foundation in 2010. By supporting education, mental health, and wellness, tackling malnutrition and illness, and addressing the causes of poverty, we can empower and uplift people to be the agents of change in this process.

Dr. SAMPAT SHIVANGI (Philanthropist)

Dr. Sampat Shivangi, a physician, an influential Indian American community leader, and a veteran leader of the American Association of Physicians of Indian Origin (AAPI), has been chosen to receive the prestigious Lifetime Achievement Award by the Indo-American Press Club.

Dr. Sampat Shivangi was awarded the highest civilian honor, the Pravasi Bharatiya Diwas Sanman Award, in 2016 in Bengaluru by the Hon. President of India, Shri Pranab Mukherjee. He was awarded the prestigious Ellis Island Medal of Honor in New York 2008.

Dr. Shivangi, for Community Service, Medicine, and philanthropy, IAPC herewith proudly presents its prestigious Lifetime Achievement Award.

SHAJAN SKARIAH (Excellence in Journalism)

Shajan Skariah, promoter and editor of the online portal “Marunadan Malayali” has been nominated for the Excellence in Media Award by the Indo-American Press Club (IAPC).

His courageous actions of being the mouthpiece of the public have resulted in the confiscation of his newspaper, his arrest, and his exile from the country. As part of the media world at IAPC, we consider that it is our legal and moral duty to support Shajan Skariah and his news media platforms.

Dr. RENU ABRAHAM VARUGHESE (Excellence in Elder Care)

Dr. Renu Abraham Varughese is an Associate Professor at the School of Health and Natural Sciences, Mercy University, NY. She is the founder and director of the Travancore Foundation Education and Research Center on Aging (TFERCA). She is the Recipient of the Founders Excellence Award (2022)- Association for Senior Living India (ASLI) for exemplary contributions to the senior care sector in the country.

And for her many accomplishments in Exemplary service, Visionary leadership, dedication, commitment, and innovation to promote quality care for elders and the eldercare industry in India, IAPC is proudly recognizing Dr. Renu Abraham Varughese with IAPC SATHSEVANA AWARD 2023.

IAPC was formed to unite the media groups and the Indian diaspora media fraternity across North America under one umbrella to work together, support one another, and provide a unified voice to the mainstream media world and the larger community. Every year IAPC hosts similar media conferences bringing together renowned journalists and media professionals from different countries, and hosts workshops and seminars.

Government Shutdown Averted With 45 Days Stopgap-Funding Bill Passage

October 2, 2023October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterUSA 0

The U.S. Congress passed a stopgap funding bill late on Saturday, September 30, 2023 with overwhelming Democratic support after Republican House Speaker Kevin McCarthy backed down from an earlier demand by his party’s hardliners for a partisan bill.

House Speaker Kevin McCarthy announced the stopgap proposal Saturday morning, a move that came after weeks of infighting among House Republicans and a failed effort to pass a GOP stopgap bill in the chamber. The bill passed the House with an overwhelmingly bipartisan vote, and it then was sent to the Senate. The final vote was 88 to 9. The House voted 335-91 to fund the government through Nov. 17, with more Democrats than Republicans supporting it.

The bill will keep the government open through November 17 and includes natural disaster aid but not additional funding for Ukraine or border security. The Bill will help avoid the federal government’s fourth partial shutdown in a decade, sending the bill to President Joe Biden, who signed it into law before the 12:01 a.m on Octpber 1^st, 2023.

McCarthy abandoned party hardliners’ insistence that any bill pass the House with only Republican votes, a change that could cause one of his far-right members to try to oust him from his leadership role.

That move marked a profound shift from earlier in the week, when a shutdown looked all but inevitable. A shutdown would mean that most of the government’s 4 million employees would not get paid – whether they were working or not – and also would shutter a range of federal services, from National Parks to financial regulators.

The decision by McCarthy to put a bill on the floor that would win support from Democrats could put his speakership at risk as hardline conservatives continue to threaten a vote to oust him from the top House leadership post.

McCarthy was defiant after the vote, daring his detractors to try to push him out as he argued he did what was needed to govern effectively.

“If somebody wants to make a motion against me, bring it,” McCarthy told CNN’s Manu Raju at a news conference. “There has to be an adult in the room. I am going to govern with what’s best for this country.”

Federal agencies had already drawn up detailed plans that spell out what services would continue, such as airport screening and border patrols, and what must shut down, including scientific research and nutrition aid to 7 million poor mothers.

“The American people can breathe a sigh of relief: there will be no government shutdown tonight,” Democratic Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer said after the vote. “Democrats have said from the start that the only solution for avoiding a shutdown is bipartisanship, and we are glad Speaker McCarthy has finally heeded our message.”

DEMOCRATS CALL IT A WIN

Some 209 Democrats supported the bill, far more than the 126 Republicans who did so, and Democrats described the result as a win.

“Extreme MAGA Republicans have lost, the American people have won,” top House Democrat Hakeem Jeffries told reporters ahead of the vote, referring to the “Make America Great Again” slogan used by former President Donald Trump and many hardline Republicans.

Democratic Representative Don Beyer said: “I am relieved that Speaker McCarthy folded and finally allowed a bipartisan vote at the 11th hour on legislation to stop Republicans’ rush to a disastrous shutdown.”

McCarthy’s shift won the support of top Senate Republican Mitch McConnell, who had backed a similar measure that was moving through the Senate with broad bipartisan support, even though the House version dropped aid for Ukraine.

Democratic Senator Michael Bennett held the bill up for several hours trying to negotiate a deal for further Ukraine aid.

“While I would have preferred to pass a bill now with additional assistance for Ukraine, which has bipartisan support in both the House and Senate, it is easier to help Ukraine with the government open than if it were closed,” Democratic Senator Chris Van Hollen said in a statement.

McCarthy dismissed concerns that hardline Republicans could try to oust him as leader.

“I want to be the adult in the room, go ahead and try,” McCarthy told reporters. “And you know what? If I have to risk my job for standing up for the American public, I will do that.”

He said that House Republicans would push ahead with plans to pass more funding bills that would cut spending and include other conservative priorities, such as tighter border controls.

CREDIT CONCERNS

The standoff comes just months after Congress brought the federal government to the brink of defaulting on its $31.4 trillion debt. The drama has raised worries on Wall Street, where the Moody’s ratings agency has warned it could damage U.S. creditworthiness.

Congress typically passes stopgap spending bills to buy more time to negotiate the detailed legislation that sets funding for federal programs.

This year, a group of Republicans has blocked action in the House as they have pressed to tighten immigration and cut spending below levels agreed to in the debt-ceiling standoff in the spring.

The McCarthy-Biden deal that avoided default set a limit of $1.59 trillion in discretionary spending in fiscal 2024. House Republicans are demanding a further $120 billion in cuts.

The funding fight focuses on a relatively small slice of the $6.4 trillion U.S. budget for this fiscal year. Lawmakers are not considering cuts to popular benefit programs such as Social Security and Medicare.

“We should never have been in this position in the first place. Just a few months ago, Speaker McCarthy and I reached a budget agreement to avoid precisely this type of manufactured crisis,” Biden said in a statement after the vote. “House Republicans tried to walk away from that deal by demanding drastic cuts that would have been devastating for millions of Americans. They failed.” (Reuters)

Dianne Feinstein, ‘A Trailblazer In Every Sense Of That Word’

October 2, 2023October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterUSA 0

The United States Senate has mourned the loss of one of its most prominent figures, as Senator Dianne Feinstein (D-Calif.) passed away at her residence in Washington, D.C. at the age of 90. Her death marks the conclusion of a lengthy and illustrious political career that played a crucial role in paving the way for women to attain higher echelons of political authority in the United States.

Senator Feinstein passed away on Thursday night, September 28, 2023 at the age of 90, shortly after casting her final vote, a moment that senators commemorated with heartfelt speeches. Emotions ran high as several senators, standing just a few feet from Feinstein’s Senate desk, which was draped in black and adorned with a crystal vase filled with white flowers, spoke about their esteemed colleague.

Senate Majority Leader Charles Schumer (D-N.Y.) paid tribute to her, saying, “She was smart, she was strong, she was brave, she was compassionate,” his voice occasionally quivering with emotion. He emphasized her “integrity” as the standout quality, describing it as a “diamond” that shone brightly not only in the Senate but also across the nation.

Throughout her career, Senator Feinstein shattered glass ceilings. She was the first woman to represent California in the Senate, the first woman to chair the Senate Judiciary, Rules, and Intelligence Committees, and the first woman to serve as mayor of San Francisco. She was part of the historic 1992 class of women elected to the Senate, often referred to as the “Year of the Woman,” alongside Senators Patty Murray (D-Wash.), Barbara Boxer (D-Calif.), and Carol Moseley-Braun (D-Ill.), which increased the number of women in the Senate from two to six. This number later surged to 25 by the start of the 118th Congress, with Feinstein cited as a significant influence.

Senator Tammy Baldwin (D-Wis.) praised Feinstein as a role model and highlighted her ability to foster bipartisan relationships, especially among female senators, both on and off Capitol Hill.

Feinstein also achieved the distinction of being the longest-serving woman in Senate history at the time of her passing, being likened to titanic figures of the Senate such as Senators Ted Kennedy (D-Mass.) and John McCain (R-Ariz.).

One of her most notable legislative accomplishments was the passage of the 1994 Federal Assault Weapons Ban, signed into law by then-President Bill Clinton. This legislation prohibited the sale and manufacture of assault-style weapons for a decade, despite fierce opposition from the National Rifle Association (NRA). Schumer recalled the NRA’s relentless opposition but praised Feinstein for her unwavering stance against them.

While the ban expired in 2004, a 2020 academic study suggested that the number of mass shootings increased after its lapse. However, the effectiveness of the assault weapons ban remains a subject of contentious debate, and subsequent attempts to pass similar legislation failed, even in the wake of high-profile shootings involving AR-15-style weapons.

Senator Feinstein also played a pivotal role in opposing the U.S. government’s use of torture during the global war on terror that followed the September 11, 2001, attacks. In 2014, she released the Intelligence Committee’s report, which documented the use of “enhanced interrogation techniques” against detainees, including waterboarding and sleep deprivation. This report raised doubts about the effectiveness of such tactics in gathering intelligence.

Senator Sheldon Whitehouse (D-R.I.) recounted the intense struggle to complete the report, as it faced opposition from the Central Intelligence Agency. Feinstein’s stand against torture techniques earned her praise, with Senator Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.) commending her for her courage.

Feinstein wasn’t afraid to deviate from her party’s leaders on occasion. In 2009, she broke with party leaders who hesitated to seat Roland Burris (D-Ill.) as Senator Barack Obama’s replacement due to ethical concerns surrounding then-Illinois Governor Rod Blagojevich’s handling of the appointment. Feinstein argued that refusing to seat Burris would undermine gubernatorial power, a position that may have played a role in preserving California Governor Gavin Newsom’s authority to appoint her successor.

Throughout her career, Feinstein’s tenacity in pursuing policy goals and her ability to withstand political challenges earned her the nickname “Ali and Frazier” alongside Senator Barbara Boxer. Her personal touch and ability to foster camaraderie were also celebrated, with colleagues recalling warm interactions and gestures of kindness, such as ordering a purse for a fellow senator.

Senator Feinstein’s passing marks the end of an era in the Senate, leaving behind a legacy of trailblazing accomplishments and a commitment to integrity and principled leadership that will be remembered for generations to come.

Mark Milley Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Retires

October 2, 2023October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterUSA 0

Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Mark Milley, retired on Friday with a passionate address that indirectly criticized former President Trump, asserting that the U.S. military’s allegiance isn’t pledged to a “wannabe dictator.”

In the previous week, Trump had accused Milley of “treason” for allegedly conducting back-channel reassurances with his Chinese counterpart towards the end of his tenure, even suggesting the Army general should face execution.

Milley delivered his remarks at a ceremony in Virginia, stating, “We are unique among the world’s militaries. We don’t take an oath to a country. We don’t take an oath to a tribe. We don’t take an oath to a religion. We don’t take an oath to a king, or a queen, or to a tyrant or a dictator.”

He continued, “And we don’t take an oath to a wannabe dictator. We don’t take an oath to an individual. We take an oath to the Constitution, and we take an oath to the idea that is America — and we’re willing to die to protect it.”

Appointed by Trump in 2018, Milley frequently found himself at odds with the former president, notably in the incident involving St. John’s Church in Washington, D.C., during the racial injustice protests ignited by George Floyd’s murder in June 2020.

Milley briefly appeared alongside Trump, wearing combat fatigues, as Trump walked to St. John’s for a photo opportunity. Later, the four-star general publicly apologized for creating the perception that the military was involved in domestic politics, expressing regret for his presence — a move that didn’t sit well with Trump.

During that same summer, Milley supported the initiative to rename Army bases bearing the names of Confederate generals, a position that clashed with Trump’s views.

In the run-up to the 2020 presidential election, Milley sought to ensure a peaceful transition of power when he assured his Chinese counterpart that the American government had no intentions of initiating hostilities, as documented in the book “Peril” by Bob Woodward and Robert Costa.

Following the election, with concerns of a potential coup by Trump, Milley instructed his subordinates not to follow orders from anyone unless he was involved, as reported in “Peril.”

While Trump was not directly mentioned during Friday’s ceremony at Joint Base-Myer Henderson Hall, the speakers lavished praise on Milley for his over four decades of service to the country in the military.

President Biden commended Milley’s invaluable partnership, describing him as “unwavering in the face of danger.” Biden recounted an incident where Milley had run across a bridge laden with mines to prevent two battle tanks from crossing with wounded troops.

Defense Secretary Lloyd Austin referred to Milley as both a scholar and a warrior, emphasizing his dedication to leading the joint military forces.

The ceremony also featured the swearing-in of the incoming Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Gen. Charles Q. Brown Jr., formerly the Air Force chief of staff.

The Largest Hindu Temple On American Opens Its Doors

October 2, 2023October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterCulture, Religion 0

After a lengthy period of planning and construction spanning 12 years, the grandest Hindu temple outside of India is poised to open its doors to the public in October. The BAPS Akshardham, located in Robbinsville, New Jersey, will be the third of its kind, following the temples in Gujarat and New Delhi, with the latter being recognized as the largest Hindu temple complex globally.

This architectural marvel, known as Akshardham, which translates to the “abode of the Divine,” is a testament to the harmonious blend of ancient scriptural principles and the intricacies of New Jersey zoning regulations. Sprawling across a vast 183-acre expanse, the New Jersey Akshardham includes a Maha Mandir (main temple), a traditional temple, a welcome center, a museum, and an event space.

Chaitali Inamdar, a devoted member of the Hindu community, expressed the significance of this achievement: “Having this Akshardham here on American soil is not just the triumph of a community or the triumph of the diaspora — it is the triumph of the nation.”

The construction of the New Jersey Akshardham has garnered significant attention from the Hindu American community over the past decade. However, it has also been marred by legal matters, specifically a lawsuit alleging forced labor within the BAPS organization, which arose in 2021. Although the lawsuit is currently on hold, it has raised important questions about distinguishing between unpaid work and selfless service in the name of the Divine.

Members of the BAPS community are renowned for their commitment to selfless service, known as “seva,” which they consider an act of devotion to God. Through their seva, BAPS has established an impressive network of 100 temples across the United States. Furthermore, the sampradaya, or Hindu sect, is poised to celebrate its 50th anniversary in North America next year.

Bochasanwasi Shri Akshar Purushottam Swaminarayan Sanstha, commonly referred to as BAPS, is a Hindu tradition that follows the teachings of Bhagwan Swaminarayan. According to their beliefs, Bhagwan Swaminarayan is present on Earth through six spiritual leaders, with Mahant Swami Maharaj currently holding this role.

Devotees explain that Pramukh Swami Maharaj, the fifth spiritual successor, envisioned the creation of a magnificent spiritual campus in the United States when he assumed leadership of BAPS in 1971. Inamdar, a chemical engineer and BAPS member, stated, “Pramukh Swami Maharaj’s ultimate singular vision [was] that, no matter which belief, which background you come from, this place is here to enrich everybody and allow everybody to feel peace and inspiration. The Akshardham is truly allowing the world to be one family.”

Visitors to the New Jersey Akshardham will enter through the Nilkanth Plaza, named after Swaminarayan’s teenage form, Nilkanth Varni, who is said to have traveled across India to revive the principles of Sanātana Dharma, or Hinduism. Dominating the entrance is a towering 49-foot statue of Nilkanth Varni, representing his 49 years on Earth.

The Welcome Center, which connects to the vegetarian Shayona Cafe, immerses visitors in Indian celebrations and artistry. Thousands of “diyas” (lights) adorn the walls, creating a vibrant atmosphere. The scent of incense and the resonance of Sanskrit chants fill the air around the Brahm Kund pond, paying homage to the sacred waters of India. Remarkably, waters from rivers spanning all 50 states have been brought to New Jersey by dedicated volunteers.

Over 12,500 volunteers from diverse cultural backgrounds and faiths came together from across North America and the world to construct the Maha Mandir. This remarkable structure was meticulously crafted from white sandstone, limestone, marble, and granite by temple artisans in India. Adorning the four characteristic domes of the Mandir are nine shikharas or spires, each themed to represent different aspects of Hindu scriptures, including Vedic astrology.

Within the Mandir entrance, statues of dancers, musicians, and musical instruments serve as reminders of the importance of song and dance in Hindu traditions. Notably, this will be the first structure to showcase all 108 poses of the ancient Hindu dance form Bharatanatyam.

Some volunteers dedicated up to two weeks to this monumental project, while others, like 27-year-old Arjun Pandya, felt compelled to stay for two years. Pandya temporarily paused his career in corporate finance at Amazon to undertake seva in Robbinsville. Reflecting on his experience, Pandya said, “To have an opportunity to build something not only for my family and my community, but for the world, and to make something greater than myself, was very attractive.” He acknowledged that the conclusion of this journey is bittersweet, but the invaluable lessons and friendships he’s gained will remain with him forever.

Pandya eloquently summarized his experience: “I thought I’d be giving time, but I’m now realizing how much I’ve gained, not only in the friendships that I’ve built, but the values that are foundational to me that I’ll take with me forever.”

Bhagwan Swaminarayan’s teachings, according to devotees, emphasize values such as humility, compassion, and harmony. Akshardham will serve as not only a residence for the Swamis of the BAPS faith but also a sanctuary for the deities venerated across the broader Hindu spectrum.

Yagnesh Patel, a devotee originally from Kenya, where the BAPS community grew due to Indian migration patterns during British colonial rule, expressed his thoughts. “Any practicing Hindu, anyone who wants to know more about Hinduism, or even just a friend in my community, I have a place to bring them,” he stated. Patel, who was present with his children 12 years ago when BAPS initiated construction in Robbinsville, participated in the Bhumi Pujan ceremony, a tradition involving offering prayers to Mother Earth and God before commencing construction work. His son and daughter, now in their early twenties, have dedicated their time to Akshardham’s construction. “Both my kids are ideal American citizens, born in America, but they can raise their heads and say, ‘I am an American Hindu, and I am so proud that I was part of a place that many can visit as they come to this country,'” Patel proudly declared. “That has been my proudest moment.”

The construction of Akshardham was a challenging 12-year journey for the thousands of volunteers involved, some of whom arrived in the country on R-1 religious visas. They lived and worked on the mandir campus tirelessly. “It’s nonstop seva,” one worker remarked to another in mid-September, just weeks before the opening.

In 2017 and 2022, two devotees lost their lives while working on the construction, reasons the organization attributed to factors unrelated to safety conditions. As recently as March 2023, the Robbinsville Township police department responded to an offsite BAPS housing unit due to elevated levels of carbon monoxide.

In a headline-making event in May 2021, several volunteers originally from India initiated a class-action lawsuit against BAPS, citing wage theft, unsafe working conditions, and mistreatment of workers. However, the laborers withdrew the lawsuit earlier this year.

“The parties agreed to put the lawsuit on hold pending an investigation with which BAPS continues to cooperate fully,” said Ronak Patel, spokesperson for BAPS Temple Organization. “When the facts emerge, BAPS believes that they will reflect BAPS’ principles of kindness, equity, and respect for all human beings. BAPS continues to pray for all involved.”

Regarding the allegations of unpaid labor, BAPS stressed that worship through seva (selfless service) is at the core of the BAPS community, and the workers came to the U.S. as volunteers, not as employees.

“Because BAPS traditions emphasize serving those who serve, we took care of the artisans’ needs in the U.S., including travel, lodging, food, medical care, and internet and pre-paid phone cards so they could stay in touch with their families in India,” Patel added. “BAPS India also supported the artisans’ families in India, so they did not suffer financial hardship as a result of the artisans’ seva in the U.S.”

For many within the BAPS community, the opening in October represents an opportunity to showcase what can happen when devotees from around the world unite through the common thread of devotion.

“The ability to come together in volunteership, in selfless service, it created a sense of comfort and commonality,” expressed Ashini Parikh, a devotee from Atlanta. She reflected on the exponential increase in American awareness of Hinduism since her childhood as a first-generation kid. Playing a role in Hindu American history, for her, is an incredibly humbling experience.

“I am so proud that we as a community can come together from all walks of life, and we’ve all been able to be a part of this one thing that is going to have ripple effects for so many generations to come,” she remarked. “We all want to leave the planet a better place, and my contributions towards Akshardham allows me to leave the planet a better place well beyond my time.”

Global Leaders Plead for Peace in Ukraine at UN

October 2, 2023October 11, 2023 Staff ReporterWorld 0

The 2023 United Nations General Assembly, much like the previous year, has been engaged in discussions concerning the role of the United Nations and its member nations in addressing the crisis in Ukraine.

The United States and its allies continue to assert that the UN Charter mandates countries to support Ukraine in the conflict until its pre-2014 internationally recognized borders are restored. They argue that this obligation stems from Article 2:4 of the UN Charter, which prohibits the threat or use of force against a state’s territorial integrity or political independence in international relations.

According to their interpretation, Russia’s invasion of Ukraine constitutes a violation of Article 2:4, making any compromise or negotiated settlement unacceptable, regardless of the consequences of prolonging the war.

In contrast, other nations have advocated for a peaceful diplomatic resolution of the Ukraine conflict, emphasizing Article 2:3 of the UN Charter, which encourages members to settle international disputes through peaceful means to preserve international peace, security, and justice.

They also point to the UN’s purposes, outlined in Article 1:1, which include the resolution of international disputes through peaceful means, highlighting the urgency of diplomacy to swiftly end the war, given the risks of escalation and nuclear conflict.

The Amir of Qatar expressed this sentiment to the General Assembly, stating, “A long-term truce has become the most looked-for aspiration by people in Europe and all over the world. We call on all parties to comply with the UN Charter and international law and resort to a radical peaceful solution based on these principles.”

This year’s General Assembly has also addressed various other global crises, such as the failure to address climate change, the limited progress on the Sustainable Development Goals established in 2000, the persisting neocolonial economic system, and the pressing need for reform of the UN Security Council, which has fallen short of its primary duty to maintain peace and prevent conflict.

Leaders from different nations have raised concerns about abuses of power by the United States and Western nations. These include the occupation of Palestine, controversial and unlawful U.S. sanctions against countries like Cuba, Western exploitation of Africa, and a global financial system that exacerbates wealth and power inequalities worldwide.

Brazil’s President Lula da Silva addressed the Ukraine crisis, emphasizing the importance of dialogue and the UN’s role in promoting peace. He said, “The war in Ukraine exposes our collective inability to enforce the purposes and principles of the UN Charter. I have reiterated that work needs to be done to create space for negotiations… The international community must choose between the expansion of conflicts, furthering inequalities, and the renewal of multilateral institutions dedicated to promoting peace.”

President Biden’s speech at the General Assembly received criticism for being unclear and disjointed. President Gustavo Petro of Colombia highlighted the irony of humanity’s focus on war and conflict instead of working to extend life beyond Earth. He called for an end to wars in Ukraine, Palestine, and elsewhere and proposed two peace conferences, one for Ukraine and one for Palestine, to guide global peace efforts.

Other leaders, such as Prime Minister Ralph Gonsalves of St. Vincent and the Grenadines, rejected the notion that the central global struggle is between democracies and autocracies. He argued that the real conflict revolves around control, ownership, and distribution of the world’s resources. Gonsalves also urged Russia, NATO, and Ukraine to embrace peace to avoid a potential nuclear catastrophe.

Some NATO members, including Bulgaria, Hungary, and Spain, combined their denunciations of Russian aggression with pleas for peace, emphasizing the need to end the killing and destruction.

African leaders also took the opportunity to call for peace in Ukraine, highlighting the stark contrast between the world’s attention to the Ukraine conflict and its neglect of Africa’s challenges. They stressed the importance of ending the Ukraine conflict for global peace, energy security, and food security.

Leaders from approximately 50 countries voiced their support for peace in Ukraine at the 2023 UN General Assembly. They emphasized the principles of the UN Charter, the urgency of diplomatic solutions, and the need to prevent further violence in Ukraine. The international community appears united in its commitment to preserving territorial integrity, sovereignty, and peace.

5 Takeaways From Another Trump-Free Republican Debate

October 2, 2023October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterUSA 0

In the aftermath of the second Republican debate, Governor Ron DeSantis of Florida shared his candid assessment of the event while sitting in the spin room with Fox News host Sean Hannity. He remarked, “If I was at home watching that, I would have changed the channel.” The debate unfolded as a meandering and often bewildering spectacle, seemingly validating former President Donald J. Trump’s decision to skip it. Apart from sporadic exceptions, the Republican contenders appeared content to engage in petty disputes among themselves. They largely refrained from delivering significant blows to the dominant front-runner, failing to disrupt the political reality that Mr. Trump continues to overshadow his rivals in national polls.

Here are five key takeaways from the two-hour debate characterized by overlapping conversations, unanswered questions, rehearsed comebacks, and a conspicuous absence of any mention of the legal issues surrounding the favored candidate:

Governor DeSantis of Florida initiated the debate by confronting Mr. Trump on a national stage, asserting, “Donald Trump is missing in action… He should be on this stage tonight. He owes it to you to defend his record where they added $7.8 trillion to the debt. That set the stage for the inflation that we have now.” This direct challenge had been long awaited by some allies and donors. However, as the debate progressed, this statement faded into the background, with candidates mostly choosing to ignore Mr. Trump’s commanding lead.

A pro-Mike Pence super PAC had issued a blunt message to donors before the debate, emphasizing the need to shake up the race. Nevertheless, the debate failed to produce any substantial disruptions, leaving the dynamics of the race largely unaltered. The 91 criminal charges against Mr. Trump went unmentioned, both by the moderators and the candidates ostensibly running against him. While the former president faced more criticism compared to the first debate, the seven candidates onstage spent most of the night engaging in disputes with one another, seemingly vying for the second-place position.

During the debate, Tim Scott directed criticism at Nikki Haley concerning curtains and a gas tax, and Ms. Haley reciprocated by challenging Governor DeSantis on fracking. Vivek Ramaswamy faced scrutiny over his past business dealings with China and was accused by Scott of lacking knowledge about the Constitution. Chris Christie attempted to steer the conversation back towards Mr. Trump, even suggesting at one point that he should be “voted off the island.” However, the overall result was a chaotic and unclear exchange.

Governor DeSantis’s performance aligned with what his supporters had been anticipating. Despite initial criticism from the media about his lack of assertiveness in the first debate, his allies believed it was effective. In this debate, he utilized the sole abortion question of the night to criticize Mr. Trump for his stance on Florida’s restrictive abortion ban. He skillfully sidestepped a question about his previous comments regarding slavery in the state’s curriculum. At the outset, Governor DeSantis appeared confident and in control, mostly avoiding heated arguments. Although he struggled initially to find speaking opportunities, he eventually spoke more than any other candidate. Towards the end, he pushed back against the moderators when they asked candidates to indicate which candidate they would vote “off the island,” deeming the question “disrespectful.”

Despite Governor DeSantis’s assertiveness, his sporadic references to Mr. Trump did little to suggest that he could close the substantial gap between himself and the former president. Shortly after the debate concluded, a senior Trump adviser, Chris LaCivita, called for the cancellation of further debates, indicating that Mr. Trump felt no immediate pressure to enter the debate arena.

Nikki Haley solidified her position at the center stage during the debate. Following her strong performance in the first debate, which had sparked renewed interest from major donors, Ms. Haley appeared comfortable in the spotlight. She took aim at Governor DeSantis and defended herself against attacks from Tim Scott, whom she had appointed to the Senate. She even delivered one of the more memorable lines of the evening, telling Vivek Ramaswamy, “every time I hear you, I feel a little bit dumber.” Ms. Haley, like Governor DeSantis, took aim at Mr. Trump, suggesting that he had focused on the wrong issues in dealing with China’s growing influence and highlighting areas where he had left America vulnerable. Her rising stature was further confirmed as rivals began to scrutinize elements of her record as governor and United Nations ambassador.

Tim Scott reasserted himself in this debate after fading into the background during the first one. He had experienced a decline in the polls following the initial debate but made a strong comeback. From the beginning of the contest, he actively sought speaking time and integrated his trademark optimism with pointed criticisms directed at both Vivek Ramaswamy and Nikki Haley. Notably, he refrained from targeting Mr. Trump. His standout moment came during an exchange with Governor DeSantis on Florida’s curriculum regarding slavery, where he chose to emphasize his life story and emphasize his belief that America is not a racist country.

Vivek Ramaswamy adopted a different approach in this debate compared to the first one. In the prior debate, he gained attention by launching personal attacks on his opponents and accusing them of corruption. However, polling data following the debate did not support the narrative of his victory. Republican voters developed a more negative perception of him, and he struggled in early-state polls compared to his performance in national online polls. Consequently, Ramaswamy adopted a conciliatory tone in this debate, chastising his competitors for attacking each other and repeatedly expressing his respect for them. However, this reinvented persona failed to resonate, as the other candidates at times appeared to bond over their shared disapproval of him. Ms. Haley even elicited laughter from the audience when she remarked that she felt “dumber every time he talked,” while Tim Scott criticized his business ties to China. Overall, aside from the critiques directed at President Biden, the harshest criticisms of the night were aimed at Mr. Ramaswamy.

Mortgage Borrowing Costs Surge, Hitting 23-Year High

October 2, 2023October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterFinance/Economy 0

In another setback for aspiring homebuyers grappling with an increasingly unaffordable housing market, home loan borrowing costs have once again surged this week, propelling the average long-term U.S. mortgage rate to its highest point in nearly 23 years.

According to Freddie Mac, the average rate on the benchmark 30-year home loan has risen to 7.31%, up from 7.19% just last week. For comparison, a year ago, this rate averaged 6.70%.

For those looking at 15-year fixed-rate mortgages, which are favored by homeowners seeking to refinance, the news isn’t any better. The average rate for these mortgages has climbed to 6.72% from 6.54% last week, and a year ago, it was at 5.96%.

Freddie Mac’s Chief Economist, Sam Khater, commented on this trend, saying, “The 30-year fixed-rate mortgage has hit the highest level since the year 2000. However, unlike the turn of the millennium, house prices today are rising alongside mortgage rates, primarily due to low inventory. These headwinds are causing both buyers and sellers to hold out for better circumstances.”

These rising rates are adding significant financial pressure on borrowers, increasing their monthly costs and further limiting their ability to afford homes in a market that’s already unattainable for many Americans. Additionally, these elevated rates are discouraging homeowners who locked in historically low rates two years ago from selling. To put things in perspective, the average rate on a 30-year mortgage has now more than doubled since two years ago when it stood at just 3.01%.

The combination of soaring rates and limited home inventory is exacerbating the affordability crisis, keeping home prices at near all-time highs. This is occurring even as sales of previously owned homes in the U.S. have dropped by 21% during the first eight months of this year compared to the same period in 2022.

This marks the third consecutive week of rising mortgage rates. The weekly average rate on a 30-year mortgage has been above 7% since mid-August and has now reached levels not seen since mid-December 2000, when it averaged 7.42%.

The surge in mortgage rates is closely tied to the increase in the 10-year Treasury yield, which serves as a reference point for lenders when determining loan pricing. Over the past few weeks, the yield on the 10-year Treasury has risen significantly, driven by concerns that the Federal Reserve will maintain higher short-term interest rates for an extended period to combat inflation.

The Federal Reserve has already elevated its main interest rate to levels not seen since 2001 in an effort to tame surging inflation. In addition, it recently indicated that any future rate cuts may be less substantial than previously anticipated.

The prospect of higher interest rates in the long term has led to Treasury yields reaching levels not seen in more than a decade. The yield on the 10-year Treasury, for example, was at 4.61% during midday trading on Wednesday. In contrast, it stood at around 3.50% in May and was a mere 0.50% during the early stages of the pandemic.

It’s important to note that while mortgage rates don’t directly mirror the Federal Reserve’s rate increases, they are strongly influenced by the yield on the 10-year Treasury note. Factors such as investor expectations regarding future inflation, global demand for U.S. Treasuries, and the Federal Reserve’s actions on interest rates all play a role in determining rates for home loans.

Pope Francis Elevates 21 Men To Be Cardinals

October 2, 2023October 5, 2023 Staff ReporterReligion 0

Pope Francis created 21 new cardinals at a ritual-filled ceremony Saturday, September 30, 2023, including key figures at the Vatican and in the field who will help enact his reforms and cement his legacy as he enters a crucial new phase in running the Catholic Church.

On a crisp sunny morning filled with cheers from St. Peter’s Square, Francis further expanded his influence on the College of Cardinals who will help him govern and one day elect his successor: With Saturday’s additions, nearly three-quarters of the voting-age “princes of the church” owe their red hats to the Argentine Jesuit.

In his instructions to the new cardinals at the start of the service, Francis said their variety and geographic diversity would serve the church like musicians in an orchestra, where sometimes they play solos, sometimes as an ensemble.

The 86-year-old pope welcomed the new, so-called “Princes of the Church” with mnessage stating, “The College of Cardinals is called to resemble a symphony orchestra, representing the harmony… of the Church,” said Francis, seated under a canopy before the gathered cardinals on the steps of St Peter’s Basilica.

“Diversity is necessary; it is indispensable. However, each sound must contribute to the common design,” said the Argentine Jesuit.

The choice of the new cardinals, who include diplomats, close advisers and administrators, is keenly watched as an indication of the priorities and position of the Church.

One of them could also one day be elected by his peers to succeed Francis, who has left the door open to stepping down in the future should his health warrant it.

Saturday’s ceremony, known as a consistory, is the ninth since Francis in 2013 was named head of the world’s 1.3 billion Catholics.

One by one, the scarlet-clad cardinals knelt before the pope, who bestowed on them the two symbols of their high office: a scarlet four-cornered cap known as a biretta, and a cardinal’s ring. To some, a grinning Francis uttered an encouraging “Bravo!” or “Courage!” as he shook their hand.

Eighteen of the 21 newly made cardinals are under the age of 80 and thus currently eligible to vote as “cardinal electors” in the next conclave, when Francis’ successor will be decided. They are among 99 cardinal-electors created by Francis, representing about three-quarters of the total.

That has given rise to speculation that the Church’s future spiritual leader will be cast in the same mould as Francis, preaching a more tolerant Church with a greater focus on the poor and marginalised.

Throughout his papacy, Francis has sought to create a more inclusive, universal Church, looking past Europe to clergy in Africa, Asia and Latin America to fill the Church’s highest ranks.

With his latest roster of cardinals, Francis has again looked to the world’s “peripheries” — where Catholicism is growing — while breaking with the practice of promoting archbishops of large, powerful dioceses.

“He is looking for cardinals who correspond to the times,” an informed observer of the Holy See who asked to remain anonymous told AFP ahead of the ceremony. “These are people who have all taken a step away from the Church of the past, who positively ensure a break,” he added.

“This is the richness of the Church, to bring people together, different cultures, different backgrounds, languages,” the Archbishop of Cape Town, Stephen Brislin, told AFP Thursday before his elevation to cardinal.

The variety of cardinals represent “a richness and a variety of experience, and that’s what the Church is all about,” he added. “The Church encompasses all people, not just a certain group of people.”

There are three new cardinals from South America, including two Argentinians, and three from Africa, with the promotion of the archbishops of Juba in South Sudan, Tabora in Tanzania, and Cape Town’s Brislin.

Asia is represented by the Bishop of Penang in Malaysia and the Bishop of Hong Kong, Stephen Chow, who is seen as playing a key role in seeking to improve tense relations between the Vatican and Beijing.

Some of the new cardinals, such as Chow, have experience in sensitive zones of the world where the Holy See hopes to play an important diplomatic role. The list also includes the Holy Land’s top Catholic authority, Italian Archbishop Pierbattista Pizzaballa, the first sitting Latin Patriarch of Jerusalem to be made cardinal.

“Jerusalem is a small laboratory, interreligious and intercultural, and that’s a challenge that the whole world is facing at this point,” Pizzaballa told AFP.

Also promoted was the apostolic nuncio, or ambassador, to the United States, France’s Christophe Pierre, whose decades-long diplomatic career includes posts in countries including Haiti, Uganda and Mexico.

Francis also tapped top administrators in the Curia, the Holy See’s government. His new choices include Claudio Gugerotti, the Italian prefect of the Dicastery for the Eastern Churches; Argentina’s Victor Manuel Fernandez, whom Francis recently named head of the powerful Dicastery for the Doctrine of the Faith; and Chicago-born Robert Prevost, a former missionary in Peru who leads the Dicastery for Bishops. Following the ceremony, the new cardinals were congratulated by members of the public at the Vatican’s sumptuous Apostolic Palace.

NASA’s James Webb Space Telescope Detects Clues of Ocean-Covered Exoplanet Hosting Possible Life

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

In a groundbreaking discovery, NASA’s James Webb Space Telescope has unveiled intriguing evidence hinting at the existence of a distant exoplanet located approximately 120 light years away, which might be enveloped by an expansive ocean—raising the possibility of life beyond our solar system.

The telescope’s observations have identified the presence of dimethyl sulfide (DMS) on this distant celestial body known as K2-18 b. Notably, DMS is a molecule that, as far as we know from Earth, can solely be generated by living organisms. In addition to DMS, the research also detected the presence of methane and carbon dioxide within the exoplanet’s atmosphere. These findings collectively suggest that K2-18 b could potentially qualify as a “Hycean” planet—characterized by a hydrogen-rich atmosphere and a surface concealed beneath a substantial ocean.

Situated within the habitable zone of its host star—an intriguing red dwarf star inhabiting the Leo constellation—K2-18 b is positioned at a distance where it receives an adequate amount of radiation from its host star, potentially fostering conditions suitable for the presence of liquid water on its surface. Although the discovery of K2-18 b initially dates back to NASA’s K2 mission’s identification in 2015, it is only through the James Webb Telescope’s meticulous observations that the existence of these significant molecules has been unveiled, generating considerable excitement within the scientific community.

K2-18 b: An Enigmatic Ocean World

Described as an exoplanet falling within the category of “sub-Neptunes,” K2-18 b’s size ranges between that of Earth and Neptune. These sub-Neptunes are a distinct class of exoplanets that stand apart from any celestial bodies within our own solar system, thereby necessitating conjecture and inference in the absence of direct comparative data.

As NASA aptly highlights, “Although this kind of planet does not exist in our solar system, sub-Neptunes are the most common type of planet known so far in the galaxy.” Subhajit Sarkar, a researcher from Cardiff University and co-author of a yet-to-undergo-peer-review study on this discovery, emphasizes, “We have obtained the most detailed spectrum of a habitable-zone sub-Neptune to date, and this allowed us to work out the molecules that exist in its atmosphere.”

Nonetheless, it is crucial to temper enthusiasm, as it is still premature to definitively assert that K2-18 b is teeming with life. The researchers involved in this groundbreaking discovery underscore the pressing need for additional data to affirm these findings.

Nikku Madhusudhan, the team lead and a professor at the University of Cambridge, expressed the weighty responsibility that accompanies such a profound claim, stating, “If confirmed, it would be a huge deal, and I feel a responsibility to get this right if we are making such a big claim.” Fortunately, this need for further data is soon to be addressed, thanks to the James Webb Space Telescope’s Mid-Infrared Instrument (MIRI) spectrograph, which is already poised to provide valuable additional insights.

The Quest for Extraterrestrial Life

The implications of this discovery extend beyond the boundaries of our current understanding of planetary diversity. Madhusudhan affirms, “Our ultimate goal is the identification of life on a habitable exoplanet, which would transform our understanding of our place in the universe.” He underscores the promise that these findings hold for advancing our comprehension of Hycean worlds and their potential for sustaining life—a pursuit that has long fascinated scientists and now takes a significant step forward with the revelations brought to light by the James Webb Space Telescope.

NASA’s James Webb Space Telescope has uncovered compelling evidence suggesting the presence of a distant exoplanet, K2-18 b, positioned within its host star’s habitable zone. The detection of dimethyl sulfide (DMS), methane, and carbon dioxide in its atmosphere hints at the possibility of K2-18 b being a “Hycean” planet, characterized by a substantial ocean and a hydrogen-rich atmosphere. While these findings spark excitement about the potential for extraterrestrial life, scientists emphasize the need for further data and caution against prematurely drawing conclusions about the existence of life on this intriguing celestial body. The James Webb Space Telescope’s ongoing observations with the MIRI spectrograph promise to shed more light on the enigmatic world of K2-18 b and its suitability for hosting life, marking a significant step in our quest to uncover the mysteries of the cosmos.

Human Activities Push Earth Past 6 Planetary Boundaries, Posing Existential Risks

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

In a groundbreaking study, it has been revealed that humanity has transgressed six out of nine planetary boundaries crucial for preserving Earth’s stability and resilience. The study, published in Science Advances, identifies these six boundaries as climate change, biosphere integrity (encompassing genetic diversity and ecosystem energy), land system change, freshwater alteration (encompassing shifts in the entire terrestrial water cycle), biogeochemical flows (covering nutrient cycles), and novel entities (including microplastics, endocrine disruptors, and organic pollutants).

Drawing a striking analogy, Katherine Richardson, the author of the study from the University of Copenhagen, likened these planetary boundaries to blood pressure, stating, “If your BP is over 120/80, it is not a guarantee of a heart attack but it raises the risk. The same is true here — the breaching of individual boundaries does not imply immediate disaster but raises the risk of setting processes in motion that are likely to dramatically and irreversibly change the overall environmental conditions on Earth to one that no longer supports civilization as we know it.”

This research marks an update to the planetary boundaries framework, which was initially introduced in 2009 to delineate the environmental constraints within which humanity can safely function. Katherine Richardson emphasized the necessity of revising the framework to align with our evolving comprehension of Earth’s system dynamics and human impacts on it.

Conducted by 29 scientists from eight countries, this is the third iteration of the framework. The researchers commenced by identifying the processes in Earth’s ecosystem that have played a pivotal role in maintaining favorable conditions for human habitation over the past 12,000 years—a period renowned for its environmental stability and warmth.

Subsequently, they evaluated the extent to which human activities have disrupted these processes and pinpointed the threshold at which these disruptions heighten the likelihood of substantial and irreversible transformations in Earth’s overall conditions. To facilitate their analysis, computer simulations were employed.

The results unveiled that humans triggered breaches in two of the planet’s safety measures—climate and land systems—in 1988, placing us at imminent risk of systemic upheaval. Specifically, the researchers set the planetary boundary for atmospheric carbon dioxide concentration and radiative forcing, which represents the magnitude of the energy imbalance in the atmosphere, at 350 parts per million (ppm) and 1 Watt per square meter (Wm−2) respectively. Presently, these values stand at 417 ppm and 2.91 Wm−2.

Regarding land system changes, the study assessed the global forested land area as a percentage of the original forest cover boundary, which was originally estimated at 75 percent. However, the current global value has plummeted below this safe threshold, registering at 60 percent.

For biosphere integrity, the researchers set a limit of fewer than 10 extinctions per million species-years. Alas, their conservative estimations indicated that the actual extinction rate far surpassed this boundary, standing at over 100 extinctions per million species-years. At present, approximately one million out of the eight million plant and animal species are threatened with extinction, with over 10 percent of genetic diversity within these species lost over the past 150 years.

The second facet of biosphere integrity pertains to the energy accessible to ecosystems, known as net primary production (NPP). It represents the difference between the amount of carbon generated through photosynthesis and the amount expended during respiration. Currently, humans are appropriating roughly 30 percent of the energy that was available to support biodiversity.

This comprehensive study serves as an alarming reminder of the perilous path humanity is treading concerning the environment. It highlights the urgency for concerted global action to reverse these boundary transgressions and safeguard the planet’s delicate equilibrium. Without immediate and effective measures, the risk of triggering irreversible changes that threaten civilization as we know it becomes increasingly substantial.

AIA-NY honors six at glittering Benefit Gala

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Tagline: Highlights of the Deepavali Fest on October 1 released

Hicksville, NY: The Association of Indians in America (AIA-NY) held its Benefit Gala under the Presidentship of Dr Jagdish Gupta to raise funds for the iconic Deepavali Fest at South Street Seaport in Manhattan on October 1.

The glittering gala was held on September 17 in the chandeliered ballroom of the newly opened Pearl Banquet Hall in Hicksville, NY. It was attended by over 200 prominent people including past presidents of AIA and advisory board members.

The Lifetime Achievement Award was presented to Asmita and Arun Bhatia, Founder and CEO of the Arun Bhatia Development Organization. Excellence in Healthcare Administration Award was given to David Seligman, Deputy Regional Executive Director for Northwell Health Western Region.

Dr V. K. Raju, Clinical Professor of Ophthalmology at West Virginia University was honored for Excellence in Ophthalmological Surgery & Prevention of Childhood Blindness. On his behalf, his daughter Dr Leela V. Raju, herself an eminent ophthalmologist, accepted the award.

Dr Subhash Kini, Director, Center for Bariatric and Minimally Invasive Surgery, Icahn School of Medicine, Mount Sinai (Morningside), received the Excellence in Bariatric & Minimally Invasive/Robotic Surgery Award. Businesswoman/Entrepreneur Award went to Sharda Haridas Kotahwala, for their family business in Diamond & Precious Stone Jewelry business. Dr Saurabh Lodha, of the Department of Dermatology, Columbia University, was given the Excellence in Dermatology – Special Young Physician Award.

New York Life Insurance Company, a major sponsor of AIA’s Deepavali Festival, was honored for Community Service Excellence. NY Life’s Corporate Vice President, Srinivas Ranga received the plaque.

In his President’s address, Dr Gupta said that the honorees tonight are the crème de la crème of our community, including physician leaders, philanthropists, educators, and entrepreneurs.

Dr Gupta, an eminent gastroenterologist who took over as AIA-NY president on June 2, emphasized that “AIA-NY has been organizing the Deepavali Festival in New York for the past 36 years, and it has become an iconic event, attended by thousands of people from the Tri-State area, including both Indians and non-Indians.

Highlights of the free-to-public Deepavali festival at South Street Seaport on October 1 include: Children’s Program (1.30-3 pm), Nach Inferno (4-5.30 pm), VIP Hour (3.30 – 5 pm), and the finale – Fireworks on East River at 7 pm. Many lawmakers, dignitaries and entertainers are expected to participate. Print and electronic media are invited to cover the mega event.

At the gala, Dr Gupta congratulated the community as Diwali has been declared a school holiday in New York City. “Over the years, it has come to symbolize our culture and heritage in the USA as Diwali is a manifestation of Indian culture.”

Dr Samin Sharma, Advisor and Chairman of the Board of Trustees of AIA-NY, in his address, highlighted the stellar achievements and contributions of Indian Americans, particularly in healthcare.

Citations for AIA-NY from Indian Consul General Randhir Jaiswal, Nassau County Chairman Bruce Blakeman, and New York State Senator Kevin Thomas were received by Dr Gupta.

AIA Board members at the gala included Dr Samin Sharma, Dr Nirmal Mattoo, Animesh Goenka, Dr Shashi Shah, Dr Buddhadev Manvar, Sunil Modi and Smiti Khanna. Past Presidents in attendance included Harish Thakkar, and Dr Narinder Kukar.

Nilima Madan was the Gala Chair.

Dr Gupta, former President of IALI, AAPI-QLI and Nargis Dutt Memorial Foundation, thanked Fareportal-CheapOair/Qatar Airways Alliance, New York Life, Mount Sinai Hospital, and the Northwell Health System for their generous contributions toward Deepavali Fest.

A sumptuous dinner followed.

Watch the romantic thriller series ‘Duranga 2 coming soon on ZEE5 Global

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Viewers can catch ZEE5 Global's unmissable slate and stock up on their yearlong entertainment by subscribing to the Annual pack and grabbing the limited-time special offer price. Users can download the ZEE5 Global app from Google Play Store / iOS App Store. It is available on Roku devices, Apple TVs, Android TVs, Amazon Fire TV and Samsung Smart TVs and on www.ZEE5.com

About ZEE5 Global

ZEE5 Global Twitter: https://twitter.com/ZEE5GlobalCorp
ZEE5 Global LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/company/ZEE5 Global/
ZEE5 Global announces the World Digital Premiere of hit Kannada campus comedy

'Hostel Hudugaru Bekagiddare'

India to be added to JPMorgan’s emerging-market bond index

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

India will be added to JPMorgan’s emerging market government bond index next year, paving the way for more foreign inflows to the number-five economy.

“Inclusion is expected to drive at least $21 billion of inflows from foreign investors, and if other index providers follow suit, the effects could be amplified further. Simply put, this will likely drive yields down for IGBs and provide some support the rupee at the same time,” said Jennifer Taylor, head of emerging market debt at State Street Global Advisors.

The yield on the 10-year Indian government bond was 7.16% on Friday.

She noted the Reserve Bank of India first started courting index providers in 2019.

The key move came in 2020 when India created its fully accessible route, or FAR, bond market, said Lee Collins, head of index fixed income at Legal & General Investment Management. He said the FAR bond issuance has added meaningful daily liquidity.

“Our view is that the [Indian] market can offer an attractive yield, volatility and maximum drawdown levels that are more akin to lower yielding, higher rated issuers such as the U.S. and China, as well as low levels of correlation to other emerging and developed market issuers,” he added.

The iShares JPMorgan USD emerging market bond ETF has slipped 1% this year.

The S&P BSE Sensex index closed Friday with a small loss, but is down just 2% from its record high.

Hostel Hudugaru Bekagiddare is exclusively streaming on ZEE5 Global

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Global, 15^th September 2023: ZEE5 Global, the world’s largest streaming platform for South Asian content, is bringing forth the exclusive world digital premiere of the popular campus comedy film, ‘Hostel Hudugaru Bekagiddare’. Directed by debutant Nithin Krishnamurthy, the film stars debutants Prajwal BP, Manjunath Nayaka, Rakesh Rajkumar, Srivatsa and Tejas Jayanna Urs, while Rishab Shetty, Pawan Kumar, Shine Shetty and Ramya make cameo appearances. With an impressive performance at the box office, the Kannada film became much talked about in the industry and now, with its world digital premiere on ZEE5 Global, for those who haven’t watched it yet, this is your golden chance.

With a stellar cast and witty narrative, ‘Hostel Hudugaru Bekagiddare’ is a true cinematic treasure that beautifully captures the essence of college life amusingly and engagingly. The story unfolds within the confines of a boys’ hostel, taking place over the course of a single night. It weaves a comical narrative of mischief and camaraderie as a student’s imaginative script becomes intertwined with real-life occurrences. This collision of fantasy and reality leads to unexpected and hilarious outcomes, blurring the lines between the two worlds. The outcome is a comedy that assures you a delightful and laughter-packed experience, promising an enjoyable journey.

With an IMDB rating of 8.1, ‘Hostel Hudugaru Bekagiddare’ is the biggest blockbuster of Kannada cinema this year. Following its highly successful theatrical run, the movie is now poised to reach a broader audience through its world digital premiere on ZEE5 Global. Produced by Prajwal BP, Varun Kumar, Nithin Krishnamurthy, and Arvind K Kashyap under the Gulmohar Films and Varun Studios banner and presented by Rakshit Shetty under Paramvah Pictures banner, Hostel Hudugaru Bekagiddare is a must watch black comedy film which will make for a perfect weekend watch.

Archana Anand, Chief Business Officer, ZEE5 Global, said, “Comedy as a genre has seen significant traction in the US with a 92% y-o-y growth. ‘Hostel Hudugaru Bekagiddare,’ the hit Kannada campus comedy is a strong addition to our rich Kannada library that is sure to strike a nostalgic chord amongst viewers and help them relive their college memories.”

Nithin Krishnamurthy, Director of Hostel Hudugaru Bekagiddaresaid, “I am absolutely thrilled by the overwhelming response ‘Hostel Hudugaru Bekagiddare’ has received since its theatrical release. As a first-time director, seeing the film connect with audiences and bring a smile to their face is a dream come true. The journey of making this movie has been a labor of love, and I am humbled by the support it has garnered. The digital premiere on ZEE5 Global will now allow even more people to be part of the mad riot that this film is. I am grateful for the support of the cast, crew, and everyone who has embraced the film, and I look forward to sharing more stories that resonate with audiences in the future.”

Users opting for the monthly pack can apply coupon code FIFTYZEE5 to avail 50% off on their first month.

How Canada became embroiled in diplomatic spat over killing of Sikh separatist Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau spoke of ‘credible allegations’ of Indian involvement in a Sikh leader’s death.

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

How Canada became embroiled in diplomatic spat over killing of Sikh separatist

(The Conversation) — India and Canada have engaged in tit-for-tat diplomatic expulsions as part of an escalating row over the killing of a Sikh separatist leader on Canadian soil.

The expulsions follow claims by Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau that there are “credible allegations” linking the Indian government of Narendra Modi with the death of Hardeep Singh Nijjar. Nijjar, a prominent member of the Khalistan movement seeking to create an independent Sikh homeland in the Indian state of Punjab, was shot dead on June 18, 2023, outside a Sikh cultural center in Surrey, British Columbia.

With tensions between the two countries rising, The Conversation reached out to Mark Juergensmeyer – an expert on religious violence and Sikh nationalism – at the University of California, Santa Barbara, to bring context to a diplomatic spat few saw coming.

1. What is the Khalistan movement?

“Khalistan” means “the land of the pure,” though in this context the term “khalsa” refers broadly to the religious community of Sikhs, and the term “Khalistan” implies that they should have their own nation. The likely location for this nation would be in Punjab state in northern India where 18 million Sikhs live. A further 8 million Sikhs live elsewhere in India and abroad, mainly in the U.K., the U.S. and Canada.

The idea for an independent land for Sikhs goes back to pre-partition India, when the concept of a separate land for Muslims in India was being considered.

Some Sikhs at that time thought that if Muslims could have “Pakistan” – the state that emerged through partition in 1947 – then there should also be a “Sikhistan,” or “Khalistan.” That idea was rejected by the Indian government, and instead the Sikhs became a part of the state of Punjab. At that time the boundaries of the Punjab were drawn in such a way that the Sikhs were not in the majority.

But Sikhs persisted, in part because one of the central tenets of the faith is “miri-piri” – the idea that religious and political leadership are merged. In their 500-year history, Sikhs have had their own kingdom, have fought against Moghul rule and constituted the backbone of the army under India’s colonial and independent rule.

In the 1960s, the idea of a separate homeland for Sikhs reemerged and formed part of the demand for redrawing the boundaries of Punjab state so that Sikhs would be in the majority. The protests were successful, and the Indian government created Punjabi Suba, a state whose boundaries included speakers of the Punjabi language used by most Sikhs. They now compose 58% of the population of the revised Punjab.

The notion of a “Khalistan” separate from India resurfaced in a dramatic way in the large-scale militant uprising that erupted in the Punjab in the 1980s. Many of those Sikhs who joined the militant movement did so because they wanted an independent Sikh nation, not just a Sikh-majority Indian state.

2. Why is the Indian government especially concerned about it now?

The Sikh uprising in the 1980s was a violent encounter between the Indian armed police and militant young Sikhs, many of whom still harbored a yearning for a separate state in Punjab.

AP Photo/Sondeep Shanker

Thousands of lives were lost on both sides in violent encounters between the Sikh militants and security forces. The conflict came to a head in 1984 when Prime Minister Indira Gandhi launched Operation Blue Star to liberate the Sikh’s Golden Temple from militants in the pilgrimage center of Amritsar and capture or kill the figurehead of the Khalistan movement, Sant Jarnail Singh Bhindranwale. He was killed in the attack, and Sikhs around the world were incensed that their sacred place was violated by police action. Indira Gandhi was assassinated in retaliation by Sikh members of her own bodyguard.

In recent years, several firebrand Sikh activists in India have reasserted the idea of Khalistan, and the Indian government fears a return of the violence and militancy of the 1980s. The government of Narendra Modi wants to nip the movement in the bud before it gets too large and extreme.

3. What is the connection between the Khalistan movement and Canada?

After the Sikh uprising was crushed in the early 1990s, many Sikh activists fled India and went to Canada, where they were welcomed by a large Sikh community – many of whom had been sympathetic to the Khalistan idea. A sizable expatriate community of Sikhs has been growing in the country since the early 20th century, especially in British Columbia and Ontario.

Sikhs have been attracted to Canada not only because of its economic opportunities but also because of the freedom to develop their own ideas of Sikh community. Though support for Khalistan is illegal in India, in Canada Sikh activists are able to speak freely and organize for the cause.

Though Khalistan would be in India, the Canadian movement in favor of it helps to cement the diaspora Sikh identity and give the Canadian activists a sense of connection to the Indian homeland.

4. Has the Canadian government been sympathetic to the Khalistan movement?

The diaspora community of Sikhs constitutes 2.1% of Canada’s population – a higher percentage of the total population than in India. They make up a significant voting block in the country and carry political clout. In fact, there are more Sikhs in Canada’s cabinet than in India’s.

Although Trudeau has assured the Indian government that any acts of violence will be punished, he also has reassured Canadians that he respects free speech and the rights of Sikhs to speak and organize freely as long as they do not violate Canadian laws.

5. What is the broader context of Canada-India relations?

The Bharata Janata Party, or BJP, of India’s Prime Minister Modi tends to support Hindu nationalism.

Recently, the Modi government used “Bharat” rather than “India” when referring to the country while hosting the G20 conference, attended by President Joe Biden, among other world dignitaries. “Bharat” is the preference of Hindu nationalists. This privileging, along with an increase in hate crimes, has led to an environment of fear and distrust among minorities, including Sikhs and Muslims, in India.

Considering the high percentage of Sikhs in Canada’s population, Trudeau understandably wants to assert the rights of Sikhs and show disapproval of the drift toward Hindu nationalism in India.

And this isn’t the only time that Trudeau and Modi have clashed over the issue. In 2018, Trudeau was condemned in India for his friendship with Jaspal Singh Atwal, a Khalistani supporter in Canada who was convicted of attempting to assassinate the chief minister of Punjab.

Yet both countries have reasons to try to move on from the current diplomatic contretemps. India and Canada have close trading ties and common strategic concerns with relationship to China. It is likely that, in time, both sides will find ways to cool down the tensions from this difficult incident.

(Mark Juergensmeyer, Professor of Sociology and Global Studies, University of California, Santa Barbara. The views expressed in this commentary do not necessarily reflect those of TheUNN.) (How Canada became embroiled in diplomatic spat over killing of Sikh separatist (religionnews.com)

Ten Indians in TIME’s AI 2023 List

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

From 18-year-old Sneha Revanaur- Founder of Encode Justice working towards AI regulation in the US to veteran business leaders like Romesh and Sunil Wadhwani- co founders of non-profit Wadhwani AI– ten stellar Indian and Indian American men and women, social and business entrepreneurs, researchers and academics are in Time’s AI (artificial intelligence) 2023 list.

From running an ethical business using AI to uplift underserved communities to use of AI in medicine and bioscience and from the need for involvement of the younger demographics in AI regulation to an AI non-profit working towards solving persistent global developmental challenges-the spectrum of initiatives being run by these men and women are vast and varied in impact and scale.

Romesh and Sunil Wadhwani

Indiaspora members and billionaire brother duo Romesh and Sunil Wadhwani joined hands to channel AI towards solving global development challenges, especially in nations where people live on less than $5 a day.

They have set up Wadhwani AI- an independent nonprofit institute developing AI-based solutions for underserved communities in developing countries. A total sum of $60 million has been committed to date towards the varied initiatives of the Mumbai-based non-profit.

Wadhwani AI devotes its AI development efforts to pioneering an ecosystem of scalable solutions in health care, education, and agriculture sectors for underserved communities by partnering with governments and nonprofits across Asia, Africa and Latin America. The initiative also includes a new $5 million program at the Center for Strategic and International Studies.

“We thought that in the U.S., China, and Europe, AI is being leveraged to help people who are already well-off,” says Sunil Wadhwani in the Time interview, “but maybe we can make India the global leader in applying AI for social good.”

The institute partners with Indian State and Central governments to identify use cases, collect data, conduct pilots and deploy solutions. Some of the strategic programs of the institute include enabling frontline healthcare workers to feel digitally confident to engage with AI-based technology solutions, irrespective of their education, skills, and environment and developing multiple interventions across the TB care cascade and helping India’s National TB Elimination Programme (NTEP) become AI-ready.

The Wadhwani brothers said in the Time interview that India, with a diverse population of 1.4 billion, perfectly suits the Wadhwani Institute’s mission of altruistic research. “Other countries simply don’t have the combination of capabilities or opportunities that India has,” says Romesh Wadhwani.

Sneha Revanaur

Encode Justice is a youth-led, AI-focused civil-society group. It was founded by Revanaur (from San Jose, California) in 2020 to mobilize younger generations in the golden state against Proposition 25, a ballot measure that aimed to replace cash bail with a risk-based algorithm.

After the initiative was defeated, the group focused on educating and galvanizing peers around AI policy advocacy. The group now has 800 young members in 30 countries around the world and is compared to the preceding youth-led climate and gun-control movements.

At the urging of many in the AI industry, Washington appears to be moving fast on AI regulation.

This summer, Revanur helped organize an open letter urging congressional leaders and the White House Office of Science and Technology Policy to include more young people on AI oversight and advisory boards. Soon after, she was invited to attend a roundtable discussion on AI hosted by Vice President Kamala Harris.

Manu Chopra

Friend of Indiaspora, Manu Chopra, co-founded Karya with Vivek Seshadri with an ambitious vision of setting up a network of ethical data usage where data can both financially and technologically empower traditionally underserved communities.

The USD $100 billion data generation industry offers the opportunity to create this ecosystem and impact the lives of millions of people.

Currently, most dataset generation work goes to urban communities or are outsourced to Kenya or the Philippines- where workers are often exploited; offered sub-minimum wages and are often overworked. Median hourly wages are estimated at $0.1-0.5 per hour, while datasets sell for over 200x this price. “With AI, we have a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity to move millions of rural Indians out of poverty, sustainably. At Karya, we are reimagining how AI models are trained. In an industry where for-profit companies pay data workers an average of 10 – 20 cents per hour, we pay our workers 50 times the industry standard, a minimum wage of USD 5/ hour,” tells Chopra.

Karya strives to be an ethical and high-quality AI/ML data company in the world, creating a win-win solution for both technology companies and data workers. Their ambitious goal is to use digital work to economically impact 100 million rural Indians by 2030. Currently Karya employs 30,000 workers.

“We work with over 200 of India’s top non-profits, self help groups and FPOs (farmer collectives) across 22 states in India to identify worker communities who would benefit the most from Karya’s work opportunities, tells Chopra. Karya has multiple on-going and up-coming projects across several states in rural India.

Tushita Gupta

Tushita Gupta co-founded Refiberd with Sarika Bajaj in 2020 with the goal of bringing the cutting-edge of AI research to the fashion industry to help solve the global textile waste crisis.

From their deep research backgrounds in artificial intelligence and textile engineering, the founders believe in the power of technology to unlock a 100% circular economy.

Gupta is the CTO at Refibred and is a patent-pending AI scientist. She previously worked on drug discovery. She has a Bachelors and Masters from Carnegie Mellon.

The amount of textiles trashed in the U.S. has almost doubled in recent years, going from nearly 9,500 tons in 2000 to just over 17,000 tons in 2018, according to the latest government data. And the vast majority of this—about 85%—goes to landfill or is incinerated rather than being recycled or donated.

The California-based company aims to provide the most accurate summary of what types of materials are in any given textile item. Successful recycling depends on knowing what something is made of, so that items can be precisely sorted into like materials. This is particularly true for chemical recycling—which breaks down synthetic materials like nylon and polyester that were once impossible to recycle. Once the materials are recycled, they can be remade into fabric for new textiles—cutting waste and encouraging circularity in the fashion industry.

In January, Refiberd raised over $3.4 million in seed funding, and it’s now running a series of pilot projects in the U.S. and Europe. Four companies are sending Refiberd a couple hundred pounds of textile waste to sort.

Neal Khosla

Another Indian American with a checkered legacy working to utilize AI in the healthcare space is Neal Khosla-CEO and co-founder of Curai Health, the AI-assisted telehealth startup that the 30-year-old Khosla co-founded in 2017.

Curai is beyond your standard subscription-based virtual care service.

The company charges $15 a month (if the cost isn’t covered by their employer) for users to text 24/7 with health care professionals who can answer questions, create care plans, write prescriptions, and, if necessary, refer users to specialists.

Curai’s AI essentially functions as an assistant for doctors, handling straightforward tasks to free up their time for more complex work. For example, collecting the information patients provide during their intake questionnaires or sending a follow-up message after the conversation to see how a patient is doing.

Utilizing the power of AI in this way allows the clinicians working with Curai to see many more patients.

So far, the startup has received more than $50 million in funding from General Catalyst, Morningside Ventures, and Khosla Ventures, the firm founded by Khosla’s father, the billionaire venture capitalist Vinod Khosla.

Pushmeet Kohli

Pushmeet Kohli is the Vice President of Research at Google DeepMind. He leads both Google DeepMind’s AI for Science project that uses AI to solve scientific grand challenges, and its Responsible and Reliable AI team, which monitors and regulates DeepMind’s AI systems.

Kohli joined DeepMind in 2017 and soon set up the Safe and Reliable AI team, which later changed its name. (DeepMind merged with a division of Google in April to become Google DeepMind.)

Some of the projects of the two teams he leads, includes AlphaFold, used by over 1 million researchers. It can predict the structures of proteins from their amino-acid structure in seconds- a previously time intensive task that took months or years. Better understanding of protein structures will accelerate drug discovery and may pave the way for further scientific breakthroughs.

Recently, Kohli’s AI for Science team also announced AlphaTensor, an AI system that builds on AlphaZero, which shows extraordinary performance across a range of games including Go, and can discover new algorithms.

He thinks that AI, by improving our understanding of the world, will ultimately solve more problems than it creates. He views the complex challenges he hopes AI will help address, such as climate change and pandemics.

Kalika Bali

Kalika Bali is a Principal Researcher at Microsoft Research in Bangalore working in the areas of Machine Learning, Natural Language Systems and Applications, and Technology for Emerging Markets. Her research interests are Speech and Language Technology especially in the use of linguistic models for building technology that offers a more natural Human-Computer and Computer-Mediated interactions.

She is currently working on Project Mélange to understand, process and generate Code-mixed language data for both text and speech. Code-mixing or use of multiple languages in a single conversation is a phenomenon that is observed in all multilingual societies. Though Code-mixing has been studied in the past as a feature of conversational speech, the rapid rise of social-media and other online forums has made it a common phenomenon for text as well. Conversational speech applications, like personal assistants and speech-to-speech translations, make it vital to model this in speech also.

“Recently, I have become interested in how social and pragmatic functions affect language use, in code-mixed as well as monolingual conversations, and how to build effective computational models of sociolinguistics and pragmatics that can lead to more aware Artificial Intelligence,” reads Bali’s bio on the Microsoft site.

“I am also very passionate about NLP and Speech technology for Indian Languages. I believe that local language technology, especially with speech interfaces, can help millions of people gain entry into a world that is till now almost inaccessible to them. I have served, and continue to serve, on several government and other committees that work on Indian Language Technologies and Linguistic Resources and Standards for NLP/Speech.”

Arvind Narayanan and Sayash Kapoor

Arvind Narayanan is a professor of computer science at Princeton University and the director of the Center for Information Technology Policy.

He co-authored a textbook on fairness and machine learning and is currently co-authoring a book on AI Snake Oil with Sayash Kapoor, one of his Ph.D. students.

The book that will be published next year was inspired after a talk that he gave in 2019 titled “How to recognize AI snake oil” went viral and the slides were downloaded tens of thousands of times and his tweets were viewed by millions.

Narayanan has led the Princeton Web Transparency and Accountability Project to uncover how companies collect and use our personal information. His work was among the first to show how machine learning reflects cultural stereotypes, and his doctoral research showed the fundamental limits of de-identification. Narayanan is a recipient of the Presidential Early Career Award for Scientists and Engineers (PECASE), twice a recipient of the Privacy Enhancing Technologies Award, and thrice a recipient of the Privacy Papers for Policy Makers Award.
Narayanan and Kapoor have been sharing their ideas as they develop and comment on recent developments in AI on their Substack, AI Snake Oil. (Courtesy: Indiaspora.com)

Moon’s Drift Impact’s Earth’s Day Length

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

In a revelation that challenges our understanding of Earth’s relationship with its celestial companion, the Moon, scientists have determined that our lunar neighbor is gradually moving away from Earth, leading to a subtle yet significant transformation in the length of our planet’s days.

This remarkable discovery sheds light on a phenomenon that unfolds over millions of years, offering a glimpse into the complex dynamics between Earth and its only natural satellite.

A recent investigation conducted by researchers at the University of Wisconsin-Madison delves into the geological history of our planet, focusing on rock formations dating back a staggering 90 million years. This exploration of Earth’s ancient interactions with the Moon, approximately 1.4 billion years ago, has unveiled the astonishing fact that the Moon is steadily distancing itself from Earth, an ongoing process occurring at a rate of 3.82 centimeters per year. The consequences of this gradual lunar retreat will become increasingly apparent in the distant future, as Earth’s days are poised to extend to 25 hours in the span of 200 million years.

Professor Stephen Meyers, a prominent figure in the field of geoscience at the University of Wisconsin-Madison, likens this phenomenon to a figure skater slowing down as they extend their arms during a spin.

He elucidates, “As the moon moves away, the Earth is like a spinning figure skater who slows down as they stretch their arms out.”

This analogy vividly illustrates the intricate interplay between Earth and the Moon, a dynamic that has captivated scientists seeking to comprehend the distant past while simultaneously expanding our grasp of geological time scales.

This revelation, however, is not the sole development challenging our perception of the Moon. Recent breakthroughs stemming from China’s space program have unearthed a treasure trove of secrets hidden beneath the lunar surface, spanning billions of years.

These concealed structures offer tantalizing glimpses into the Moon’s enigmatic history, providing invaluable insights for researchers endeavoring to reconstruct the lunar past.

The Moon’s slow and steady journey away from Earth, as unveiled by the meticulous study conducted by the University of Wisconsin-Madison, promises to reshape our understanding of our planet’s celestial partner. This ongoing celestial dance, which unfolds over geological epochs, will ultimately extend Earth’s days to 25 hours in the distant future.

Concurrently, China’s space program has unearthed lunar mysteries buried deep beneath the Moon’s surface, offering a fresh perspective on its intriguing past. Together, these revelations propel us into a realm where the Earth-Moon relationship is unveiled in all its complexity, providing a fascinating glimpse into the celestial mechanics that have shaped our planet and its only natural satellite.

Fed To Start Cutting Interest Rates In 2024

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

The Federal Reserve has concluded its interest rate hikes and is expected to reduce them by approximately one percentage point in the coming year, as indicated by leading economists at some of North America’s largest banks.

While it’s likely that the United States will avoid a recession, the latest projections from the American Bankers Association’s Economic Advisory Committee suggest a significant slowdown in economic growth in the upcoming quarters. This slowdown is expected to result in higher unemployment rates and a decrease in inflation.

Simona Mocuta, the chair of the 14-member committee and chief economist at State Street Global Advisors, stated, “Given both demonstrated and anticipated progress on inflation, the majority of the committee members believe the Fed’s tightening cycle has run its course.”

The upcoming Federal Reserve meeting is anticipated to see no change in interest rates, although there is a division among investors regarding the possibility of a rate increase later in the year.

The ABA advisory committee comprises economists from major institutions such as JPMorgan Chase & Co., Morgan Stanley, and Wells Fargo & Co. Their forecasts are regularly presented to Fed Chair Jerome Powell and other members of the central bank’s board in Washington.

According to their median forecast, the committee anticipates that economic growth will decelerate to less than an annualized rate of 1% in the next three quarters due to previous interest rate hikes by the Fed and tightening credit conditions.

The committee’s projections also indicate that unemployment is expected to climb to 4.4% by the end of the next year, up from 3.8% in August. Additionally, consumer price inflation is forecasted to decrease from 3.2% in July to 2.2%.

Simona Mocuta noted during a Zoom press conference, “As a consensus among the committee, the likelihood of a soft economic landing has significantly improved in the short term. However, there are lingering concerns about the sustainability of the remarkable resilience that the economy has exhibited thus far.” The committee assesses the probability of a recession next year to be just under 50%.

The Rise of Asia’s Super Rich Population

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Despite experiencing an 11 percent decline in its population of ultra-wealthy individuals in 2022, Asia still maintains a larger number of such individuals compared to Europe. These ultra-wealthy individuals are defined as those whose net worth exceeds $30 million.

The World Ultra Wealth 2023 report by Altrata reveals that Asia surpassed Europe in the number of ultra-wealthy individuals for the first time in 2019. Analysts project that Asia’s global share of ultra-high-net-worth individuals (UHNWIs) will continue to expand in the coming years and could reach 29 percent by 2027, a significant increase from the 15 percent recorded in 2004. This growth is expected to come at the expense of Europe, which is anticipated to witness a decline in its share of global UHNWIs, dropping from 41.4 percent in 2004 to 25 percent by 2027.

While the populations of ultra-wealthy individuals are projected to rise across all regions worldwide, Asia is poised for the most substantial growth over the next five years, with numbers surging from 395,070 to 528,100. This surge can be attributed in part to India’s expanding economy and a growing trend among businesses to diversify their supply chains away from the Chinese mainland. Instead, they are relocating their industrial, logistical, and real estate operations to other Asian markets.

As depicted in the chart below, North America is expected to maintain its position as the region accounting for approximately 35 percent of global UHNW wealth by 2027. Meanwhile, Europe is projected to lag behind these two regions in terms of UHNW wealth, although it will still experience an overall increase in cumulative wealth.

According to the report, the global population of ultra-wealthy individuals is set to reach 528,100 people by 2027, a substantial increase from the 133,000 reported in 2022.

Turmeric Is Key To Indigestion Treatment

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

A promising solution for indigestion may already be lurking in your kitchen spice rack, as indicated by a recent study. Published in the medical journal BMJ, this study, which unveiled its findings on Monday, investigated the response of over 150 individuals with dyspepsia (commonly referred to as indigestion) to three different treatments: the medication omeprazole, turmeric containing curcumin, and a combination of the two.

Omeprazole is a widely used drug known for its effectiveness in treating specific heart and esophageal conditions by reducing stomach acid levels, according to the Mayo Clinic.

The participants’ symptoms, which encompassed stomach pain, bloating, nausea, and an early sense of fullness, were assessed at the 28th and 56th day of the treatment. This evaluation utilized the Severity of Dyspepsia Assessment, a questionnaire designed to gauge the severity of indigestion.

The study’s outcomes revealed no significant distinctions in symptom alleviation among the groups receiving omeprazole, turmeric, or the combination of both treatments.

Dr. Krit Pongpirul, the lead author of the study and an associate professor in the department of preventive and social medicine at Chulalongkorn University in Bangkok, Thailand, remarked, “In addition to its anti-inflammatory and antioxidant properties, curcumin/turmeric could be a viable option for treating dyspepsia with comparable efficacy to omeprazole.”

Turmeric has a longstanding history of medicinal use in Southeast Asia for addressing stomach discomfort and various inflammatory conditions. In the United States, it has primarily served as an anti-inflammatory and antioxidant dietary supplement for alleviating conditions such as osteoarthritis and irritable bowel syndrome.

However, this clinical trial marks the first instance in which curcumin/turmeric has been directly compared to omeprazole in the treatment of dyspepsia, according to Pongpirul.

Turmeric’s Impact on Indigestion and Ongoing Questions

The exploration of turmeric’s influence on indigestion is a logical step since its constituent, curcumin, has been extensively studied in various inflammatory conditions, including inflammatory bowel disease and arthritis, according to Dr. Yuying Luo, a gastroenterologist and assistant professor of gastroenterology at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai in New York City. Some studies have even shown that curcumin can be beneficial when used alongside other medications.

Nevertheless, Luo raised a few queries regarding the new study. She pointed out that the scale employed by the researchers to assess symptoms is not the most commonly used one for gauging indigestion improvement. She also expressed a desire to see more frequent symptom measurements.

“I don’t think this single study alone provides sufficient grounds for me to make a recommendation. Proceed with caution,” she cautioned. However, she added that given the extensive ongoing research on the compound’s impact on various inflammatory conditions, more insights may emerge soon.

Luo emphasized the importance of consulting with a healthcare professional before increasing turmeric consumption in your diet for improved digestion. She highlighted a few case studies indicating liver injury associated with curcumin and the necessity of ensuring that turmeric does not interact adversely with any other medications you may be taking.

Pongpirul echoed these sentiments, stating, “Consumers should be aware of side effects of curcumin extracts such as allergy and bleeding risk, especially for those who take anticoagulant or antiplatelet medications.” He added that curcumin and turmeric are generally considered safe when consumed in the typical amounts found in food.

Typically, turmeric spices contain around 3% curcumin, as per a 2009 study. The 2-gram dose administered in this study is relatively low when compared to the curcumin extracts commonly found in supplements, according to Pongpirul. Therefore, if one of the treatments, turmeric or omeprazole, proves to be equally effective in reducing the risk of side effects, taking both may not be necessary.

While Luo awaits further studies before recommending turmeric as a treatment, she suggested discussing the option with your healthcare provider in conjunction with your current medications. However, she advised giving each alternative two to four weeks to assess their full impact, noting that not all patients respond identically to medications, which is a common challenge in treating disorders.

Biden Supports World Bank For A Bigger Role On The Global Stage

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

World leaders have issued a call for the expansion of the World Bank to enhance its lending capacity. However, the bank has underscored that this expansion hinges on securing funding from the private sector, as reported in a recent statement.

The President of the World Bank, Ajay Banga, conveyed that the institution’s focus has broadened beyond poverty eradication to encompass pressing global challenges such as pandemics, climate change, and food security. In an exclusive interview with CNBC’s Tanvir Gill during the Group of 20 (G20) leaders’ summit in New Delhi, Banga emphasized the need for private sector involvement. He stated, “There’s no way there’s enough money in the multilateral development bank, or even in governments… that can drive the kinds of changes we need for this polycrisis. Getting the private sectors’ capital and ingenuity into the game is going to be very important.”

Banga further elaborated on the bank’s efforts to boost its lending capacity, stating, “We are digging deep to boost our lending capacity, but we are going further, creating new mechanisms that would allow us to do even more.” He shared these insights during the G20 leaders’ summit, highlighting the bank’s commitment to expanding concessional financing to assist more low-income countries in achieving their goals. Additionally, he mentioned a creative approach to fostering international cooperation in addressing shared challenges.

At the summit, U.S. President Joe Biden echoed the sentiment that the World Bank cannot tackle these challenges alone. Biden called on G20 leaders to provide increased support to the World Bank and other multilateral development banks over the next year, with the goal of enhancing the institution’s capacity to aid low and middle-income nations.

To achieve this objective, Biden requested Congress to allocate more than $25 billion in additional financing for the World Bank. This financial injection is expected to empower the bank to further assist developing countries in their pursuit of development and economic objectives. The White House noted that this initiative would strengthen the World Bank and enable it to provide resources at the scale and speed required to address global challenges and meet the urgent needs of the poorest countries.

The World Bank, originally established in 1944 to support post-World War II reconstruction in Europe and Japan, has evolved significantly over the years. It began with just 38 member nations and has since expanded to include a majority of the world’s countries.

Biden’s administration has previously emphasized the need to provide developing countries with alternative funding sources to reduce their reliance on China and support their recovery from the effects of Russia’s war on Ukraine. As part of this effort, the administration sought $3.3 billion to bolster development and infrastructure finance provided by the World Bank.

In addition to increasing resources for poverty reduction in developing countries, the expansion of the World Bank also aims to assist these nations in transitioning to renewable energy sources. President Banga expressed his vision of securing funds for renewable energy initiatives, which could potentially attract private sector investments at ratios of one-to-one, two-to-one, or even three-to-one. He highlighted the enthusiasm of investors to engage in renewable energy projects in developing countries, emphasizing their confidence in the profitability of ventures related to solar, wind, and geothermal energy.

Both the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund (IMF) have pledged to strengthen their partnership to support countries facing challenges related to debt, sustainability, and digital transformation. In a separate interview with CNBC’s Martin Soong at the G20 summit, the IMF’s Managing Director, Kristalina Georgieva, emphasized the evolving landscape of global lending institutions. She stressed the importance of addressing the pressing issue of mounting debt, with approximately 25% of emerging market debt approaching distressed levels. Georgieva highlighted the increasing number of low-income countries experiencing or nearing financial distress.

Georgieva further emphasized the complementary roles of the World Bank and the IMF, explaining that the World Bank possesses deep sectoral expertise that the IMF does not. The IMF’s strengths lie in advising on fiscal policies to facilitate the transition to a digital economy, assessing new types of risks, including those associated with cryptocurrencies and climate change, and utilizing data to inform policymakers on current and future concerns.

In conclusion, the call for the World Bank’s expansion to confront global challenges beyond poverty eradication has garnered support from world leaders, including President Biden. The key to realizing this expansion lies in securing private sector funding. As the institution evolves to address a broader array of global issues, it aims to provide increased concessional financing to low-income countries while fostering international cooperation.

The World Bank’s expansion also aims to support developing nations in their transition to renewable energy sources. Moreover, the partnership between the World Bank and the IMF is set to strengthen, with a focus on addressing debt-related challenges and promoting synergies to tackle global issues effectively. These developments reflect the changing landscape of international financial institutions and their commitment to working together for the greater good.

Republicans Launch Formal Impeachment Inquiry Into President Biden

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

In a surprising turn of events, Speaker Kevin McCarthy announced on Tuesday last week that he was instructing House Republicans to initiate an impeachment inquiry into President Joe Biden. Speaking from the U.S. Capitol, McCarthy delivered a concise formal statement, stating, “Today, I am directing our House committee to open a formal impeachment inquiry into President Joe Biden.” McCarthy chose not to field questions from the assembled reporters.

McCarthy’s previous stance had suggested that there would be a full House vote to initiate an impeachment inquiry, as had been the practice in previous instances. However, as of Tuesday, it appeared that McCarthy did not have the necessary support to hold such a vote. A spokesperson for McCarthy confirmed that there would not be a vote to kickstart the impeachment inquiry.

This move had been foreshadowed by McCarthy for several weeks. Part of the motivation appeared to be an effort to appease staunch GOP members and gain access to financial records and documents related to President Biden and his son, Hunter. McCarthy elucidated his rationale on Tuesday, saying, “This logical next step will give our committees the full power to gather the full facts and answers for the American public. That’s exactly what we want to know—the answers. I believe the president would want to answer these questions and allegations as well.”

The individuals selected to lead the impeachment inquiry were also disclosed by McCarthy. He designated House Oversight Committee Chairman James Comer, House Judiciary Committee Chairman Jim Jordan, and House Ways and Means Committee Chairman Jason Smith for this role.

House Republicans had been engaged in investigations for several months, attempting to establish links between President Biden and his son’s business dealings. However, no concrete evidence of wrongdoing by the president had been uncovered. McCarthy revealed that House Republicans, during the August recess, had come across what he termed as “serious and credible allegations into President Biden’s conduct.” When viewed collectively, these allegations painted a picture, in McCarthy’s words, of “a culture of corruption.”

Speaker McCarthy emphasized the gravity of his decision, stating, “I do not make this decision lightly. Regardless of your party, or who you voted for, these facts concern all Americans.”

Responding to McCarthy’s call for a formal impeachment inquiry into President Biden, White House spokesperson Ian Sams commented, “House Republicans have been investigating the President for 9 months, and they’ve turned up no evidence of wrongdoing. His own GOP members have said so. He vowed to hold a vote to open impeachment, now he flip-flopped because he doesn’t have support. Extreme politics at its worst.”

Hunter Biden’s attorney, Abbe Lowell, expressed his perspective on McCarthy’s actions, saying, “McCarthy has shown he will do anything to hold on to his gavel,” including launching an impeachment inquiry “based on repackaged, inaccurate conspiracies about Hunter Biden and his legitimate business activities.”

After leaving the House floor, McCarthy spoke to reporters once more, reiterating the importance of initiating an impeachment inquiry as a means to access more information. When asked if he believed President Biden had committed an impeachable offense, McCarthy replied, “All I’ve said is an impeachment inquiry allows us to get answers to get questions that are out there. Don’t you think the public wants answers?”

Former President Donald Trump had privately discussed an impeachment inquiry into President Biden with House Republicans, according to sources. Rep. Elise Stefanik, a member of Republican leadership, spoke with Trump and updated him on the impeachment inquiry on Tuesday afternoon, according to two sources.

Senate Republicans are scheduled to be briefed by Reps. Jordan and Comer during their lunch on Wednesday, confirming the seriousness of the matter. This briefing will be the first direct exposure to the evidence that Jordan and Comer claim to have uncovered, which could be pivotal for senators seeking more information about the House’s findings before making decisions on supporting further actions.

In a joint statement, Comer, Jordan, and Smith expressed their support for the impeachment inquiry, asserting, “The House Committees on Oversight and Accountability, Judiciary, and Ways and Means will continue to work to follow the facts to ensure President Biden is held accountable for abusing public office for his family’s financial gain. The American people demand and deserve answers, transparency, and accountability for this blatant abuse of public office.”

Sen. Mitt Romney, one of seven Senate Republicans who voted in 2021 to remove former President Donald Trump from office due to his involvement in the January 6 insurrection, endorsed the use of an impeachment inquiry to gain access to more information regarding President Biden’s business dealings. Romney explained, “The fact that the White House has been singularly silent and has coddled Hunter Biden suggests an inquiry is not inappropriate. That’s very different than an impeachment, an actual impeachment would require the evidence of a high crime or misdemeanor that has not been alleged. But inquiring is something the president and the White House could have avoided.”

Sen. Chuck Grassley, who has been investigating Hunter Biden’s business dealings for years, emphasized the distinction between an inquiry and an impeachment, stating, “An inquiry is an inquiry, it’s not an impeachment. And it seems to me it will open up an avenue to get a lot of information that we feel we’ve been stonewalled.”

Regarding the impeachment inquiry’s timing, this development arises as McCarthy aims to prevent a potential revolt from conservative hardliners and avert a government shutdown.

The House resumed its session on Tuesday, facing an impending September 30 deadline to pass a spending measure to keep the government operational. House Republican leaders are currently considering the passage of a continuing resolution, or a short-term funding extension, to provide additional time for negotiations on a comprehensive appropriations package.

However, members of the House Freedom Caucus, the same group that previously opposed McCarthy’s bid for the speakership and his debt limit agreement with President Biden, have indicated that they would not endorse a continuing resolution unless it includes specific provisions related to border security and the “weaponization of the DOJ.” Additionally, the group opposes further aid to Ukraine, potentially setting the House at odds with Senate Republican Leader Mitch McConnell.

In the midst of this tension, Florida Rep. Matt Gaetz publicly threatened to initiate a motion to vacate against McCarthy. Such a motion would compel a vote to determine McCarthy’s continued tenure as speaker. McCarthy downplayed the threat when speaking to reporters on Monday evening, stating that Gaetz “should go ahead and do it… Matt’s, Matt.” Gaetz reiterated this warning during a floor speech shortly after McCarthy’s announcement regarding the impeachment inquiry, describing McCarthy’s move as a “baby step” in response to pressure from House conservatives.

Another Planet May Have Rare Oceans And A Possible Sign Of Life

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Water might be present on the surface of an enormous celestial body located approximately 120 light-years away from Earth, as per recent discoveries made by the James Webb Space Telescope. This space-based observatory, renowned for its advanced astronomical capabilities, has unearthed intriguing clues indicating that the exoplanet K2-18b could possess essential characteristics conducive to the existence of water and potentially life.

K2-18b is situated in close proximity to the cool dwarf star K2-18, occupying what scientists refer to as the “habitable” or “Goldilocks” zone around the star. This zone is deemed suitable for supporting liquid water and, consequently, life. In terms of mass, K2-18b is approximately 8.6 times that of Earth. An extensive analysis of the observations made by the Webb telescope has disclosed the presence of substantial quantities of methane and carbon dioxide in the exoplanet’s atmosphere.

The detection of these carbon-based molecules, coupled with a limited presence of ammonia, suggests the potential existence of an atmosphere rich in hydrogen encompassing an oceanic world, according to a statement from NASA. Carbon, recognized as the fundamental building block of life on Earth, has sparked significant interest among scientists exploring extraterrestrial environments.

This intriguing journey into the possibility of water and life on K2-18b began with the Hubble Space Telescope, which initially detected indications of water vapor in the exoplanet’s atmosphere. This discovery, detailed in a September 2019 study, served as a catalyst for intensified investigation into K2-18b’s unique attributes.

The Webb telescope, with its capacity to detect infrared light that escapes human perception, embarked on a quest to precisely identify the elements present within the planet’s atmosphere. The most recent findings from these observations also suggest the potential presence of a distinctive molecule known as dimethyl sulfide on K2-18b.

Dimethyl sulfide on Earth is exclusively produced by living organisms, primarily phytoplankton in marine environments, according to NASA. However, researchers remain cautious in their assertions, emphasizing that further investigation is necessary to confirm the existence of dimethyl sulfide on K2-18b. Moreover, even if the presence of this chemical compound is corroborated, it does not guarantee the existence of life forms on the exoplanet.

Despite the absence of definitive claims regarding alien life on K2-18b, this new evidence serves to broaden our comprehension of exoplanets resembling K2-18b. The insights gleaned from the examination of its atmospheric composition indicate that it might belong to a category known as “Hycean exoplanets.” These hypothetical celestial bodies are characterized by high temperatures, extensive oceanic coverage, and hydrogen-rich atmospheres.

The existence of liquid oceans on Hycean exoplanets offers the potential for sustaining life, although there are lingering uncertainties about their habitability. A study published in The Astrophysical Journal in August points out that these planets could undergo a severe greenhouse effect, potentially rendering them inhospitable.

It is important to note that there are currently no confirmed instances of Hycean exoplanets. Furthermore, K2-18b is an extraordinary entity within our own solar system, which makes planets resembling it poorly understood, as acknowledged by NASA. The scientific community is actively engaged in debating the nature of their atmospheres, as highlighted in a NASA news release.

Nonetheless, scientists involved in the analysis of the recent observations of K2-18b emphasize the significance of unraveling its mysteries. Nikku Madhusudhan, an astronomer and professor of astrophysics and exoplanetary science at the University of Cambridge, who is the lead author of the forthcoming scientific paper detailing these findings, suggests that while further research is required to substantiate the presence of dimethyl sulfide and its implications, the results constitute a promising step in comprehending Hycean worlds. Madhusudhan articulated, “Our ultimate goal is the identification of life on a habitable exoplanet, which would transform our understanding of our place in the universe. Our findings are a promising step towards a deeper understanding of Hycean worlds in this quest.”

In pursuit of this quest for knowledge, researchers intend to leverage the capabilities of the Webb telescope to conduct additional investigations of this distant exoplanet. These subsequent efforts aim to validate and expand upon the newly uncovered insights. Savvas Constantinou, a doctoral student of astrophysics at the University of Cambridge and a co-author of the latest study, noted, “These results are the product of just two observations of K2-18 b, with many more on the way. This means our work here is but an early demonstration of what Webb can observe in habitable-zone exoplanets.”

In summary, the James Webb Space Telescope’s observations have ignited tantalizing possibilities regarding the presence of water and potentially life on the exoplanet K2-18b, situated in the habitable zone of the star K2-18. While this evidence offers promising insights into the composition of its atmosphere, researchers remain cautious about making definitive claims regarding the existence of life on this distant celestial body. Nonetheless, the pursuit of knowledge regarding exoplanets like K2-18b continues to drive scientific exploration and expand our understanding of the universe.

G20 Summit Showcases India’s Fence-Sitting Foreign Policy

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

As the Group of 20 summit commenced, India’s Foreign Minister, S. Jaishankar, emphasized India’s role in promoting geopolitical harmony amidst the backdrop of intensifying great power rivalry. During the conclusion of contentious negotiations over the joint leaders’ declaration in New Delhi, Jaishankar acknowledged the challenge of leading a “very broad, very diverse” group of member states and stated, “There’s a spectrum of views and interests out there that we have tried to harmonize to produce the declaration.”

The focal point of this “spectrum of views” revolved primarily around Russia’s invasion of Ukraine, with G20 officials striving to find common ground. Since the commencement of the conflict in early 2022, India had consistently advocated for a peaceful resolution while refraining from overtly condemning Russia. India shares a long history of partnership with Russia and depends on the country for weapons and affordable oil shipments.

While the G20 traditionally serves as a forum for economic and developmental discussions, recent years have witnessed the intrusion of geopolitical concerns into its agenda. As the summit approached, analysts anticipated difficulties in reaching a consensus on the statement’s wording, especially with the U.S. advocating for a clear denunciation of Russia’s invasion.

Ultimately, the declaration produced was largely influenced by India’s discreet diplomatic efforts, reflecting the host country’s balanced foreign policy approach. The declaration refrains from direct condemnation of Russia and instead includes a general summary of the United Nations’ principles, emphasizing the avoidance of force for territorial acquisition by states. It also acknowledges the human suffering and adverse impacts of the conflict in Ukraine. This stance marked a contrast from the previous year’s declaration, which expressed strong condemnation of Russia’s aggression and demanded its unconditional withdrawal from Ukrainian territory.

Another significant outcome of the summit was the African Union’s admission as a full member of the G20. This accomplishment was part of India’s concerted efforts to engage with developing countries in what it terms a “multialignment” strategy. In a world where the U.S. and China vie for global influence, India is seizing the opportunity to emerge as an alternative, focusing on the Global South and representing it in a polarized international order. This position echoes India’s stance during much of the Cold War when Prime Minister Jawaharlal Nehru helped establish the nonaligned movement, representing the “Third World” as a neutral force amid competing ideological blocs.

While some Asian countries like Japan and South Korea are strengthening their ties with the U.S. in response to China’s rise, India is pursuing a policy of hedging its bets. India’s role in mediating disagreements among G20 members regarding Russia’s Ukraine war could be seen as a pivotal moment in its ascent as a dealmaker and champion of a more flexible international order.

Harsh V. Pant, a professor of international relations at King’s College London and vice president of studies and foreign policy at the Observer Research Foundation, noted, “In some ways, the Global South approach that India has favored has [caught on], and that’s one metric of success. As major powers contest and compete, India will be more favorably positioned as a country that has channels of communication open with different stakeholders.”

Supporters of India’s “multialignment” foreign policy highlight its economic benefits. India has procured discounted Russian crude oil following Western sanctions on Russian oil exports. This affordable oil has significantly contributed to India’s economic growth, with K.C. Ramesh, executive director of Oil and Natural Gas Corporation, India’s largest oil company, affirming its positive impact.

Despite criticism from Western nations regarding its oil imports from Russia, India’s relations with the U.S. and the West have remained intact. In fact, India has witnessed a surge in exports to the U.S. over the past two years, with the U.S. surpassing China to become India’s largest trading partner in 2022, according to data from the Indian Commerce Ministry. Harsh V. Pant observed, “Despite Ukraine, India’s ties with the U.S. and West have not really suffered. You see greater acceptance of the logic of India’s position today.”

Vincent Magwenya, a spokesperson for South African President Cyril Ramaphosa, commended India for setting an attractive example for developing countries. He remarked, “We have expressly stated that we are not aligned to any particular global power, so what India has done is very much in line with our own foreign policy.”

Despite championing the cause of the Global South, India remains part of the U.S.-led Quadrilateral Security Dialogue (Quad), which includes Australia and Japan. Additionally, India is a member of the China- and Russia-led Shanghai Cooperation Organization, emphasizing its commitment to engaging with partners globally based on national interests. In an interview with Nikkei Asia before his participation as a special guest at the Group of Seven summit in Hiroshima, Prime Minister Narendra Modi stated, “As a member of the Global South, our interest in any plurilateral setting is to serve as a bridge between diverse voices and contribute to a constructive and positive agenda.”

The compromise regarding the language concerning Russia’s Ukraine invasion aligns with India’s broader diplomatic pattern, prioritizing tangible benefits such as trade and infrastructure that directly enhance domestic prosperity over ideological commitments and shared values in international relations. Praveen Donthi, senior analyst for India at the International Crisis Group, noted the divergence between the so-called rules-based international order and India’s pragmatic approach. He emphasized that India positions itself as a narrative shaper, a voice of the Global South, and an independent force pursuing multialignment.

Alongside the leaders’ statement on Russia’s Ukraine invasion, Prime Minister Modi worked on several deals during the G20 summit. This included a railway and ports project aimed at connecting the Middle East and South Asia, offering an alternative to China’s Belt and Road initiative. The project involves various partners, including the European Union, the U.S., and Saudi Arabia, demonstrating India’s proactive approach to regional connectivity and economic cooperation.

The Challenges of India’s Diplomatic Role

In the aftermath of a recent leaders’ declaration, Indian officials have found themselves fielding questions regarding a notable shift in language compared to the previous year’s G20 summit in Bali, Indonesia. While last year’s statement explicitly mentioned Russia in the context of the ongoing war and its impact on global stability, the current declaration, issued from New Delhi, takes a different approach. When asked about this divergence, India’s External Affairs Minister, Jaishankar, offered a succinct response: “I can only say Bali was Bali and New Delhi is New Delhi. Bali was a year ago, the situation was different. Many things have happened since then.”

This shift in rhetoric reflects India’s evolving role on the global stage, as it joins other non-Western countries in presenting an alternative vision of international relations. According to Sarang Shidore, director of the Global South Program at the Quincy Institute for Responsible Statecraft, this new vision seeks to forge “alternative, more equitable pathways to development that plug existing gaps in the U.S.-led order.” It’s a vision that resonates with many nations in the Global South, offering an alternative perspective on global governance.

However, not all experts in international relations are convinced that India’s newfound prominence will be sustainable. The ongoing war in Ukraine and the intensifying superpower rivalry between the United States and China have placed India in a position where it is courted from all sides. Yet, the durability of India’s current status remains uncertain unless it can establish relationships founded on shared values and principles rather than short-term expediency.

Sumit Ganguly, an expert on Indian foreign policy at Indiana University, points out that while Jaishankar and Prime Minister Modi are skillfully leveraging their relationships with global powers, the lack of durable ties based on values and shared beliefs may prove detrimental in the long run. In essence, building genuine friendships, rather than transactional alliances, should be India’s focus.

India’s need for true allies becomes particularly evident in light of escalating tensions with China, centered around the Himalayan border. The violent clashes in 2020 resulted in casualties on both sides and underscored the seriousness of the border dispute. In the face of an increasingly assertive China, India’s strategy of deliberate nonalignment stands in stark contrast to the recent foreign policy approaches of other Asian powers, such as Japan and South Korea.

Japan and South Korea, despite historical tensions stemming from Japan’s occupation of the Korean Peninsula from 1910 to 1945, have taken steps to deepen their security ties with each other and with the United States. They emphasize the importance of a “rules-based international order,” a stark contrast to India’s nonaligned stance.

South Korean President Yoon Suk Yeol, known for his strict adherence to rules and principles, cites common values of democracy and global trade as the basis for deeper cooperation between Japan and South Korea. The two nations also face shared threats from China and North Korea, which continues to advance its weapons programs. In an unexpected turn, Yoon took part in a summit with Japanese Prime Minister Fumio Kishida and U.S. President Joe Biden in which they agreed to share real-time information on North Korean missiles. Such cooperation would have been unthinkable a few years ago.

The emphasis on alliances among democracies is closely tied to growing concerns about China’s intentions and actions. As Park Hwee-rak, a professor of political science at Kookmin University in Seoul, points out, China has failed to convince South Korea and other neighbors of its commitment to democracy and regional leadership. Consequently, the U.S. appears to be the only reliable partner for democracies like South Korea, which cannot be replaced by China.

Turning our focus back to India, the G20 summit held significant importance for Prime Minister Modi. It allowed him to project an image of a strong and influential India just ahead of general elections. Modi’s investment in the G20 summit was, in part, aimed at presenting an India that diverges from the daily struggles experienced by many of its citizens. Despite longstanding expectations of India becoming Asia’s economic powerhouse, some analysts argue that Indian policymakers have failed to foster a robust middle class, and the country still lags behind in key measures of well-being, including access to food and medical care.

Critics of Modi’s leadership argue that his control over the country is characterized less by harmony and more by division and fear. In the weeks leading up to the G20 Summit, India was marred by incidents such as a mob setting fire to a mosque near New Delhi and violent clashes in Manipur. Opposition leader Rahul Gandhi has been among those criticizing Modi for failing to quell such violence, alleging that his politics of Hindu supremacism have fueled social unrest.

Despite Modi’s rhetoric about spearheading an alternative diplomatic approach and bridging the gap between the Global South and industrialized nations, his primary focus appears to be harnessing foreign policy for domestic political gains. As noted by the International Crisis Group’s Donthi, the government excels at offering intangible benefits such as boosting India’s global prestige while constantly strategizing to secure electoral victories.

India’s evolving role on the global stage, as seen through its participation in the G20 summit, signifies a departure from previous diplomatic approaches. While India’s nonaligned stance and emphasis on alternative visions of international relations may hold appeal for some nations, the sustainability of its newfound prominence remains uncertain. Building lasting relationships based on shared values and principles, rather than mere expediency, will be key to India’s success in the complex world of international diplomacy.

“Can’t Prosecute Journalists For False Reports”

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Shielding right to free speech of journalists, the Supreme Court of India said it would be “egregious” to prosecute journalists for false statements in their reports and protected the three Editors Guild of India (EGI) members from arrest in the FIRs lodged against them for a controversial report on media coverage and government handling of ethnic clashes in Manipur.

The court stated that prosecuting journalists for false statements in their reports would be “egregious” and that even if the report was false, journalists cannot be prosecuted under Section 153A of the Indian Penal Code.

A Meitei NGO, which had lodged the FIRs against the EGI members, opposed the journalists’ plea for revoking the FIRs alleging that the report was full of falsehoods propagated by the Kuki side which deepened the ethnic divide and fuelled violence.

A bench led by CJI DY Chandrachud said, “It would be egregious to prosecute journalists under Section 153A of IPC (promoting enmity between communities) for false statements in their reports. The report may be right or wrong. But that is what free speech is all about.”

The CJI added, “Your [the NGO’s] entire complaint is a counter narrative of the government. Assuming that the EGI report is false, it is not an offence under Section 153A. A false statement in an article (by a journalist) is not an offence under Section 153A. There are falsehoods in articles published across the country every day, do we prosecute all journalists under Section 153A?”

Solicitor general Tushar Mehta said, “My only worry is that any organisation now can put up a fact-finding committee, file a report and place it alongside the counter views and then come before the SC seeking quashing of the FIR. With this (kind of report), we may not be able to control the narrative building by both sides. Anyone or a team of people can go, put out a particular view and then say it would put counter views alongside the report.”

The CJI said, “The Army wrote to the EGI and complained of biased or one-sided reporting of the ethnic violence. The Army invited them. They went to the ground and submitted a report.”

The bench asked the Meitei NGO’s counsel Guru Krishna Kumar to file its response to the EGI’s plea for quashing of the FIR after EGI counsel Shyam Divan repeatedly said that lodging of FIRs had a chilling effect on free speech of journalists.

It’s noteworthy that in April 2018, the Modi government stated, it will deny government access to journalists who publish fake news, the information ministry had announced. Journalists found guilty of writing or broadcasting fake news will have their government accreditation withdrawn for a limited period or permanently, depending on the frequency of violations, the Information and Broadcasting Ministry said

Journalists and opposition parties described the new rules as an effort by Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s government to control the press.Critics labelled this an attack on the freedom of the press in the world’s largest democracy.

Is Using The 14th Amendment To Disqualify Trump Is Anti-Democratic?

September 27, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Efforts to prevent former President Donald Trump from appearing on the 2024 ballot under the 14th Amendment are gaining momentum, but they are met with resistance from election officials and legal scholars who express concerns about the anti-democratic nature of such actions.

Two conservative members of the Federalist Society recently supported the idea that Trump could be disqualified, leading to two substantial challenges to his eligibility. In Colorado, the watchdog group Citizens for Responsibility and Ethics (CREW) filed a lawsuit on behalf of six Republican and unaffiliated voters in state court. Meanwhile, in Minnesota, the organization Free Speech for People initiated a legal challenge on behalf of a group of voters in the state’s Supreme Court. Both lawsuits argue that Trump would be ineligible to hold federal office again under Section 3 of the 14th Amendment.

Section 3 of the 14th Amendment states that a candidate can be disqualified if they “engaged in insurrection or rebellion against” the United States or provided “aid or comfort to the enemies thereof,” unless granted amnesty by a two-thirds vote of Congress. Trump has vigorously opposed these efforts, labeling them as “election interference” and asserting his innocence.

Despite mounting challenges in various states like Michigan, Virginia, and Connecticut, where secretaries of state are urged to remove Trump from the ballots, New Hampshire Secretary of State David Scanlan, a Republican, emphasized that he lacks the legal authority to do so. He stated, “There is nothing in our state statute that gives the secretary of state discretion in entertaining qualification issues.”

Several Republican officials, including Georgia Secretary of State Brad Raffensperger and Gabriel Sterling, have also spoken out against disqualifying candidates through partisan actions. Raffensperger, who faced pressure from Trump during the 2020 election, warned against using the 14th Amendment as a means to bypass the ballot box. Sterling stressed the importance of trusting the voters and the potential danger of setting a precedent by interpreting the Constitution in a way that removes candidates.

Michigan’s Secretary of State Jocelyn Benson echoed this sentiment, writing in an op-ed for the Washington Post that the decision on Trump’s eligibility ultimately rests with the courts. She emphasized that, unless a court rules otherwise, Trump will be on the Republican presidential primary ballot in Michigan in 2024.

The interpretation of the term ‘insurrection’ is a central issue in these debates. While Section 3 of the 14th Amendment was originally used to disqualify individuals who held roles in the Confederacy after the Civil War, some legal scholars question whether the events of January 6, when a mob of Trump supporters attacked the Capitol, constitute an insurrection within the constitutional definition.

Gerard Magliocca, an expert on the 14th Amendment from Indiana University, raised questions about whether the Capitol attack equates to the scale of the South’s armed rebellion. He also noted that because Trump has never been criminally charged for inciting insurrection or rebellion, some opponents argue that this weakens any case for disqualification under the 14th Amendment.

Michael McConnell, a professor at Stanford Law School, emphasized that interpreting the term “engage” in the context of insurrection might require more than mere verbal support. He pointed out that Trump was not physically present at the Capitol when the violence occurred and that his speech alone might not be sufficient evidence of direct involvement.

Gabriel Sterling, the Georgia elections official, anticipates that courts would consider the absence of a criminal conviction as a significant reason against disqualification. He explained that if someone were convicted of insurrection, that would be a different scenario, but it does not apply to Trump’s case.

On the contrary, McConnell argued that Trump’s ineligibility under the 14th Amendment does not necessarily hinge on a criminal conviction for insurrection. He stated that it is not a requirement for Section 3 to apply, citing historical examples where individuals were disqualified after the Civil War without criminal charges or convictions.

Efforts to disqualify Donald Trump from the 2024 ballot under the 14th Amendment are gaining traction in various states, but they face opposition from election officials and legal scholars who raise concerns about the interpretation of the term ‘insurrection’ and the potential precedent-setting nature of such actions. The debate over Trump’s eligibility is likely to continue in the courts, with the ultimate decision resting on legal interpretations and judgments. Efforts to prevent former President Donald Trump from appearing on the 2024 ballot under the 14th Amendment are gaining momentum, but they are met with resistance from election officials and legal scholars who express concerns about the anti-democratic nature of such actions.

Concerns Surrounding Trump’s Ballot Access

Efforts to bar Donald Trump from running in state primaries face substantial practical hurdles, including potential countersuits and unsympathetic courts. Even if these efforts were to reach the U.S. Supreme Court, success is far from guaranteed. Moreover, it’s essential to recognize that the ongoing challenges pertain to Trump’s participation in primary elections, which are distinct from the actual presidential election. Primaries determine the nominees for the Democratic and Republican parties, not the president.

Professor McConnell from Stanford University highlights the complexity of this issue, stating, “Even if a state like Colorado were to prevent Donald Trump from participating in the primary election for the presidency, there is no mechanism to prevent the Republican National Convention from nominating him as their candidate. So, even if these groups were to succeed legally, it remains unclear what tangible impact it would have.”

He also underscores the speculative nature of these actions, emphasizing that the high degree of confidence exhibited by some individuals is unwarranted. This situation presents a unique challenge, with historical precedents dating back over a century, leaving many uncertainties. In essence, we find ourselves navigating uncharted territory in the realm of election law.

\While concerns about Trump’s participation in primary elections persist, it’s crucial to remain cognizant of the practical obstacles that lie ahead. These efforts are met with legal complexities, and their ultimate impact remains uncertain in the broader context of American presidential elections.

Menendez Accused of Brazen Bribery Plot, Taking Cash and Gold

September 27, 2023October 3, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

Senator Robert Menendez of New Jersey, Chairman of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee and a Democrat, faced serious charges on Friday, accused of accepting substantial bribes, including gold bullion bars, to leverage his influence both domestically and internationally.

A three-count federal indictment unveiled a audacious scheme that unfolded during clandestine dinners, through text messages, and on encrypted calls, much of it focused on increasing U.S. support for Egypt and assisting New Jersey businessmen.

Mr. Menendez’s spouse, Nadine Menendez, is alleged to have acted as an intermediary, relaying messages to American-Egyptian businessman Wael Hana, known for his close ties to Egyptian military and intelligence figures. In one text message to an Egyptian general, Mr. Hana referred to Senator Menendez, who wielded significant influence over military sales, financing, and aid, as “our man.”

In a robust response to the charges, Senator Menendez expressed confidence that the matter would be “successfully resolved once all of the facts are presented.”

The charges filed on Friday paint a picture of a mingling of New Jersey’s rough-and-tumble backroom politics and delicate Middle Eastern security concerns. These allegations represent the latest chapter in a long political career that took Senator Menendez, the child of Cuban immigrants, from the Union City, New Jersey, school board to the hallowed halls of the Senate. His career has been marked by accusations of corruption and an earlier federal indictment that resulted in a hung jury.

These new charges not only jeopardize Mr. Menendez’s considerable political influence but also his personal freedom.

Governor Philip D. Murphy of New Jersey, a close Democratic ally, called for Senator Menendez’s resignation, a call echoed by numerous political leaders across the state. Senator Menendez, however, rebuffed these demands, asserting in a statement on Friday evening, “I’m not going anywhere.”

In accordance with Senate Democratic rules, Senator Menendez did notify Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer of New York that he would step down as Chairman of the Foreign Relations Committee.

The indictment goes beyond allegations of corruption related to foreign aid. Senator Menendez is accused of using his position to manipulate criminal investigations involving two other New Jersey businessmen, one of whom had long been a fundraiser for him. In furtherance of this goal, the Senator recommended that President Biden nominate attorney Philip R. Sellinger as the U.S. attorney for New Jersey, believing that he could influence Sellinger’s handling of the fundraiser’s case. However, Sellinger, who ultimately assumed the role, remained unswayed by Senator Menendez’s efforts, according to prosecutors.

Additionally, Senator Menendez stands accused of interfering in an investigation by the New Jersey attorney general’s office by offering “advice and pressure” in an attempt to persuade a senior prosecutor to show leniency in the case of two associates of an individual who gifted Ms. Menendez a Mercedes-Benz convertible. The prosecutor deemed Senator Menendez’s actions “inappropriate” and declined to intervene, as stated in the indictment.

In return for these actions, the indictment alleges that the Senator and his spouse received cash, gold, contributions toward a home mortgage, the luxury car, and other valuable items. The day after a trip to Egypt in 2021, Senator Menendez reportedly conducted an internet search inquiring “how much is one kilo of gold worth.”

During a news conference announcing the charges, Damian Williams, the U.S. Attorney for the Southern District of New York, contended that Senator Menendez’s actions were intended to benefit a select few.

Williams noted that Senator Menendez’s Senate website explicitly outlined the types of services he would not provide due to their impropriety, including influencing private business matters and interfering in judicial matters and criminal trials.

“Constituent service is part of any legislator’s job – Senator Menendez is no different,” Williams remarked. However, he added, “Behind the scenes, Senator Menendez was doing those things for certain people – the people who were bribing him and his wife.”

Shortly after the news conference, Senator Menendez issued a vehement one-page rebuttal of the charges, attributing them to unidentified “forces behind the scenes” that have consistently attempted to silence him and undermine his political career.

“The excesses of these prosecutors are evident,” he asserted. “They have misrepresented the standard work of a congressional office. Moreover, not content with making false accusations against me, they have attacked my wife for the longstanding friendships she had prior to our meeting.”

David Schertler, Ms. Menendez’s attorney, affirmed that his client had not violated any laws.

“Mrs. Menendez denies any criminal wrongdoing and will vigorously contest these charges in court,” Mr. Schertler stated.

These charges against Senator Menendez, aged 69, and others come after a lengthy investigation by the FBI and federal prosecutors in Manhattan, nearly six years following his previous trial on unrelated corruption allegations, which resulted in a hung jury.

James Smith, who leads the New York FBI office, expressed on Friday that the conduct outlined in the indictment “erodes the public’s trust in our government system and unfairly tarnishes the reputations of honest and dedicated public servants who faithfully carry out their duties every day.”

The businessmen named in the indictment, which was unsealed in Manhattan federal court, include Mr. Hana, a close friend of Ms. Menendez who founded a halal meat certification company; Fred Daibes, a New Jersey real estate developer and a fundraiser for Senator Menendez; and Jose Uribe, involved in the trucking and insurance sectors.

The 39-page indictment levels charges of conspiracy to commit bribery and conspiracy to commit honest services wire fraud against the Senator, his wife, and the businessmen. It further accuses Senator Menendez and his spouse of conspiracy to commit extortion under the color of official right, signifying their use of his official position to coerce individuals into providing something of value.

In a recent indictment, Ms. Menendez once boasted that her actions would elevate Mr. Hana’s status above that of the Egyptian president.

Back in 2018, when Ms. Menendez, aged 56, and Mr. Hana were in the early stages of their relationship, they orchestrated meetings and dinners with Egyptian officials, with the involvement of Mr. Menendez. During these encounters, the Egyptian officials presented requests related to foreign military sales and financing, among other matters. In exchange for Mr. Menendez’s commitment to facilitate such transactions, the indictment revealed that Mr. Hana promised to employ Ms. Menendez in a role where she would perform minimal or no work.

Following one meeting with Egyptian officials, Mr. Menendez managed to obtain sensitive, nonpublic information about the staffing and nationalities of individuals serving at the U.S. Embassy in Egypt from the State Department. This information was considered highly confidential, and its disclosure could pose security risks. Mr. Menendez shared this information via text with Ms. Menendez, who then forwarded it to Mr. Hana. Subsequently, Mr. Hana transmitted it to an Egyptian official.

Around the same time, during a dinner engagement, Mr. Menendez disclosed additional nonpublic details regarding United States military aid. Shortly afterward, Mr. Hana communicated with another Egyptian official, informing them that the embargo on small arms and ammunition to Egypt had been lifted, enabling sales, including sniper rifles.

The indictment further exposed the close rapport cultivated by Ms. Menendez and Mr. Hana between her husband and Egyptian officials. On one occasion, Mr. Menendez convened a meeting in his Senate office with Ms. Menendez, Mr. Hana, and an Egyptian intelligence officer to address a human rights issue impacting aid to Egypt. Later that evening, the group reconvened for dinner at a Washington steakhouse.

In 2019, Mr. Hana established IS EG Halal, his company. Within a year, the Egyptian government designated it as the sole entity authorized to certify the preparation of halal meat according to Islamic law for imports to Egypt from any part of the world.

When a high-ranking official at the U.S. Department of Agriculture voiced concerns about this monopoly’s impact on U.S. interests, Mr. Menendez personally contacted the official. He insisted that the U.S.D.A. cease its opposition to IS EG Halal’s exclusive status as a halal certifier, as detailed in the indictment. The halal company served as a source of revenue for Mr. Hana, allowing him to fulfill the bribe payments he had committed to.

The indictment also highlighted the involvement of Mr. Daibes and Mr. Uribe, the other businessmen facing charges in this case, in providing payments to Ms. Menendez.

In 2019, Ms. Menendez expressed frustration to her husband regarding an expected check that had not arrived. She texted Mr. Menendez, stating, “I am soooooo upset,” and mentioned that Mr. Hana had not left her an envelope. She inquired about whether she should contact Mr. Daibes, to which Mr. Menendez responded, “No, you should not text or email.”

Shortly afterward, Ms. Menendez reached out to Mr. Daibes, leading Mr. Hana’s company to issue a $10,000 check to a consulting firm owned by Ms. Menendez.

During a search of the Menendez’s residence in Englewood Cliffs, N.J., and a safe deposit box registered in Ms. Menendez’s name, investigators discovered $550,000 in cash. A significant portion of this money was concealed within clothing, closets, and a safe. Some of the cash was stored in envelopes bearing the fingerprints or DNA of Mr. Daibes or his unidentified driver.

In addition to the cash, investigators located over $100,000 worth of gold bars, with photographs of some of these bars included in the indictment.

A spokeswoman for Mr. Hana commented that, following an initial review of the charges, they found them to be without merit. Mr. Daibes’s lawyer, Tim Donohue, expressed confidence that Mr. Daibes would be completely exonerated from all charges. As of now, there has been no response from Mr. Uribe’s representative.

Senator Menendez, his wife, and their three co-defendants are scheduled to appear in Manhattan federal court soon, as confirmed by Nicholas Biase, a spokesperson for the Southern District.

This isn’t Senator Menendez’s first legal encounter. In 2015, he faced bribery charges in New Jersey, involving a purported scheme with a wealthy eye doctor to exchange political favors for gifts valued at nearly $1 million. These gifts included luxurious Caribbean vacations and campaign contributions. His corruption trial in 2017 ended in a mistrial after the jury failed to reach a verdict. The judge later acquitted Mr. Menendez of several charges, and the Justice Department dismissed the rest.

Friday’s indictment reverberated across Washington and New Jersey, with calls for Senator Menendez to step down emerging from members of his own party and Congress. Notably, Senator Cory Booker of New Jersey, a close ally of Mr. Menendez, has remained silent on the allegations and resignation demands.

Senator Menendez is already facing at least one Democratic challenger in his bid for a fourth Senate term, with the Republican mayor of Mendham Borough, N.J., also announcing her intention to compete for the seat. If Senator Menendez were to resign, as Governor Murphy has proposed, the governor would appoint a replacement.

Governor Murphy commented on the charges, stating, “These are serious charges that implicate national security and the integrity of our criminal justice system. The alleged facts are so serious that they compromise the ability of Senator Menendez to effectively represent the people of our state.”

New York Climate Week Made One Thing Clear: Climate Action is Complicated

September 27, 2023October 3, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

When reporting on unfolding news events, one of the primary challenges lies in crafting a coherent narrative amidst the complexities of reality. In New York this week, a convergence of government officials, corporate leaders, and civil society figures gathered to discuss the pressing issue of climate change. This assembly, known as New York Climate Week, is not a conventional conference but rather a series of meetings and ancillary events coinciding with the United Nations General Assembly. While some may question the efficacy of such gatherings,
they offer valuable insights into the perspectives and strategies of those engaged in tackling climate-related challenges.

The landscape of climate action is undeniably intricate and multifaceted. On one hand, the transition towards a more sustainable future is making notable progress. Investment in clean energy has surged in recent years, and despite resistance to environmental, social, and governance (ESG) initiatives, corporations continue to invest in decarbonization. On the other hand, a complex web of political and economic obstacles has cast a shadow over efforts to enact more ambitious climate policies. Corporations, once enthusiastic about making substantial commitments to combat climate change, have encountered the stark reality that implementation is far more challenging than making announcements.

Oliver Bäte, the CEO of the German financial services firm Allianz, articulated this predicament at the United Nations, stating, "The long era of robust economic growth, low inflation, and
geopolitical stability is over. Suddenly, fighting climate change has become an ever greater challenge." These hurdles are disconcerting for those concerned about the escalating threat of
rising temperatures and the attendant risks to humanity. However, an alternative perspective suggests that these challenges signify the full-scale initiation of the energy transition, and our
response to them will be pivotal.

To comprehend this dual narrative, it is beneficial to examine the actions of both the private sector and government independently.

In the private sector, a growing cohort of companies has made bold pledges to achieve decarbonization in the coming decades. These commitments garnered acclaim upon their initial announcement. However, the time has come for these companies to translate their promises into tangible results. Many businesses began with the low-hanging fruit, such as procuring renewable
energy and enhancing energy efficiency. Nonetheless, achieving the necessary emissions reductions to fulfill their commitments often demands substantial effort. This entails devising novel business models and products rather than simply refining existing ones. Concurrently, rising interest rates and disruptions in supply chains stemming from the pandemic have complicated matters. Companies are now competing for limited supplies of low-carbon materials, exemplified by manufacturers vying for a restricted quantity of low-carbon steel. During discussions in New York, corporate executives underscored their commitments while expressing a sense that the current political and economic climate has impeded progress. The political landscape presents a similar labyrinth of challenges. Some heads of state arrived in New York to announce fresh commitments to combat climate change. Others advocated for combining ambition with realism, with pragmatism emerging as a central theme, as exemplified by the official from the United Arab Emirates tasked with leading this years’s U.N. climate conference. Conversely, some leaders chose not to attend at all, as demonstrated by British Prime Minister Rishi Sunak, who declared this week that the UK should temper its climate efforts. In a way, these setbacks are a natural consequence of progress. Political and business leaders must collaboratively navigate these hurdles to sustain momentum. It’s a task that no conference or summit can fully resolve.

Why India’s Women’s Reservation Bill Is a Major Step Forward

September 26, 2023October 3, 2023 Staff ReporterNews 0

India took a significant stride towards gender equality this week as Prime Minister Narendra Modi, during a special parliamentary session, unveiled a bill that aims to reserve one-third of
seats in the more influential lower house and state legislative assemblies for women. Modi, while introducing the Nari Shakti Vandan Adhiniyam, or Women’s Reservation Bill, declared this momentous occasion, saying, “This is a historic moment, this is a moment of pride for us.”

A similar bill was initially proposed in September 1996, with successive Indian governments attempting but failing to pass it into law due to strong opposition from conservative heartland
parties. In 2010, Mulayam Singh Yadav, a leader of the socialist Samajwadi Party, voiced the sentiment of wanting reservations for women from minority and backward classes before endorsing such a bill: “We are not anti-women.”

After 27 years in the making, the Women’s Reservation Bill achieved near-unanimous approval in the lower house on Wednesday, before smoothly passing through the upper house late Thursday. The bill now awaits the President's signature to become law.

“U.N. Women applauds the passage of the bill," stated Kanta Singh, a country representative from the international agency, describing it as “one of the most progressive and transformative pieces of legislation that would bring women into the highest decision-making bodies." As per Reuters, women currently occupy a mere 15% of seats in the lower house, with only 82 out of 550 seats held by women. This number further decreases in the upper house, where women occupy just 12% of the seats, accounting for 31 out of 250. A 2015 Report on the Status of Women in India by the Ministry of Women and Child Development highlighted the dismal representation of women in parliament and state assemblies, especially in senior decision-making positions.

Apart from parliament, India has seen only one woman Prime Minister and two female Presidents since gaining independence in 1947. Furthermore, only 15 women have served as Chief Ministers. This record has placed India, often referred to as the world’s largest democracy, near the bottom of the global list concerning gender parity in legislatures. The country ranks 141
out of 185 in the World Economic Forum's latest Global Gender Gap Report.

Nevertheless, there has been a seven-fold increase in the number of women contesting elections since the 1950s. However, economist Shamika Ravi, a member of the Indian government’s Economic Advisory Council, notes that most women run as independent candidates and often face significant barriers to entering politics or assuming leadership roles, including the need for substantial campaign funding and political party backing.

Ravi believes that the new bill, which establishes a legally-binding target for the number of women lawmakers by 2029, will incentivize political parties to be more gender-inclusive and appoint more women to leadership positions.

This legislation comes at a time when women in India have been actively engaged as voters, constituting nearly half of India's 950 million registered voters—a number that has consistently grown over the last two decades. Studies have indicated that women tend to vote differently from men. For instance, in a 2005 hung election in the northern state of Bihar, Ravi found that women supported a new set of candidates, signaling a desire for change, while men generally voted for the status quo.

Supporters of the bill argue that quotas for women have already yielded positive results at the local level after their introduction in 1993. Ambar Kumar Ghosh from the Observer Researcher Foundation, a New Delhi-based think tank, notes that women now occupy around 44% of seats in local assemblies, showcasing significant progress in women’s political empowerment at the grassroots level. This achievement, Ghosh says, places India among the world’s leading nations in facilitating women's political empowerment at the local level, surpassing countries like France, the U.K., Germany, and Japan.

This landmark bill comes just months before India's next general elections, scheduled for May 2024, during which Modi will seek his third term in office. Its passage in the lower house sparked an eight-hour debate, with opposition parties, led by the Indian National Congress, engaged in a heated battle over who deserves credit for this historic legislation.

Sonia Gandhi, a former leader of Congress, asserted the bill as “ours”and stated,”I must say it be a victory for the Congress Party if the bill is finally passed.” Economist Shamika Ravi views this contention positively, suggesting that it signifies broad ownership of the idea of women’s reservation, potentially leading to increased opportunities for women from various political parties during election time.

We all want to feel appreciated

We take the things our partners do for us for granted

How to open a cycle of appreciation and gratitude

Dr. Shyam Kottilil – Life Time Achievement Award

Sajeeb Koya – Entrepreneurship

Dr. Anna George – for Nursing

Dr. Shelby Kutty – Medicine

Ajay Ghosh – Media and Journalism

Lata Menon, Esq. – Legal Services

Jayant Kamicheril – Pravasi Malayalam Literature

Gopala Pillai –Community Service

TheUNN Corporation

CONTACT US

Follow us

Subscribe to Newsletter